From 1ea73eea5ecc6a8ed901316049259aee737ee554 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Joey Hess Date: Fri, 7 Oct 2005 19:51:38 +0000 Subject: move manual to top-level directory, split out of debian-installer package --- en/administrivia/administrivia.xml | 155 +++++++ en/appendix/chroot-install.xml | 458 +++++++++++++++++++ en/appendix/example-preseed-etch.xml | 372 ++++++++++++++++ en/appendix/example-preseed-sarge.xml | 366 ++++++++++++++++ en/appendix/example-preseed.xml | 39 ++ en/appendix/files.xml | 298 +++++++++++++ en/appendix/gpl.xml | 512 ++++++++++++++++++++++ en/appendix/plip.xml | 194 ++++++++ en/appendix/random-bits.xml | 11 + en/bookinfo.xml | 55 +++ en/boot-installer/alpha.xml | 441 +++++++++++++++++++ en/boot-installer/arm.xml | 113 +++++ en/boot-installer/boot-installer.xml | 32 ++ en/boot-installer/hppa.xml | 12 + en/boot-installer/i386.xml | 379 ++++++++++++++++ en/boot-installer/ia64.xml | 464 ++++++++++++++++++++ en/boot-installer/intro-cd.xml | 35 ++ en/boot-installer/intro-hd.xml | 16 + en/boot-installer/intro-net.xml | 19 + en/boot-installer/m68k.xml | 371 ++++++++++++++++ en/boot-installer/mips.xml | 100 +++++ en/boot-installer/mipsel.xml | 12 + en/boot-installer/parameters.xml | 351 +++++++++++++++ en/boot-installer/powerpc.xml | 247 +++++++++++ en/boot-installer/s390.xml | 30 ++ en/boot-installer/sparc.xml | 89 ++++ en/boot-installer/trouble.xml | 274 ++++++++++++ en/boot-new/boot-new.xml | 291 ++++++++++++ en/boot-new/modules/apt.xml | 114 +++++ en/boot-new/modules/install.xml | 39 ++ en/boot-new/modules/mta.xml | 93 ++++ en/boot-new/modules/packages.xml | 162 +++++++ en/boot-new/modules/ppp.xml | 142 ++++++ en/boot-new/modules/shadow.xml | 69 +++ en/boot-new/modules/timezone.xml | 30 ++ en/hardware/hardware-supported.xml | 341 ++++++++++++++ en/hardware/hardware.xml | 21 + en/hardware/installation-media.xml | 311 +++++++++++++ en/hardware/memory-disk-requirements.xml | 47 ++ en/hardware/network-cards.xml | 214 +++++++++ en/hardware/supported-peripherals.xml | 187 ++++++++ en/hardware/supported/alpha.xml | 457 +++++++++++++++++++ en/hardware/supported/arm.xml | 95 ++++ en/hardware/supported/hppa.xml | 17 + en/hardware/supported/i386.xml | 37 ++ en/hardware/supported/ia64.xml | 3 + en/hardware/supported/m68k.xml | 39 ++ en/hardware/supported/mips.xml | 52 +++ en/hardware/supported/mipsel.xml | 149 +++++++ en/hardware/supported/powerpc.xml | 381 ++++++++++++++++ en/hardware/supported/s390.xml | 21 + en/hardware/supported/sparc.xml | 82 ++++ en/howto/installation-howto.xml | 350 +++++++++++++++ en/install-methods/automatic-install.xml | 111 +++++ en/install-methods/boot-drive-files.xml | 176 ++++++++ en/install-methods/boot-usb-files.xml | 125 ++++++ en/install-methods/create-floppy.xml | 108 +++++ en/install-methods/download/alpha.xml | 36 ++ en/install-methods/download/arm.xml | 37 ++ en/install-methods/download/m68k.xml | 23 + en/install-methods/download/powerpc.xml | 28 ++ en/install-methods/downloading-files.xml | 37 ++ en/install-methods/floppy/i386.xml | 35 ++ en/install-methods/floppy/m68k.xml | 29 ++ en/install-methods/floppy/powerpc.xml | 122 ++++++ en/install-methods/install-methods.xml | 16 + en/install-methods/install-tftp.xml | 430 ++++++++++++++++++ en/install-methods/ipl-tape.xml | 24 + en/install-methods/official-cdrom.xml | 69 +++ en/install-methods/tftp/bootp.xml | 72 +++ en/install-methods/tftp/dhcp.xml | 97 ++++ en/install-methods/tftp/rarp.xml | 64 +++ en/install-methods/usb-setup/i386.xml | 101 +++++ en/install-methods/usb-setup/powerpc.xml | 111 +++++ en/partitioning/device-names.xml | 161 +++++++ en/partitioning/partition-programs.xml | 169 +++++++ en/partitioning/partition/alpha.xml | 58 +++ en/partitioning/partition/hppa.xml | 22 + en/partitioning/partition/i386.xml | 94 ++++ en/partitioning/partition/ia64.xml | 125 ++++++ en/partitioning/partition/mips.xml | 16 + en/partitioning/partition/powerpc.xml | 57 +++ en/partitioning/partition/sparc.xml | 33 ++ en/partitioning/partitioning.xml | 13 + en/partitioning/schemes.xml | 84 ++++ en/partitioning/sizing.xml | 52 +++ en/partitioning/tree.xml | 150 +++++++ en/post-install/further-reading.xml | 49 +++ en/post-install/kernel-baking.xml | 182 ++++++++ en/post-install/new-to-unix.xml | 29 ++ en/post-install/orientation.xml | 109 +++++ en/post-install/post-install.xml | 14 + en/post-install/reactivating-win.xml | 72 +++ en/post-install/rescue.xml | 71 +++ en/post-install/shutdown.xml | 25 ++ en/preface.xml | 32 ++ en/preparing/backup.xml | 41 ++ en/preparing/bios-setup/i386.xml | 332 ++++++++++++++ en/preparing/bios-setup/m68k.xml | 23 + en/preparing/bios-setup/powerpc.xml | 52 +++ en/preparing/bios-setup/s390.xml | 106 +++++ en/preparing/bios-setup/sparc.xml | 103 +++++ en/preparing/install-overview.xml | 185 ++++++++ en/preparing/minimum-hardware-reqts.xml | 135 ++++++ en/preparing/needed-info.xml | 416 ++++++++++++++++++ en/preparing/non-debian-partitioning.xml | 198 +++++++++ en/preparing/nondeb-part/alpha.xml | 83 ++++ en/preparing/nondeb-part/i386.xml | 120 +++++ en/preparing/nondeb-part/m68k.xml | 127 ++++++ en/preparing/nondeb-part/powerpc.xml | 43 ++ en/preparing/nondeb-part/sparc.xml | 44 ++ en/preparing/pre-install-bios-setup.xml | 151 +++++++ en/preparing/preparing.xml | 21 + en/using-d-i/components.xml | 160 +++++++ en/using-d-i/modules/alpha/aboot-installer.xml | 19 + en/using-d-i/modules/anna.xml | 2 + en/using-d-i/modules/autopartkit.xml | 2 + en/using-d-i/modules/base-installer.xml | 31 ++ en/using-d-i/modules/baseconfig.xml | 17 + en/using-d-i/modules/cdrom-checker.xml | 2 + en/using-d-i/modules/cdrom-detect.xml | 2 + en/using-d-i/modules/choose-mirror.xml | 17 + en/using-d-i/modules/countrychooser.xml | 25 ++ en/using-d-i/modules/ddetect.xml | 2 + en/using-d-i/modules/hppa/palo-installer.xml | 20 + en/using-d-i/modules/i386/grub-installer.xml | 26 ++ en/using-d-i/modules/i386/lilo-installer.xml | 70 +++ en/using-d-i/modules/ia64/elilo-installer.xml | 135 ++++++ en/using-d-i/modules/iso-scan.xml | 47 ++ en/using-d-i/modules/kbd-chooser.xml | 73 +++ en/using-d-i/modules/languagechooser.xml | 25 ++ en/using-d-i/modules/localechooser.xml | 67 +++ en/using-d-i/modules/lowmem.xml | 21 + en/using-d-i/modules/lvmcfg.xml | 95 ++++ en/using-d-i/modules/mdcfg.xml | 230 ++++++++++ en/using-d-i/modules/mips/arcboot-installer.xml | 69 +++ en/using-d-i/modules/mipsel/colo-installer.xml | 2 + en/using-d-i/modules/mipsel/delo-installer.xml | 76 ++++ en/using-d-i/modules/netcfg.xml | 58 +++ en/using-d-i/modules/network-console.xml | 107 +++++ en/using-d-i/modules/nobootloader.xml | 28 ++ en/using-d-i/modules/os-prober.xml | 37 ++ en/using-d-i/modules/partconf.xml | 2 + en/using-d-i/modules/partitioner.xml | 3 + en/using-d-i/modules/partman.xml | 199 +++++++++ en/using-d-i/modules/powerpc/quik-installer.xml | 15 + en/using-d-i/modules/powerpc/yaboot-installer.xml | 17 + en/using-d-i/modules/prebaseconfig.xml | 23 + en/using-d-i/modules/s390/dasd.xml | 2 + en/using-d-i/modules/s390/netdevice.xml | 2 + en/using-d-i/modules/s390/zipl-installer.xml | 16 + en/using-d-i/modules/save-logs.xml | 24 + en/using-d-i/modules/shell.xml | 41 ++ en/using-d-i/modules/sparc/silo-installer.xml | 25 ++ en/using-d-i/using-d-i.xml | 378 ++++++++++++++++ en/welcome/about-copyright.xml | 92 ++++ en/welcome/doc-organization.xml | 120 +++++ en/welcome/getting-newest-doc.xml | 18 + en/welcome/getting-newest-inst.xml | 24 + en/welcome/welcome.xml | 23 + en/welcome/what-is-debian-hurd.xml | 29 ++ en/welcome/what-is-debian-linux.xml | 82 ++++ en/welcome/what-is-debian.xml | 112 +++++ en/welcome/what-is-linux.xml | 96 ++++ 164 files changed, 17645 insertions(+) create mode 100644 en/administrivia/administrivia.xml create mode 100644 en/appendix/chroot-install.xml create mode 100644 en/appendix/example-preseed-etch.xml create mode 100644 en/appendix/example-preseed-sarge.xml create mode 100644 en/appendix/example-preseed.xml create mode 100644 en/appendix/files.xml create mode 100644 en/appendix/gpl.xml create mode 100644 en/appendix/plip.xml create mode 100644 en/appendix/random-bits.xml create mode 100644 en/bookinfo.xml create mode 100644 en/boot-installer/alpha.xml create mode 100644 en/boot-installer/arm.xml create mode 100644 en/boot-installer/boot-installer.xml create mode 100644 en/boot-installer/hppa.xml create mode 100644 en/boot-installer/i386.xml create mode 100644 en/boot-installer/ia64.xml create mode 100644 en/boot-installer/intro-cd.xml create mode 100644 en/boot-installer/intro-hd.xml create mode 100644 en/boot-installer/intro-net.xml create mode 100644 en/boot-installer/m68k.xml create mode 100644 en/boot-installer/mips.xml create mode 100644 en/boot-installer/mipsel.xml create mode 100644 en/boot-installer/parameters.xml create mode 100644 en/boot-installer/powerpc.xml create mode 100644 en/boot-installer/s390.xml create mode 100644 en/boot-installer/sparc.xml create mode 100644 en/boot-installer/trouble.xml create mode 100644 en/boot-new/boot-new.xml create mode 100644 en/boot-new/modules/apt.xml create mode 100644 en/boot-new/modules/install.xml create mode 100644 en/boot-new/modules/mta.xml create mode 100644 en/boot-new/modules/packages.xml create mode 100644 en/boot-new/modules/ppp.xml create mode 100644 en/boot-new/modules/shadow.xml create mode 100644 en/boot-new/modules/timezone.xml create mode 100644 en/hardware/hardware-supported.xml create mode 100644 en/hardware/hardware.xml create mode 100644 en/hardware/installation-media.xml create mode 100644 en/hardware/memory-disk-requirements.xml create mode 100644 en/hardware/network-cards.xml create mode 100644 en/hardware/supported-peripherals.xml create mode 100644 en/hardware/supported/alpha.xml create mode 100644 en/hardware/supported/arm.xml create mode 100644 en/hardware/supported/hppa.xml create mode 100644 en/hardware/supported/i386.xml create mode 100644 en/hardware/supported/ia64.xml create mode 100644 en/hardware/supported/m68k.xml create mode 100644 en/hardware/supported/mips.xml create mode 100644 en/hardware/supported/mipsel.xml create mode 100644 en/hardware/supported/powerpc.xml create mode 100644 en/hardware/supported/s390.xml create mode 100644 en/hardware/supported/sparc.xml create mode 100644 en/howto/installation-howto.xml create mode 100644 en/install-methods/automatic-install.xml create mode 100644 en/install-methods/boot-drive-files.xml create mode 100644 en/install-methods/boot-usb-files.xml create mode 100644 en/install-methods/create-floppy.xml create mode 100644 en/install-methods/download/alpha.xml create mode 100644 en/install-methods/download/arm.xml create mode 100644 en/install-methods/download/m68k.xml create mode 100644 en/install-methods/download/powerpc.xml create mode 100644 en/install-methods/downloading-files.xml create mode 100644 en/install-methods/floppy/i386.xml create mode 100644 en/install-methods/floppy/m68k.xml create mode 100644 en/install-methods/floppy/powerpc.xml create mode 100644 en/install-methods/install-methods.xml create mode 100644 en/install-methods/install-tftp.xml create mode 100644 en/install-methods/ipl-tape.xml create mode 100644 en/install-methods/official-cdrom.xml create mode 100644 en/install-methods/tftp/bootp.xml create mode 100644 en/install-methods/tftp/dhcp.xml create mode 100644 en/install-methods/tftp/rarp.xml create mode 100644 en/install-methods/usb-setup/i386.xml create mode 100644 en/install-methods/usb-setup/powerpc.xml create mode 100644 en/partitioning/device-names.xml create mode 100644 en/partitioning/partition-programs.xml create mode 100644 en/partitioning/partition/alpha.xml create mode 100644 en/partitioning/partition/hppa.xml create mode 100644 en/partitioning/partition/i386.xml create mode 100644 en/partitioning/partition/ia64.xml create mode 100644 en/partitioning/partition/mips.xml create mode 100644 en/partitioning/partition/powerpc.xml create mode 100644 en/partitioning/partition/sparc.xml create mode 100644 en/partitioning/partitioning.xml create mode 100644 en/partitioning/schemes.xml create mode 100644 en/partitioning/sizing.xml create mode 100644 en/partitioning/tree.xml create mode 100644 en/post-install/further-reading.xml create mode 100644 en/post-install/kernel-baking.xml create mode 100644 en/post-install/new-to-unix.xml create mode 100644 en/post-install/orientation.xml create mode 100644 en/post-install/post-install.xml create mode 100644 en/post-install/reactivating-win.xml create mode 100644 en/post-install/rescue.xml create mode 100644 en/post-install/shutdown.xml create mode 100644 en/preface.xml create mode 100644 en/preparing/backup.xml create mode 100644 en/preparing/bios-setup/i386.xml create mode 100644 en/preparing/bios-setup/m68k.xml create mode 100644 en/preparing/bios-setup/powerpc.xml create mode 100644 en/preparing/bios-setup/s390.xml create mode 100644 en/preparing/bios-setup/sparc.xml create mode 100644 en/preparing/install-overview.xml create mode 100644 en/preparing/minimum-hardware-reqts.xml create mode 100644 en/preparing/needed-info.xml create mode 100644 en/preparing/non-debian-partitioning.xml create mode 100644 en/preparing/nondeb-part/alpha.xml create mode 100644 en/preparing/nondeb-part/i386.xml create mode 100644 en/preparing/nondeb-part/m68k.xml create mode 100644 en/preparing/nondeb-part/powerpc.xml create mode 100644 en/preparing/nondeb-part/sparc.xml create mode 100644 en/preparing/pre-install-bios-setup.xml create mode 100644 en/preparing/preparing.xml create mode 100644 en/using-d-i/components.xml create mode 100644 en/using-d-i/modules/alpha/aboot-installer.xml create mode 100644 en/using-d-i/modules/anna.xml create mode 100644 en/using-d-i/modules/autopartkit.xml create mode 100644 en/using-d-i/modules/base-installer.xml create mode 100644 en/using-d-i/modules/baseconfig.xml create mode 100644 en/using-d-i/modules/cdrom-checker.xml create mode 100644 en/using-d-i/modules/cdrom-detect.xml create mode 100644 en/using-d-i/modules/choose-mirror.xml create mode 100644 en/using-d-i/modules/countrychooser.xml create mode 100644 en/using-d-i/modules/ddetect.xml create mode 100644 en/using-d-i/modules/hppa/palo-installer.xml create mode 100644 en/using-d-i/modules/i386/grub-installer.xml create mode 100644 en/using-d-i/modules/i386/lilo-installer.xml create mode 100644 en/using-d-i/modules/ia64/elilo-installer.xml create mode 100644 en/using-d-i/modules/iso-scan.xml create mode 100644 en/using-d-i/modules/kbd-chooser.xml create mode 100644 en/using-d-i/modules/languagechooser.xml create mode 100644 en/using-d-i/modules/localechooser.xml create mode 100644 en/using-d-i/modules/lowmem.xml create mode 100644 en/using-d-i/modules/lvmcfg.xml create mode 100644 en/using-d-i/modules/mdcfg.xml create mode 100644 en/using-d-i/modules/mips/arcboot-installer.xml create mode 100644 en/using-d-i/modules/mipsel/colo-installer.xml create mode 100644 en/using-d-i/modules/mipsel/delo-installer.xml create mode 100644 en/using-d-i/modules/netcfg.xml create mode 100644 en/using-d-i/modules/network-console.xml create mode 100644 en/using-d-i/modules/nobootloader.xml create mode 100644 en/using-d-i/modules/os-prober.xml create mode 100644 en/using-d-i/modules/partconf.xml create mode 100644 en/using-d-i/modules/partitioner.xml create mode 100644 en/using-d-i/modules/partman.xml create mode 100644 en/using-d-i/modules/powerpc/quik-installer.xml create mode 100644 en/using-d-i/modules/powerpc/yaboot-installer.xml create mode 100644 en/using-d-i/modules/prebaseconfig.xml create mode 100644 en/using-d-i/modules/s390/dasd.xml create mode 100644 en/using-d-i/modules/s390/netdevice.xml create mode 100644 en/using-d-i/modules/s390/zipl-installer.xml create mode 100644 en/using-d-i/modules/save-logs.xml create mode 100644 en/using-d-i/modules/shell.xml create mode 100644 en/using-d-i/modules/sparc/silo-installer.xml create mode 100644 en/using-d-i/using-d-i.xml create mode 100644 en/welcome/about-copyright.xml create mode 100644 en/welcome/doc-organization.xml create mode 100644 en/welcome/getting-newest-doc.xml create mode 100644 en/welcome/getting-newest-inst.xml create mode 100644 en/welcome/welcome.xml create mode 100644 en/welcome/what-is-debian-hurd.xml create mode 100644 en/welcome/what-is-debian-linux.xml create mode 100644 en/welcome/what-is-debian.xml create mode 100644 en/welcome/what-is-linux.xml (limited to 'en') diff --git a/en/administrivia/administrivia.xml b/en/administrivia/administrivia.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..028dce6ca --- /dev/null +++ b/en/administrivia/administrivia.xml @@ -0,0 +1,155 @@ + + + + + Administrivia + + + + About This Document + + + +This manual was created for Sarge's debian-installer, based on +the Woody installation manual for boot-floppies, which was based +on earlier Debian installation manuals, and on the Progeny +distribution manual which was released under GPL in 2003. + + + +This document is written in DocBook XML. Output formats are generated +by various programs using information from the +docbook-xml and +docbook-xsl packages. + + + +In order to increase the maintainability of this document, we use +a number of XML features, such as entities and profiling attributes. +These play a role akin to variables and conditionals in programming +languages. The XML source to this document contains information for +each different architecture — profiling attributes are used to +isolate certain bits of text as architecture-specific. + + + + + + + + Contributing to This Document + + + +If you have problems or suggestions regarding this document, you +should probably submit them as a bug report against the package +debian-installer-manual. See the +reportbug package or read the online +documentation of the Debian Bug +Tracking System. It would be nice if you could check the +open bugs against +debian-installer-manual to see whether your problem has +already been reported. If so, you can supply additional corroboration +or helpful information to +XXXX@bugs.debian.org, +where XXXX is the number for the +already-reported bug. + + + +Better yet, get a copy of the DocBook source for this document, and +produce patches against it. The DocBook source can be found at the +debian-installer WebSVN. If +you're not familiar with DocBook, don't worry: +there is a simple cheatsheet in the manuals directory that will get +you started. It's like html, but oriented towards the meaning of +the text rather than the presentation. Patches submitted to the +debian-boot mailing list (see below) are welcomed. +For instructions on how to check out the sources via SVN, see +README +from the source root directory. + + + +Please do not contact the authors of this +document directly. There is also a discussion list for &d-i;, which +includes discussions of this manual. The mailing list is +debian-boot@lists.debian.org. Instructions for +subscribing to this list can be found at the Debian Mailing +List Subscription page; or you can browse the Debian Mailing List Archives +online. + + + + + + + Major Contributions + + + +This document was originally written by Bruce Perens, Sven Rudolph, Igor +Grobman, James Treacy, and Adam Di Carlo. Sebastian Ley wrote the +Installation Howto. +Many, many Debian users and developers contributed to this document. +Particular note must be made of Michael Schmitz (m68k support), Frank +Neumann (original author of the Amiga install manual), +Arto Astala, Eric Delaunay/Ben Collins (SPARC information), Tapio +Lehtonen, and Stéphane Bortzmeyer for numerous edits and text. +We have to thank Pascal Le Bail for useful information about booting +from USB memory sticks. Miroslav Kuře has documented a lot of the new +functionality in Sarge's debian-installer. + + + +Extremely helpful text and information was found in Jim Mintha's HOWTO +for network booting (no URL available), the Debian FAQ, the Linux/m68k FAQ, the Linux for SPARC Processors +FAQ, the Linux/Alpha +FAQ, amongst others. The maintainers of these freely +available and rich sources of information must be recognized. + + + +The section on chrooted installations in this manual +() was derived in part from +documents copyright Karsten M. Self. + + + +The section on installations over plip in this manual +() was based on the +PLIP-Install-HOWTO +by Gilles Lamiral. + + + + + + Trademark Acknowledgement + + +All trademarks are property of their respective trademark owners. + + + + + diff --git a/en/appendix/chroot-install.xml b/en/appendix/chroot-install.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..31c70a65c --- /dev/null +++ b/en/appendix/chroot-install.xml @@ -0,0 +1,458 @@ + + + + + Installing &debian; from a Unix/Linux System + + + +This section explains how to install &debian; from an existing +Unix or Linux system, without using the menu-driven installer as +explained in the rest of the manual. This cross-install +HOWTO has been requested by users switching to &debian; from +Red Hat, Mandrake, and SUSE. In this section some familiarity with +entering *nix commands and navigating the file system is assumed. In +this section, $ symbolizes a command to be entered in +the user's current system, while # refers to a +command entered in the Debian chroot. + + + +Once you've got the new Debian system configured to your preference, +you can migrate your existing user data (if any) to it, and keep on +rolling. This is therefore a zero downtime &debian; +install. It's also a clever way for dealing with hardware that +otherwise doesn't play friendly with various boot or installation +media. + + + + + Getting Started + + +With your current *nix partitioning tools, repartition the hard +drive as needed, creating at least one filesystem plus swap. You +need at least 150MB of space available for a console only install, +or at least 300MB if you plan to install X. + + + +To create file systems on your partitions. For example, to create an +ext3 file system on partition /dev/hda6 (that's +our example root partition): + + +# mke2fs -j /dev/hda6 + + +To create an ext2 file system instead, omit -j. + + + +Initialize and activate swap (substitute the partition number for +your intended Debian swap partition): + + +# mkswap /dev/hda5 +# sync; sync; sync +# swapon /dev/hda5 + + +Mount one partition as /mnt/debinst (the +installation point, to be the root (/) filesystem +on your new system). The mount point name is strictly arbitrary, it is +referenced later below. + + +# mkdir /mnt/debinst +# mount /dev/hda6 /mnt/debinst + + + + + +If you want to have parts of the filesystem (e.g. /usr) mounted on +separate partitions, you will need to create and mount these directories +manually before proceding with the next stage. + + + + + + Install <command>debootstrap</command> + + +The tool that the Debian installer uses, which is recognized as the +official way to install a Debian base system, is +debootstrap. It uses wget and +ar, but otherwise depends only on +/bin/sh. Install wget and +ar if they aren't already on your current system, +then download and install debootstrap. + + + +If you have an rpm-based system, you can use alien to convert the +.deb into .rpm, or download an rpm-ized version at + + + + +Or, you can use the following procedure to install it +manually. Make a work folder for extracting the .deb into: + + +# mkdir work +# cd work + + +The debootstrap binary is located in the Debian +archive (be sure to select the proper file for your +architecture). Download the debootstrap .deb from +the +pool, copy the package to the work folder, and extract the +binary files from it. You will need to have root privileges to install +the binaries. + + +# ar -x debootstrap_0.X.X_arch.deb +# cd / +# zcat /full-path-to-work/work/data.tar.gz | tar xv + + + + +Note that running debootstrap may require you to have +a minimal version of glibc installed (currently +GLIBC_2.3). debootstrap itself is a shell script, but +it calls various utilities that require glibc. + + + + + + Run <command>debootstrap</command> + + +debootstrap can download the needed files directly +from the archive when you run it. You can substitute any Debian +archive mirror for http.us.debian.org/debian in +the command example below, preferably a mirror close to you +network-wise. Mirrors are listed at +. + + + +If you have a &releasename; &debian; CD mounted at +/cdrom, you could substitute a file URL instead +of the http URL: file:/cdrom/debian/ + + + +Substitute one of the following for ARCH +in the debootstrap command: + +alpha, +arm, +hppa, +i386, +ia64, +m68k, +mips, +mipsel, +powerpc, +s390, or +sparc. + + +# /usr/sbin/debootstrap --arch ARCH &releasename; \ + /mnt/debinst http://http.us.debian.org/debian + + + + + + + Configure The Base System + + +Now you've got a real Debian system, though rather lean, on disk. +Chroot into it: + + +# LANG= chroot /mnt/debinst /bin/bash + + + + + + Mount Partitions + + +You need to create /etc/fstab. + + +# editor /etc/fstab + + +Here is a sample you can modify to suit: + + +# /etc/fstab: static file system information. +# +# file system mount point type options dump pass +/dev/XXX / ext3 defaults 0 1 +/dev/XXX /boot ext3 ro,nosuid,nodev 0 2 + +/dev/XXX none swap sw 0 0 +proc /proc proc defaults 0 0 + +/dev/fd0 /mnt/floppy auto noauto,rw,sync,user,exec 0 0 +/dev/cdrom /mnt/cdrom iso9660 noauto,ro,user,exec 0 0 + +/dev/XXX /tmp ext3 rw,nosuid,nodev 0 2 +/dev/XXX /var ext3 rw,nosuid,nodev 0 2 +/dev/XXX /usr ext3 rw,nodev 0 2 +/dev/XXX /home ext3 rw,nosuid,nodev 0 2 + + +Use mount -a to mount all the file systems you +have specified in your /etc/fstab, or to mount +file systems individually use: + + +# mount /path # e.g.: mount /usr + + +You can mount the proc file system multiple times and to arbitrary +locations, though /proc is customary. If you didn't use +mount -a, be sure to mount proc before continuing: + + +# mount -t proc proc /proc + + + + +The command ls /proc should now show a non-empty +directory. Should this fail, you may be able to mount proc from outside +the chroot: + + +# mount -t proc proc /mnt/debinst/proc + + + + + + + Configure Keyboard + + +To configure your keyboard: + + +# dpkg-reconfigure console-data + + + + +Note that the keyboard cannot be set while in the chroot, but will be +configured for the next reboot. + + + + + + Configure Networking + + +To configure networking, edit +/etc/network/interfaces, +/etc/resolv.conf, and +/etc/hostname. + + +# editor /etc/network/interfaces + + +Here are some simple examples from +/usr/share/doc/ifupdown/examples: + + +###################################################################### +# /etc/network/interfaces -- configuration file for ifup(8), ifdown(8) +# See the interfaces(5) manpage for information on what options are +# available. +###################################################################### + +# We always want the loopback interface. +# +auto lo +iface lo inet loopback + +# To use dhcp: +# +# auto eth0 +# iface eth0 inet dhcp + +# An example static IP setup: (broadcast and gateway are optional) +# +# auto eth0 +# iface eth0 inet static +# address 192.168.0.42 +# network 192.168.0.0 +# netmask 255.255.255.0 +# broadcast 192.168.0.255 +# gateway 192.168.0.1 + + +Enter your nameserver(s) and search directives in +/etc/resolv.conf: + + +# editor /etc/resolv.conf + + +A simple /etc/resolv.conf: + + +search hqdom.local\000 +nameserver 10.1.1.36 +nameserver 192.168.9.100 + + +Enter your system's host name (2 to 63 characters): + + +# echo DebianHostName > /etc/hostname + + +If you have multiple network cards, you should arrange the names of +driver modules in the /etc/modules file into the +desired order. Then during boot, each card will be associated with the +interface name (eth0, eth1, etc.) that you expect. + + + + + + Configure Timezone, Users, and APT + + +Set your timezone, add a normal user, and choose your apt +sources by running + + +# /usr/sbin/base-config new + + + + + + + Configure Locales + + +To configure your locale settings to use a language other than +English, install the locales support package and configure it: + + +# apt-get install locales +# dpkg-reconfigure locales + + +NOTE: Apt must be configured before, ie. during the base-config phase. +Before using locales with character sets other than ASCII or latin1, +please consult the appropriate localization HOWTO. + + + + + + + Install a Kernel + + +If you intend to boot this system, you probably want a Linux kernel +and a boot loader. Identify available pre-packaged kernels with + + +# apt-cache search kernel-image + + +Then install your choice using its package name. + + +# apt-get install kernel-image-2.X.X-arch-etc + + + + + + +Set up the Boot Loader + + +To make your &debian; system bootable, set up your boot loader to load +the installed kernel with your new root partition. Note that debootstrap +does not install a boot loader, though you can use apt-get inside your +Debian chroot to do so. + + + +Check info grub or man +lilo.conf for instructions on setting up the +bootloader. If you are keeping the system you used to install Debian, just +add an entry for the Debian install to your existing grub +menu.lst or lilo.conf. For +lilo.conf, you could also copy it to the new system and +edit it there. After you are done editing, call lilo (remember it will use +lilo.conf relative to the system you call it from). + + + +Here is a basic /etc/lilo.conf as an example: + + +boot=/dev/hda6 +root=/dev/hda6 +install=menu +delay=20 +lba32 +image=/vmlinuz +label=Debian + + + + +Check man yaboot.conf for instructions on +setting up the bootloader. If you are keeping the system you used to +install Debian, just add an entry for the Debian install to your +existing yaboot.conf. You could also copy it to +the new system and +edit it there. After you are done editing, call ybin (remember it will +use yaboot.conf relative to the system you call it from). + + + +Here is a basic /etc/yaboot.conf as an example: + + +boot=/dev/hda2 +device=hd: +partition=6 +root=/dev/hda6 +magicboot=/usr/lib/yaboot/ofboot +timeout=50 +image=/vmlinux +label=Debian + + +On some machines, you may need to use ide0: +instead of hd:. + + + + diff --git a/en/appendix/example-preseed-etch.xml b/en/appendix/example-preseed-etch.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b10853fee --- /dev/null +++ b/en/appendix/example-preseed-etch.xml @@ -0,0 +1,372 @@ + + + + +#### Startup. + +# To use a preseed file, you'll first need to boot the installer, +# and tell it what preseed file to use. This is done by passing the +# kernel a boot parameter, either manually at boot or by editing the +# syslinux.cfg (or similar) file and adding the parameter to the end +# of the append line(s) for the kernel. +# +# If you're netbooting, use this: +# preseed/url=http://host/path/to/preseed +# If you're remastering a CD, you could use this: +# preseed/file=/cdrom/preseed +# If you're installing from USB media, use this, and put the preseed file +# in the toplevel directory of the USB stick. +# preseed/file=/hd-media/preseed +# +# If you feel comfortable modifying the installer's initrd image, +# you can also place a preseed file in the root directory of the initrd's +# filesystem, named "preseed.cfg" -- the installer will always use this +# file if it is present. Otherwise, be sure to copy this file to the location +# you specify. +# +# To make sure the installer gets the right preseed file, you can specify +# a checksum for the file. Currently this needs to be a md5sum, and if +# specified it must match the file or the installer will refuse to use the +# file. +# preseed/url/checksum=5da499872becccfeda2c4872f9171c3d +# preseed/file/checksum=5da499872becccfeda2c4872f9171c3d +# +# Some parts of the installation process cannot be automated using +# some forms of preseeding, because the questions are asked before +# the preseed file is loaded. For example, if the preseed file is +# downloaded over the network, the network setup must be done first. +# One reason to use initrd preseeding is that it allows preseeding +# of even these early steps of the installation process. +# +# If a preseed file cannot be used to preseed some steps, the install can +# still be fully automated, since you can pass preseed values to the kernel +# on the command line. Just pass path/to/var=value for any of the preseed +# variables listed below. +# +# While you're at it, you may want to throw a debconf/priority=critical in +# there, to avoid most questions even if the preseeding below misses some. +# And you might set the timeout to 1 in syslinux.cfg to avoid needing to hit +# enter to boot the installer. +# +# Note that the 2.4 kernel accepts a maximum of 8 command line options and +# 8 environment options (including any options added by default for the +# installer). If these numbers are exceeded, 2.4 kernels will drop any +# excess options and 2.6 kernels will panic. With kernel 2.6.9 or newer, +# you can use 32 command line options and 32 environment options. +# +# Some of the default options, like 'vga=normal' may be safely removed +# for most installations, which may allow you to add more options for +# preseeding. + +# To select your language and country, use this setting, but remember +# that this will only work for initrd based preseeding, for other forms of +# preseeding you must convert it into a kernel parameter, +# such as debian-installer/locale=en_US +d-i debian-installer/locale string en_US + +# To select your keyboard, use this setting. Again it will need to be +# passed as a kernel parameter for most preseed setups. +d-i console-keymaps-at/keymap select us + +#### Network configuration. + +# Of course, this won't work if you're loading your preseed file from the +# network! But it's great if you're booting from CD or USB stick. You can +# also pass network config parameters in on the kernel params if you are +# loading preseed files from the network. + +# netcfg will choose an interface that has link if possible. This makes it +# skip displaying a list if there is more than one interface. +d-i netcfg/choose_interface select auto + +# If you have a slow dhcp server and the installer times out waiting for +# it, this might be useful. +#d-i netcfg/dhcp_timeout string 60 + +# If you prefer to configure the network manually, here's how: +#d-i netcfg/disable_dhcp boolean true +#d-i netcfg/get_nameservers string 192.168.1.1 +#d-i netcfg/get_ipaddress string 192.168.1.42 +#d-i netcfg/get_netmask string 255.255.255.0 +#d-i netcfg/get_gateway string 192.168.1.1 +#d-i netcfg/confirm_static boolean true + +# Note that any hostname and domain names assigned from dhcp take +# precedence over values set here. However, setting the values still +# prevents the questions from being shown even if values come from dhcp. +d-i netcfg/get_hostname string unassigned-hostname +d-i netcfg/get_domain string unassigned-domain + +# Disable that annoying WEP key dialog. +d-i netcfg/wireless_wep string +# The wacky dhcp hostname that some ISPs use as a password of sorts. +#d-i netcfg/dhcp_hostname string radish + +#### Mirror settings. + +d-i mirror/country string enter information manually +d-i mirror/http/hostname string http.us.debian.org +d-i mirror/http/directory string /debian +d-i mirror/http/proxy string + +# What suite of Debian to install. +#d-i mirror/suite string testing +# What suite of Debian to use for loading installer components. +# (Defaults to same as mirror/suite.) +#d-i mirror/udeb/suite string testing + +#### Partitioning. + +# If the system has free space you can choose to only partition that space. +#d-i partman-auto/init_automatically_partition \ +# select Use the largest continuous free space + +# Alternatively, you can specify a disk to partition. The device name can +# be given in either devfs or traditional non-devfs format. +# For example, to use the first disk devfs knows of: +d-i partman-auto/disk string /dev/discs/disc0/disc + +# You can choose from any of the predefined partitioning recipes: +d-i partman-auto/choose_recipe \ + select All files in one partition (recommended for new users) +#d-i partman-auto/choose_recipe select Desktop machine +#d-i partman-auto/choose_recipe select Multi-user workstation + +# Or provide a recipe of your own... +# The recipe format is documented in the file devel/partman-auto-recipe.txt. +# If you have a way to get a recipe file into the d-i environment, you can +# just point at it. +#d-i partman-auto/expert_recipe_file string /hd-media/recipe + +# If not, you can put an entire recipe the preseed file in one (logical) +# line. This example creates a small /boot partition, suitable swap, and +# uses the rest of the space for the root partition: +#d-i partman-auto/expert_recipe string \ +# boot-root :: \ +# 40 50 100 ext3 \ +# $primary{ } $bootable{ } \ +# method{ format } format{ } \ +# use_filesystem{ } filesystem{ ext3 } \ +# mountpoint{ /boot } \ +# . \ +# 500 10000 1000000000 ext3 \ +# method{ format } format{ } \ +# use_filesystem{ } filesystem{ ext3 } \ +# mountpoint{ / } \ +# . \ +# 64 512 300% linux-swap \ +# method{ swap } format{ } \ +# . + +# This makes partman automatically partition without confirmation. +d-i partman/confirm_write_new_label boolean true +d-i partman/choose_partition \ + select Finish partitioning and write changes to disk +d-i partman/confirm boolean true + +#### Boot loader installation. + +# Grub is the default boot loader (for x86). If you want lilo installed +# instead, uncomment this: +#d-i grub-installer/skip boolean true + +# This is fairly safe to set, it makes grub install automatically to the MBR +# if no other operating system is detected on the machine. +d-i grub-installer/only_debian boolean true + +# This one makes grub-installer install to the MBR if if finds some other OS +# too, which is less safe as it might not be able to boot that other OS. +d-i grub-installer/with_other_os boolean true + +# Alternatively, if you want to install to a location other than the mbr, +# uncomment and edit these lines: +#d-i grub-installer/bootdev string (hd0,0) +#d-i grub-installer/only_debian boolean false +#d-i grub-installer/with_other_os boolean false + +#### Finishing up the first stage install. + +# Avoid that last message about the install being complete. +d-i prebaseconfig/reboot_in_progress note + +# This will prevent the installer from ejecting the CD during the reboot, +# which is useful in some situations. +#d-i cdrom-detect/eject boolean false + +#### Shell commands. + +# d-i preseeding is inherently not secure. Nothing in the installer checks +# for attempts at buffer overflows or other exploits of the values of a +# preseed file like this one. Only use preseed files from trusted +# locations! To drive that home, and because it's generally useful, here's +# a way to run any shell command you'd like inside the installer, +# automatically. + +# This first command is run as early as possible, just after +# preseeding is read. +#d-i preseed/early_command string anna-install some-udeb + +# This command is run just before the install finishes, but when there is +# still a usable /target directory. +#d-i preseed/late_command string echo foo > /target/etc/bar + +# This command is run just as base-config is starting up. +#base-config base-config/early_command string echo hi mom + +# This command is run after base-config is done, just before the login: +# prompt. This is a good way to install a set of packages you want, or to +# tweak the configuration of the system. +#base-config base-config/late_command \ +# string apt-get install zsh; chsh -s /bin/zsh + +###### Preseeding the 2nd stage of the installation. + +#### Preseeding base-config. + +# Avoid the introductory message. +base-config base-config/intro note + +# Avoid the final message. +base-config base-config/login note + +# If you installed a display manager, but don't want to start it immediately +# after base-config finishes. +#base-config base-config/start-display-manager boolean false + +# Some versions of the installer can report back on what you've installed. +# The default is not to report back, but sending reports helps the project +# determine what software is most popular and include it on CDs. +#popularity-contest popularity-contest/participate boolean false + +#### Clock and time zone setup. + +# Controls whether or not the hardware clock is set to UTC. +d-i clock-setup/utc boolean true + +# You may set this to any valid setting for $TZ; see the contents of +# /usr/share/zoneinfo/ for options. +d-i time/zone string US/Eastern + +#### Account setup. + +# To preseed the root password, you have to put it in the clear in this +# file. That is not a very good idea, use caution! +#passwd passwd/root-password password r00tme +#passwd passwd/root-password-again password r00tme + +# If you want to skip creation of a normal user account. +#passwd passwd/make-user boolean false + +# Alternatively, you can preseed the user's name and login. +#passwd passwd/user-fullname string Debian User +#passwd passwd/username string debian +# And their password, but use caution! +#passwd passwd/user-password password insecure +#passwd passwd/user-password-again password insecure + +#### Apt setup. + +# This question controls what source the second stage installation uses +# for packages. Choices are cdrom, http, ftp, filesystem, edit sources list +# by hand +base-config apt-setup/uri_type select http + +# If you choose ftp or http, you'll be asked for a country and a mirror. +base-config apt-setup/country select enter information manually +base-config apt-setup/hostname string http.us.debian.org +base-config apt-setup/directory string /debian +# Stop after choosing one mirror. +base-config apt-setup/another boolean false + +# You can choose to install non-free and contrib software. +#base-config apt-setup/non-free boolean true +#base-config apt-setup/contrib boolean true + +# Do enable security updates. +base-config apt-setup/security-updates boolean true + +#### Package selection. + +# You can choose to install any combination of tasks that are available. +# Available tasks as of this writing include: Desktop environment, +# Web server, Print server, DNS server, File server, Mail server, +# SQL database, Laptop, Standard system, manual package selection. The +# last of those will run aptitude. You can also choose to install no +# tasks, and force the installation of a set of packages in some other +# way. We recommend always including the Standard system task. +tasksel tasksel/first multiselect Desktop environment, Standard system +#tasksel tasksel/first multiselect Web server, Standard system + +#### Mailer configuration. + +# During a normal install, exim asks only a few questions. Here's how to +# avoid even those. More complicated preseeding is possible. +exim4-config exim4/dc_eximconfig_configtype \ + select no configuration at this time +exim4-config exim4/no_config boolean true +exim4-config exim4/no_config boolean true + +# It's a good idea to set this to whatever user account you choose to +# create. Leaving the value blank results in postmaster mail going to +# /var/mail/mail. +exim4-config exim4/dc_postmaster string + +#### X Configuration. + +# Preseeding Debian's X config is possible, but you probably need to know +# some details about the video hardware of the machine, since Debian's X +# configurator does not do fully automatic configuration of everything. + +# X can detect the right driver for some cards, but if you're preseeding, +# you override whatever it chooses. Still, vesa will work most places. +#xserver-xfree86 xserver-xfree86/config/device/driver select vesa + +# A caveat with mouse autodetection is that if it fails, X will retry it +# over and over. So if it's preseeded to be done, there is a possibility of +# an infinite loop if the mouse is not autodetected. +#xserver-xfree86 xserver-xfree86/autodetect_mouse boolean true + +# Monitor autodetection is recommended. +xserver-xfree86 xserver-xfree86/autodetect_monitor boolean true +# Uncomment if you have an LCD display. +#xserver-xfree86 xserver-xfree86/config/monitor/lcd boolean true +# X has three configuration paths for the monitor. Here's how to preseed +# the "medium" path, which is always available. The "simple" path may not +# be available, and the "advanced" path asks too many questions. +xserver-xfree86 xserver-xfree86/config/monitor/selection-method \ + select medium +xserver-xfree86 xserver-xfree86/config/monitor/mode-list \ + select 1024x768 @ 60 Hz + +#### Everything else. + +# Depending on what software you choose to install, or if things go wrong +# during the installation process, it's possible that other questions may +# be asked. You can preseed those too, of course. To get a list of every +# possible question that could be asked during an install, do an +# installation, and then run these commands: +# debconf-get-selections --installer > file +# debconf-get-selections >> file + +# If you like, you can include other preseed files into this one. +# Any settings in those files will override pre-existing settings from this +# file. More that one file can be listed, separated by spaces; all will be +# loaded. The included files can have preseed/include directives of their +# own as well. Note that if the filenames are relative, they are taken from +# the same directory as the preseed file that includes them. +#d-i preseed/include string x.cfg + +# The installer can optionally verify checksums of preseed files before +# using them. Currently only md5sums are supported, list the md5sums +# in the same order as the list of files to include. +#d-i preseed/include/checksum string 5da499872becccfeda2c4872f9171c3d + +# More flexibly, this runs a shell command and if it outputs the names of +# preseed files, includes those files. +#d-i preseed/include_command \ +# string echo if [ "`hostname`" = bob ]; then echo bob.cfg; fi + +# To check the format of your preseed file before performing an install, +# you can use debconf-set-selections: +# debconf-set-selections -c preseed.cfg + diff --git a/en/appendix/example-preseed-sarge.xml b/en/appendix/example-preseed-sarge.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..76a8bb709 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/appendix/example-preseed-sarge.xml @@ -0,0 +1,366 @@ + + + + +#### Startup. + +# To use a preseed file, you'll first need to boot the installer, +# and tell it what preseed file to use. This is done by passing the +# kernel a boot parameter, either manually at boot or by editing the +# syslinux.cfg (or similar) file and adding the parameter to the end +# of the append line(s) for the kernel. +# +# If you're netbooting, use this: +# preseed/url=http://host/path/to/preseed +# If you're remastering a CD, you could use this: +# preseed/file=/cdrom/preseed +# If you're installing from USB media, use this, and put the preseed file +# in the toplevel directory of the USB stick. +# preseed/file=/hd-media/preseed +# Be sure to copy this file to the location you specify. +# +# Some parts of the installation process cannot be automated using +# some forms of preseeding, because the questions are asked before +# the preseed file is loaded. For example, if the preseed file is +# downloaded over the network, the network setup must be done first. +# One reason to use initrd preseeding is that it allows preseeding +# of even these early steps of the installation process. +# +# If a preseed file cannot be used to preseed some steps, the install can +# still be fully automated, since you can pass preseed values to the kernel +# on the command line. Just pass path/to/var=value for any of the preseed +# variables listed below. +# +# While you're at it, you may want to throw a debconf/priority=critical in +# there, to avoid most questions even if the preseeding below misses some. +# And you might set the timeout to 1 in syslinux.cfg to avoid needing to hit +# enter to boot the installer. +# +# Note that the kernel accepts a maximum of 8 command line options and +# 8 environment options (including any options added by default for the +# installer). If these numbers are exceeded, 2.4 kernels will drop any +# excess options and 2.6 kernels will panic. With kernel 2.6.9 or newer, +# you can use 32 command line options and 32 environment options. +# +# Some of the default options, like 'vga=normal' may be safely removed +# for most installations, which may allow you to add more options for +# preseeding. + +# It is not possible to use preseeding to set language, country, and +# keyboard. Instead you should use kernel parameters. Example: +# languagechooser/language-name=English +# countrychooser/shortlist=US +# console-keymaps-at/keymap=us + +#### Network configuration. + +# Of course, this won't work if you're loading your preseed file from the +# network! But it's great if you're booting from CD or USB stick. You can +# also pass network config parameters in on the kernel params if you are +# loading preseed files from the network. + +# netcfg will choose an interface that has link if possible. This makes it +# skip displaying a list if there is more than one interface. +d-i netcfg/choose_interface select auto + +# If you have a slow dhcp server and the installer times out waiting for +# it, this might be useful. +#d-i netcfg/dhcp_timeout string 60 + +# If you prefer to configure the network manually, here's how: +#d-i netcfg/disable_dhcp boolean true +#d-i netcfg/get_nameservers string 192.168.1.1 +#d-i netcfg/get_ipaddress string 192.168.1.42 +#d-i netcfg/get_netmask string 255.255.255.0 +#d-i netcfg/get_gateway string 192.168.1.1 +#d-i netcfg/confirm_static boolean true + +# Note that any hostname and domain names assigned from dhcp take +# precedence over values set here. However, setting the values still +# prevents the questions from being shown even if values come from dhcp. +d-i netcfg/get_hostname string unassigned-hostname +d-i netcfg/get_domain string unassigned-domain + +# Disable that annoying WEP key dialog. +d-i netcfg/wireless_wep string +# The wacky dhcp hostname that some ISPs use as a password of sorts. +#d-i netcfg/dhcp_hostname string radish + +#### Mirror settings. + +d-i mirror/country string enter information manually +d-i mirror/http/hostname string http.us.debian.org +d-i mirror/http/directory string /debian +d-i mirror/suite string testing +d-i mirror/http/proxy string + +#### Partitioning. + +# If the system has free space you can choose to only partition that space. +#d-i partman-auto/init_automatically_partition \ +# select Use the largest continuous free space + +# Alternatively, you can specify a disk to partition. The device name can +# be given in either devfs or traditional non-devfs format. +# For example, to use the first disk devfs knows of: +d-i partman-auto/disk string /dev/discs/disc0/disc + +# You can choose from any of the predefined partitioning recipes: +d-i partman-auto/choose_recipe select \ + All files in one partition (recommended for new users) +#d-i partman-auto/choose_recipe select Desktop machine +#d-i partman-auto/choose_recipe select Multi-user workstation + +# Or provide a recipe of your own... +# The recipe format is documented in the file devel/partman-auto-recipe.txt. +# If you have a way to get a recipe file into the d-i environment, you can +# just point at it. +#d-i partman-auto/expert_recipe_file string /hd-media/recipe + +# If not, you can put an entire recipe in one line. This example creates +# a small /boot partition, suitable swap, and uses the rest of the space +# for the root partition: +#d-i partman-auto/expert_recipe string boot-root :: \ +# 20 50 100 ext3 $primary{ } $bootable{ } method{ format } format{ } \ +# use_filesystem{ } filesystem{ ext3 } mountpoint{ /boot } . \ +# 500 10000 1000000000 ext3 method{ format } format{ } \ +# use_filesystem{ } filesystem{ ext3 } mountpoint{ / } . \ +# 64 512 300% linux-swap method{ swap } format{ } . +# For reference, here is that same recipe in a more readable form: +# boot-root :: +# 40 50 100 ext3 +# $primary{ } $bootable{ } +# method{ format } format{ } +# use_filesystem{ } filesystem{ ext3 } +# mountpoint{ /boot } +# . +# 500 10000 1000000000 ext3 +# method{ format } format{ } +# use_filesystem{ } filesystem{ ext3 } +# mountpoint{ / } +# . +# 64 512 300% linux-swap +# method{ swap } format{ } +# . + +# This makes partman automatically partition without confirmation. +d-i partman/confirm_write_new_label boolean true +d-i partman/choose_partition select \ + Finish partitioning and write changes to disk +d-i partman/confirm boolean true + +#### Boot loader installation. + +# Grub is the default boot loader (for x86). If you want lilo installed +# instead, uncomment this: +#d-i grub-installer/skip boolean true + +# This is fairly safe to set, it makes grub install automatically to the MBR +# if no other operating system is detected on the machine. +d-i grub-installer/only_debian boolean true + +# This one makes grub-installer install to the MBR if if finds some other OS +# too, which is less safe as it might not be able to boot that other OS. +d-i grub-installer/with_other_os boolean true + +# Alternatively, if you want to install to a location other than the mbr, +# uncomment and edit these lines: +#d-i grub-installer/bootdev string (hd0,0) +#d-i grub-installer/only_debian boolean false +#d-i grub-installer/with_other_os boolean false + +#### Finishing up the first stage install. + +# Avoid that last message about the install being complete. +d-i prebaseconfig/reboot_in_progress note + +#### Shell commands. + +# d-i preseeding is inherently not secure. Nothing in the installer checks +# for attempts at buffer overflows or other exploits of the values of a +# preseed file like this one. Only use preseed files from trusted +# locations! To drive that home, and because it's generally useful, here's +# a way to run any shell command you'd like inside the installer, +# automatically. + +# This first command is run as early as possible, just after +# preseeding is read. +#d-i preseed/early_command string anna-install some-udeb + +# This command is run just before the install finishes, but when there is +# still a usable /target directory. +#d-i preseed/late_command string echo foo > /target/etc/bar + +# This command is run just as base-config is starting up. +#base-config base-config/early_command string echo hi mom + +# This command is run after base-config is done, just before the login: +# prompt. This is a good way to install a set of packages you want, or to +# tweak the configuration of the system. +#base-config base-config/late_command string \ +# apt-get install zsh; chsh -s /bin/zsh + +###### Preseeding the 2nd stage of the installation. + +#### Preseeding base-config. + +# Avoid the introductory message. +base-config base-config/intro note + +# Avoid the final message. +base-config base-config/login note + +# If you installed a display manager, but don't want to start it immediately +# after base-config finishes. +#base-config base-config/start-display-manager boolean false + +# Some versions of the installer can report back on what you've installed. +# The default is not to report back, but sending reports helps the project +# determine what software is most popular and include it on CDs. +#popularity-contest popularity-contest/participate boolean false + +#### Clock and time zone setup. + +# Controls whether or not the hardware clock is set to UTC. +#base-config tzconfig/gmt boolean true +# If you told the installer that you're in the United States, then you +# can set the time zone using this variable. +# (Choices are: Eastern, Central, Mountain, Pacific, Alaska, Hawaii, +# Aleutian, Arizona East-Indiana, Indiana-Starke, Michigan, Samoa, other) +#base-config tzconfig/choose_country_zone/US select Eastern +# If you told it you're in Canada. +# (Choices are: Newfoundland, Atlantic, Eastern, Central, +# East-Saskatchewan, Saskatchewan, Mountain, Pacific, Yukon, other) +#base-config tzconfig/choose_country_zone/CA select Eastern +# If you told it you're in Brazil. (Choices are: East, West, Acre, +# DeNoronha, other) +#base-config tzconfig/choose_country_zone/BR select East +# Many countries have only one time zone. If you told the installer you're +# in one of those countries, you can choose its standard time zone via this +# question. +#base-config tzconfig/choose_country_zone_single boolean true +# This question is asked as a fallback for countries other than those +# listed above, which have more than one time zone. You can preseed one of +# the time zones, or "other". +#base-config tzconfig/choose_country_zone_multiple select + +#### Account setup. + +# To preseed the root password, you have to put it in the clear in this +# file. That is not a very good idea, use caution! +#passwd passwd/root-password password r00tme +#passwd passwd/root-password-again password r00tme + +# If you want to skip creation of a normal user account. +#passwd passwd/make-user boolean false + +# Alternatively, you can preseed the user's name and login. +#passwd passwd/user-fullname string Debian User +#passwd passwd/username string debian +# And their password, but use caution! +#passwd passwd/user-password password insecure +#passwd passwd/user-password-again password insecure + +#### Apt setup. + +# This question controls what source the second stage installation uses +# for packages. Choices are cdrom, http, ftp, filesystem, edit sources list +# by hand +base-config apt-setup/uri_type select http + +# If you choose ftp or http, you'll be asked for a country and a mirror. +base-config apt-setup/country select enter information manually +base-config apt-setup/hostname string http.us.debian.org +base-config apt-setup/directory string /debian +# Stop after choosing one mirror. +base-config apt-setup/another boolean false + +# You can choose to install non-free and contrib software. +#base-config apt-setup/non-free boolean true +#base-config apt-setup/contrib boolean true + +# Do enable security updates. +base-config apt-setup/security-updates boolean true + +#### Package selection. + +# You can choose to install any combination of tasks that are available. +# Available tasks as of this writing include: Desktop environment, +# Web server, Print server, DNS server, File server, Mail server, +# SQL database, Laptop, Standard system, manual package selection. The +# last of those will run aptitude. You can also choose to install no +# tasks, and force the installation of a set of packages in some other +# way. We recommend always including the Standard system task. +tasksel tasksel/first multiselect Desktop environment, Standard system +#tasksel tasksel/first multiselect Web server, Standard system + +#### Mailer configuration. + +# During a normal install, exim asks only a few questions. Here's how to +# avoid even those. More complicated preseeding is possible. +exim4-config exim4/dc_eximconfig_configtype \ + select no configuration at this time +exim4-config exim4/no_config boolean true +exim4-config exim4/no_config boolean true + +# It's a good idea to set this to whatever user account you choose to +# create. Leaving the value blank results in postmaster mail going to +# /var/mail/mail. +exim4-config exim4/dc_postmaster string + +#### X Configuration. + +# Preseeding Debian's X config is possible, but you probably need to know +# some details about the video hardware of the machine, since Debian's X +# configurator does not do fully automatic configuration of everything. + +# X can detect the right driver for some cards, but if you're preseeding, +# you override whatever it chooses. Still, vesa will work most places. +#xserver-xfree86 xserver-xfree86/config/device/driver select vesa + +# A caveat with mouse autodetection is that if it fails, X will retry it +# over and over. So if it's preseeded to be done, there is a possibility of +# an infinite loop if the mouse is not autodetected. +#xserver-xfree86 xserver-xfree86/autodetect_mouse boolean true + +# Monitor autodetection is recommended. +xserver-xfree86 xserver-xfree86/autodetect_monitor boolean true +# Uncomment if you have an LCD display. +#xserver-xfree86 xserver-xfree86/config/monitor/lcd boolean true +# X has three configuration paths for the monitor. Here's how to preseed +# the "medium" path, which is always available. The "simple" path may not +# be available, and the "advanced" path asks too many questions. +xserver-xfree86 xserver-xfree86/config/monitor/selection-method \ + select medium +xserver-xfree86 xserver-xfree86/config/monitor/mode-list \ + select 1024x768 @ 60 Hz + +#### Everything else. + +# Depending on what software you choose to install, or if things go wrong +# during the installation process, it's possible that other questions may +# be asked. You can preseed those too, of course. To get a list of every +# possible question that could be asked during an install, do an +# installation, and then run these commands: +# debconf-get-selections --installer > file +# debconf-get-selections >> file + +# If you like, you can include other preseed files into this one. +# Any settings in those files will override pre-existing settings from this +# file. More that one file can be listed, separated by spaces; all will be +# loaded. The included files can have preseed/include directives of their +# own as well. Note that if the filenames are relative, they are taken from +# the same directory as the preseed file that includes them. +#d-i preseed/include string x.cfg + +# More flexibly, this runs a shell command and if it outputs the names of +# preseed files, includes those files. For example, to switch configs based +# on a particular usb storage device (in this case, a built-in card reader): +#d-i preseed/include_command string \ +# if $(grep -q "GUID: 0aec3050aec305000001a003" /proc/scsi/usb-storage-*/*); \ +# then echo kraken.cfg; else echo otherusb.cfg; fi + +# To check the format of your preseed file before performing an install, +# you can use debconf-set-selections: +# debconf-set-selections -c preseed.cfg + diff --git a/en/appendix/example-preseed.xml b/en/appendix/example-preseed.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c5fcd460b --- /dev/null +++ b/en/appendix/example-preseed.xml @@ -0,0 +1,39 @@ + + + + +Preconfiguration File Example + + + +This is a complete working example of a preconfiguration file for an automated +install. Its use is explained in . You +may want to uncomment some of the lines before using the file. + + + + + +In order to be able to properly present this example in the manual, we've had +to split some lines. This is indicated by the use of the line-continuation-character +\ and extra indentation in the next line. In a real preconfiguration +file, these split lines have to be joined into one single line. +If you do not, preconfiguration will fail with unpredictable results. + + + +A clean example file is available from &urlset-example-preseed;. + + + + + +The example file is also available from &urlset-example-preseed;. + + + +&example-preseed-sarge.xml; +&example-preseed-etch.xml; + + + diff --git a/en/appendix/files.xml b/en/appendix/files.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3b81ebe48 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/appendix/files.xml @@ -0,0 +1,298 @@ + + + + + Linux Devices + + +In Linux you have various special files in +/dev. These files are called device files. In +the Unix world accessing hardware is different. There you have a +special file which actually runs a driver which in turn accesses the +hardware. The device file is an interface to the actual system +component. Files under /dev also behave +differently than ordinary files. Below are the most important device +files listed. + + + + + + fd0 + First Floppy Drive + + fd1 + Second Floppy Drive + + + + + + hda + IDE Hard disk / CD-ROM on the first IDE port (Master) + + hdb + IDE Hard disk / CD-ROM on the first IDE port (Slave) + + hdc + IDE Hard disk / CD-ROM on the second IDE port (Master) + + hdd + IDE Hard disk / CD-ROM on the second IDE port (Slave) + + hda1 + First partition of the first IDE hard disk + + hdd15 + Fifteenth partition of the fourth IDE hard disk + + + + + + sda + SCSI Hard disk with lowest SCSI ID (e.g. 0) + + sdb + SCSI Hard disk with next higher SCSI ID (e.g. 1) + + sdc + SCSI Hard disk with next higher SCSI ID (e.g. 2) + + sda1 + First partition of the first SCSI hard disk + + sdd10 + Tenth partition of the fourth SCSI hard disk + + + + + + sr0 + SCSI CD-ROM with the lowest SCSI ID + + sr1 + SCSI CD-ROM with the next higher SCSI ID + + + + + + ttyS0 + Serial port 0, COM1 under MS-DOS + + ttyS1 + Serial port 1, COM2 under MS-DOS + + psaux + PS/2 mouse device + + gpmdata + Pseudo device, repeater data from GPM (mouse) daemon + + + + + + cdrom + Symbolic link to the CD-ROM drive + + mouse + Symbolic link to the mouse device file + + + + + + null + Everything pointed to this device will disappear + + zero + One can endlessly read zeros out of this device + + + + + + +Setting Up Your Mouse + + + +The mouse can be used in both the Linux console (with gpm) and the X window +environment. The two uses can be made compatible if the gpm repeater is used +to allow the signal to flow to the X server as shown: + + +mouse => /dev/psaux => gpm => /dev/gpmdata -> /dev/mouse => X + /dev/ttyS0 (repeater) (symlink) + /dev/ttyS1 + + +Set the repeater protocol to be raw (in /etc/gpm.conf) while +setting X to the original mouse protocol in /etc/X11/XF86Config +or /etc/X11/XF86Config-4. + + + +This approach to use gpm even in X has advantages when the mouse is +unplugged inadvertently. Simply restarting gpm with + + +# /etc/init.d/gpm restart + + +will re-connect the mouse in software without restarting X. + + + +If gpm is disabled or not installed with some reason, make sure to set X to +read directly from the mouse device such as /dev/psaux. For details, refer +to the 3-Button Mouse mini-Howto at +/usr/share/doc/HOWTO/en-txt/mini/3-Button-Mouse.gz, +man gpm, +/usr/share/doc/gpm/FAQ.gz, and +README.mouse. + + + +For PowerPC, in /etc/X11/XF86Config or +/etc/X11/XF86Config-4, set the mouse device to +"/dev/input/mice". + + + +Modern kernels give you the capability to emulate a three-button mouse +when your mouse only has one button. Just add the following lines to +/etc/sysctl.conf file. + + +# 3-button mouse emulation +# turn on emulation +/dev/mac_hid/mouse_button_emulation = 1 +# Send middle mouse button signal with the F11 key +/dev/mac_hid/mouse_button2_keycode = 87 +# Send right mouse button signal with the F12 key +/dev/mac_hid/mouse_button3_keycode = 88 +# For different keys, use showkey to tell you what the code is. + + + + + + + + Disk Space Needed for Tasks + + + + + +The base installation for i386 using the default 2.4 kernel, +including all standard packages, requires 573MB of disk space. + + + +The following table lists sizes reported by aptitude for the tasks listed +in tasksel. Note that some tasks have overlapping constituents, so the +total installed size for two tasks together may be less than the total +obtained by adding up the numbers. + + + +Note that you will need to add the sizes listed in the table to the size +of the base installation when determining the size of partitions. +Most of the size listed as Installed size will end up in +/usr; the size listed as Download size +is (temporarily) required in /var. + + + + + + + Task + Installed size (MB) + Download size (MB) + Space needed to install (MB) + + + + + + Desktop + 1392 + 460 + 1852 + + + + Web server + 36 + 12 + 48 + + + + Print server + 168 + 58 + 226 + + + + DNS server + 2 + 1 + 3 + + + + File server + 47 + 24 + 71 + + + + Mail server + 10 + 3 + 13 + + + + SQL database + 66 + 21 + 87 + + + + + + + +The Desktop task will install both the Gnome and KDE +desktop environments. + + + + + +If you install in a language other than English, tasksel +may automatically install a localization task, if one +is available for your language. Space requirements differ per language; +you should allow up to 200MB in total for download and installation. + + + diff --git a/en/appendix/gpl.xml b/en/appendix/gpl.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..19f5fec68 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/appendix/gpl.xml @@ -0,0 +1,512 @@ + + + +GNU General Public License + + + +Version 2, June 1991 + + + +Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc. +— +51 Franklin St, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301, USA. + + +Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies +of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. + + + + Preamble + + +The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom +to share and change it. By contrast, the gnu General Public License +is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free +software — to make sure the software is free for all its users. This +General Public License applies to most of the Free Software +Foundation's software and to any other program whose authors commit +to using it. (Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered +by the gnu Library General Public License instead.) You can apply it +to your programs, too. + + + +When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not +price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you +have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge +for this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can +get it if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces +of it in new free programs; and that you know you can do these +things. + + + +To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid +anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the +rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for +you if you distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it. + + + +For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether +gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that +you have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the +source code. And you must show them these terms so they know their +rights. + + + +We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, +and (2) offer you this license which gives you legal permission to +copy, distribute and/or modify the software. + + + +Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain +that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free +software. If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, +we want its recipients to know that what they have is not the +original, so that any problems introduced by others will not reflect +on the original authors' reputations. + + + +Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software +patents. We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free +program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making +the program proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that +any patent must be licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed +at all. + + + +The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and +modification follow. + + + + + GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE + + +TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION + + + + + +This License applies to any program or other work which contains a +notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed +under the terms of this General Public License. The "Program", below, +refers to any such program or work, and a "work based on the Program" +means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law: +that is to say, a work containing the Program or a portion of it, +either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into another +language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in +the term "modification".) Each licensee is addressed as "you". + + + +Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not +covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of +running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the +Program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on +the Program (independent of having been made by running the Program). +Whether that is true depends on what the Program does. + + + + +You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's +source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you +conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate +copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the +notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any +warranty; and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this +License along with the Program. + + + +You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and +you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a +fee. + + + + +You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion +of it, thus forming a work based on the Program, and copy and +distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 +above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions: + + + +a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices +stating that you changed the files and the date of any change. + + + +b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in +whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any part +thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third parties +under the terms of this License. + + + +c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively when +run, you must cause it, when started running for such interactive use +in the most ordinary way, to print or display an announcement +including an appropriate copyright notice and a notice that there is +no warranty (or else, saying that you provide a warranty) and that +users may redistribute the program under these conditions, and +telling the user how to view a copy of this License. (Exception: if +the Program itself is interactive but does not normally print such an +announcement, your work based on the Program is not required to print +an announcement.) + + + +These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If +identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program, +and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in +themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those +sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you +distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based +on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of +this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the +entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote +it. + + + +Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest +your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to +exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or +collective works based on the Program. + + + +In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the +Program with the Program (or with a work based on the Program) on a +volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other +work under the scope of this License. + + + + +You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it, +under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of +Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the +following: + + + +a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable +source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 +and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; +or, + + + +b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three years, +to give any third party, for a charge no more than your cost of +physically performing source distribution, a complete +machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code, to be +distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium +customarily used for software interchange; or, + + + +c) Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer to +distribute corresponding source code. (This alternative is allowed +only for noncommercial distribution and only if you received the +program in object code or executable form with such an offer, in +accord with Subsection b above.) + + + +The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for +making modifications to it. For an executable work, complete source +code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any +associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to +control compilation and installation of the executable. However, as a +special exception, the source code distributed need not include +anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary +form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the +operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component +itself accompanies the executable. + + + +If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering +access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent +access to copy the source code from the same place counts as +distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not +compelled to copy the source along with the object code. + + + + +You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program +except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt +otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is +void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this +License. However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from +you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so +long as such parties remain in full compliance. + + + + +You are not required to accept this License, since you have not +signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or +distribute the Program or its derivative works. These actions are +prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by +modifying or distributing the Program (or any work based on the +Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and +all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying +the Program or works based on it. + + + + +Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the +Program), the recipient automatically receives a license from the +original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject +to these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further +restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted +herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third +parties to this License. + + + + +If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent +infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues), +conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or +otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do +not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot +distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under +this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a +consequence you may not distribute the Program at all. For example, +if a patent license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of +the Program by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly +through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this +License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the +Program. + + + +If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under +any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended +to apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other +circumstances. + + + +It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any +patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any +such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the +integrity of the free software distribution system, which is +implemented by public license practices. Many people have made +generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed +through that system in reliance on consistent application of that +system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is +willing to distribute software through any other system and a +licensee cannot impose that choice. + + + +This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to +be a consequence of the rest of this License. + + + + +If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in +certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the +original copyright holder who places the Program under this License +may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding +those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among +countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates +the limitation as if written in the body of this License. + + + + +The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new +versions of the General Public License from time to time. Such new +versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may +differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. Each version is +given a distinguishing version number. If the Program specifies a +version number of this License which applies to it and "any later +version", you have the option of following the terms and conditions +either of that version or of any later version published by the Free +Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number +of this License, you may choose any version ever published by the +Free Software Foundation. + + + + +If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free +programs whose distribution conditions are different, write to the +author to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by +the Free Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; +we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by +the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our +free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software +generally. + + + +NO WARRANTY + + + + +because the program is licensed free of charge, there is no +warranty for the program, to the extent permitted by applicable law. +except when otherwise stated in writing the copyright holders and/or +other parties provide the program "as is" without warranty of any +kind, either expressed or implied, including, but not limited to, the +implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular +purpose. the entire risk as to the quality and performance of the +program is with you. should the program prove defective, you assume +the cost of all necessary servicing, repair or correction. + + + + +in no event unless required by applicable law or agreed to in +writing will any copyright holder, or any other party who may modify +and/or redistribute the program as permitted above, be liable to you +for damages, including any general, special, incidental or +consequential damages arising out of the use or inability to use the +program (including but not limited to loss of data or data being +rendered inaccurate or losses sustained by you or third parties or a +failure of the program to operate with any other programs), even if +such holder or other party has been advised of the possibility of +such damages. + + + + + +END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS + + + + + How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs + + +If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest +possible use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to make +it free software which everyone can redistribute and change under +these terms. + + + +To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest +to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively +convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least +the "copyright" line and a pointer to where the full notice is found. + + + +one line to give the program's name and a brief idea of what it +does. + + + +Copyright (C) year name of author + + + +This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify +it under the terms of the gnu General Public License as published by +the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or (at +your option) any later version. + + + +This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but +without any warranty; without even the implied warranty of +merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose. See the gnu +General Public License for more details. + + + +You should have received a copy of the gnu General Public License +along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software +Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, +MA 02110-1301, USA. + + + +Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper +mail. + + + +If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice like +this when it starts in an interactive mode: + + + +Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C) year name of author + + + +Gnomovision comes with absolutely no warranty; for details type `show +w'. + + + +This is free software, and you are welcome to redistribute it under +certain conditions; type `show c' for details. + + + +The hypothetical commands `show w' and `show c' should show the +appropriate parts of the General Public License. Of course, the +commands you use may be called something other than `show w' and +`show c'; they could even be mouse-clicks or menu items — whatever +suits your program. + + + +You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or +your school, if any, to sign a "copyright disclaimer" for the +program, if necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names: + + + +Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the +program `Gnomovision' (which makes passes at compilers) written by +James Hacker. + + + +signature of Ty Coon, 1 April 1989 + + + +Ty Coon, President of Vice + + + +This General Public License does not permit incorporating your +program into proprietary programs. If your program is a subroutine +library, you may consider it more useful to permit linking +proprietary applications with the library. If this is what you want +to do, use the gnu Library General Public License instead of this +License. + + + + diff --git a/en/appendix/plip.xml b/en/appendix/plip.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0946d0ae0 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/appendix/plip.xml @@ -0,0 +1,194 @@ + + + + + Installing &debian; over Parallel Line IP (PLIP) + + + +This section explains how to install &debian; on a computer without +Ethernet card, but with just a remote gateway computer attached via +a Null-Modem cable (also called Null-Printer cable). The gateway +computer should be connected to a network that has a Debian mirror +on it (e.g. to the Internet). + + + +In the example in this appendix we will set up a PLIP connection using +a gateway connected to the Internet over a dial-up connection (ppp0). +We will use IP addresses 192.168.0.1 and 192.168.0.2 for the PLIP +interfaces on the target system and the source system respectively +(these addresses should be unused within your network address space). + + + +The PLIP connection set up during the installation will also be available +after the reboot into the installed system (see ). + + + +Before you start, you will need to check the BIOS configuration (IO base +address and IRQ) for the parallel ports of both the source and target +systems. The most common values are io=0x378, +irq=7. + + + + + Requirements + + + + +A target computer, called target, where Debian will be +installed. + + + + +System installation media; see . + + + + +Another computer connected to the Internet, called source, +that will function as the gateway. + + + + +A DB-25 Null-Modem cable. See the +PLIP-Install-HOWTO for more +information on this cable and instructions how to make your own. + + + + + + + + Setting up source + + +The following shell script is a simple example of how to configure the +source computer as a gateway to the Internet using ppp0. + + +#!/bin/sh + +# We remove running modules from kernel to avoid conflicts and to +# reconfigure them manually. +modprobe -r lp parport_pc +modprobe parport_pc io=0x378 irq=7 +modprobe plip + +# Configure the plip interface (plip0 for me, see dmesg | grep plip) +ifconfig plip0 192.168.0.2 pointopoint 192.168.0.1 netmask 255.255.255.255 up + +# Configure gateway +modprobe iptable_nat +iptables -t nat -A POSTROUTING -o ppp0 -j MASQUERADE +echo 1 > /proc/sys/net/ipv4/ip_forward + + + + + + + Installing target + + +Boot the installation media. The installation needs to be run in +expert mode; enter expert at the boot prompt. +Below are the answers that should be given during various stages of +the installation. + + + + + + +Load installer components + + + +Select the plip-modules option from the list; this +will make the PLIP drivers available to the installation system. + + + + +Detect network hardware + + + + + + +If target does have a network card, a list of driver +modules for detected cards will be shown. If you want to force &d-i; to +use plip instead, you have to deselect all listed driver modules. +Obviously, if target doesn't have a network card, the installer will not +show this list. + + + + +Prompt for module parameters: Yes + + + + +Because no network card was detected/selected earlier, the installer will +ask you to select a network driver module from a list. +Select the plip module. + + + + +Additional parameters for module parport_pc: +io=0x378 irq=7 + + + + +Additional parameters for module plip: leave empty + + + + + + + +Configure the network + + + + +Auto-configure network with DHCP: No + + + + +IP address: 192.168.0.1 + + + + +Point-to-point address: +192.168.0.2 + + + + +Name server addresses: you can enter the same addresses used on +source (see /etc/resolv.conf) + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/en/appendix/random-bits.xml b/en/appendix/random-bits.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a67594eb4 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/appendix/random-bits.xml @@ -0,0 +1,11 @@ + + + +Random Bits + +&example-preseed.xml; +&files.xml; +&chroot-install.xml; +&plip.xml; + + diff --git a/en/bookinfo.xml b/en/bookinfo.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9e96adc46 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/bookinfo.xml @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ + + + + +&debian; Installation Guide + + + +This document contains installation instructions for the &debian; +&release; system (codename &releasename;), +for the &arch-title; (&architecture;) +architecture. It also contains pointers to more information and +information on how to make the most of your new Debian system. + + + + +This installation guide is based on an earlier manual written for +the old Debian installation system (the boot-floppies), and has +been updated to document the new Debian installer. However, for +&architecture;, the manual has not been fully updated and fact checked +for the new installer. There may remain parts of the manual that are +incomplete or outdated or that still document the boot-floppies +installer. A newer version of this manual, possibly better documenting +this architecture, may be found on the Internet at the +&d-i; home page. You may also be able +to find additional translations there. + + + +Although this installation guide for &architecture; is mostly up-to-date, +we plan to make some changes and reorganize parts of the manual after the +official release of &releasename;. A newer version of this manual may be +found on the Internet at the &d-i; home page. +You may also be able to find additional translations there. + + + + + + 2004 + 2005 + the Debian Installer team + + + + + +This manual is free software; you may redistribute it and/or modify it +under the terms of the GNU General Public License. Please refer to the +license in . + + + + diff --git a/en/boot-installer/alpha.xml b/en/boot-installer/alpha.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3b8bd6f7f --- /dev/null +++ b/en/boot-installer/alpha.xml @@ -0,0 +1,441 @@ + + + + + Alpha Console Firmware + + +Console firmware is stored in a flash ROM and started when an Alpha +system is powered up or reset. There are two different console +specifications used on Alpha systems, and hence two classes of console +firmware available: + + + + + + + SRM console, based on the Alpha Console Subsystem + specification, which provides an operating environment for OpenVMS, Tru64 + UNIX, and Linux operating systems. + + + + + ARC, AlphaBIOS, or ARCSBIOS console, based on the + Advanced RISC Computing (ARC) specification, which provides an operating + environment for Windows NT. + + + + + + +From the user's perspective, the most important difference between SRM +and ARC is that the choice of console constrains the possible +disk-partitioning scheme for the hard disk which you wish to boot off +of. + + + +ARC requires that you use an MS-DOS partition table (as created by +cfdisk) for the boot disk. Therefore MS-DOS partition +tables are the native partition format when booting from +ARC. In fact, since AlphaBIOS contains a disk partitioning utility, you may +prefer to partition your disks from the firmware menus before +installing Linux. + + + +Conversely, SRM is incompatible + + +Specifically, the bootsector format required by the Console Subsystem +Specification conflicts with the placement of the DOS partition table. + + + with MS-DOS partition tables. Since Tru64 Unix uses the BSD +disklabel format, this is the native partition format for +SRM installations. + + + +GNU/Linux is the only operating system on Alpha that can be booted from +both console types, but &debian; &release; only supports booting on +SRM-based systems. If you have an Alpha for which no version of SRM is +available, if you will be dual-booting the system with Windows NT, or if +your boot device requires ARC console support for BIOS initialization, +you will not be able to use the &debian; &release; installer. You can +still run &debian; &release; on such systems by using other install +media; for instance, you can install Debian woody with MILO and upgrade. + + + +Because MILO is not available for any of the Alpha +systems currently in production (as of February 2000), and because it +is no longer necessary to buy an OpenVMS or Tru64 Unix license to have +SRM firmware on your older Alpha, it is recommended that you use SRM +when possible. + + + +The following table summarizes available and supported system +type/console combinations (see for the +system type names). The word ARC below denotes any of the +ARC-compliant consoles. + + + + + + + System Type + Console Type Supported + + + + + + alcor + ARC or SRM + + avanti + ARC or SRM + + book1 + SRM only + + cabriolet + ARC or SRM + + dp264 + SRM only + + eb164 + ARC or SRM + + eb64p + ARC or SRM + + eb66 + ARC or SRM + + eb66p + ARC or SRM + + jensen + SRM only + + lx164 + ARC or SRM + + miata + ARC or SRM + + mikasa + ARC or SRM + + mikasa-p + SRM only + + nautilus + ARC (see motherboard manual) or SRM + + noname + ARC or SRM + + noritake + SRM only + + noritake-p + SRM only + + pc164 + ARC or SRM + + rawhide + SRM only + + ruffian + ARC only + + sable + SRM only + + sable-g + SRM only + + sx164 + ARC or SRM + + takara + ARC or SRM + + xl + ARC only + + xlt + ARC only + + + + + + + + +Generally, none of these consoles can boot Linux directly, so the +assistance of an intermediary bootloader is required. For the SRM +console, aboot, a small, platform-independent +bootloader, is used. See the (unfortunately outdated) SRM HOWTO for more information on +aboot. + + + +The following paragraphs are from the woody install manual, and are +included here for reference; they may be useful to someone at a later +date when Debian supports MILO-based installs again. + + + +Generally, none of these consoles can boot Linux directly, so the +assistance of an intermediary bootloader is required. There are two +mainstream Linux loaders: MILO and aboot. + + + +MILO is itself a console, which replaces ARC or SRM in +memory. MILO can be booted from both ARC and SRM and is +the only way to bootstrap Linux from the ARC console. +MILO is platform-specific (a different MILO +is needed for each system type) and exist only for those systems, for +which ARC support is shown in the table above. See also the +(unfortunately outdated) MILO HOWTO. + + + +aboot is a small, platform-independent bootloader, which +runs from SRM only. See the (also unfortunately outdated) SRM HOWTO for more information on +aboot. + + + +Thus, three scenarios are generally possible, depending on the +system's console firmware and whether or not MILO is +available: + + +SRM -> aboot +SRM -> MILO +ARC -> MILO + + +Because MILO is not available for any of the Alpha +systems currently in production (as of February 2000), and because it +is no longer necessary to buy an OpenVMS or Tru64 Unix license to have +SRM firmware on your older Alpha, it is recommended that you use SRM and +aboot on new installations of GNU/Linux, unless you wish +to dual-boot with Windows NT. + + + +The majority of AlphaServers and all current server and workstation +products contain both SRM and AlphaBIOS in their firmware. For +half-flash machines such as the various evaluation boards, +it is possible to switch from one version to another by reflashing the +firmware. Also, once SRM is installed, it is possible to run +ARC/AlphaBIOS from a floppy disk (using the arc +command). For the reasons mentioned above, we recommend switching to +SRM before installing &debian;. + + + +As on other architectures, you should install the newest available +revision of the firmware + + +Except on Jensen, where Linux is not supported on firmware versions +newer than 1.7 — see +for more information. + + + before installing &debian;. +For Alpha, firmware updates can be obtained from +Alpha Firmware Updates. + + + + + + Booting with TFTP + + +In SRM, Ethernet interfaces are named with the ewa +prefix, and will be listed in the output of the show dev command, +like this (edited slightly): + + +>>> show dev +ewa0.0.0.9.0 EWA0 08-00-2B-86-98-65 +ewb0.0.0.11.0 EWB0 08-00-2B-86-98-54 +ewc0.0.0.2002.0 EWC0 00-06-2B-01-32-B0 + + +You first need to set the boot protocol: + + +>>> set ewa0_protocol bootp + + +Then check the medium type is correct: + + +>>> set ewa0_mode mode + + +You can get a listing of valid modes with >>>set ewa0_mode. + + + +Then, to boot from the first Ethernet interface, you would type: + + +>>> boot ewa0 -flags "" + + +This will boot using the default kernel parameters as included in the +netboot image. + + + +If you wish to use a serial console, you must +pass the console= parameter to the kernel. +This can be done using the -flags argument to +the SRM boot command. The serial ports are +named the same as their corresponding files in +/dev. Also, when specifying additional kernel +parameters, you must repeat certain default options that are needed by +the &d-i; images. For example, to boot from ewa0 +and use a console on the first serial port, you would type: + + +>>> boot ewa0 -flags "root=/dev/ram ramdisk_size=16384 console=ttyS0" + + + + + + Booting from CD-ROM with the SRM Console + + +Type + + +>>> boot xxxx -flags 0 + + +where xxxx is your CD-ROM drive in SRM notation. + + + + + + Booting from CD-ROM with the ARC or AlphaBIOS Console + + +To boot a CD-ROM from the ARC console, find your sub-architecture code +name (see ), then enter +\milo\linload.exe as the boot loader and +\milo\subarch (where +subarch is the proper subarchitecture name) +as the OS Path in the `OS Selection Setup' menu. Ruffians make an +exception: You need to use \milo\ldmilo.exe as +boot loader. + + + + + + + Booting from Floppies with the SRM Console + + +At the SRM prompt (>>>), issue the following +command: + + +>>> boot dva0 -flags 0 + + +possibly replacing dva0 with the actual device +name. Usually, dva0 is the floppy; type + + +>>> show dev + + +to see the list of devices (e.g., if you want to boot from a CD). +Note that if you are booting via MILO, -flags argument +is ignored, so you can just type boot dva0. +If everything works OK, you will eventually see the Linux kernel boot. + + + +If you want to specify kernel parameters when booting via +aboot, use the following command: + + +>>> boot dva0 -file linux.bin.gz -flags "root=/dev/fd0 load_ramdisk=1 arguments" + + +(typed on one line), substituting, if necessary, the actual SRM boot +device name for dva0, the Linux boot device name for +fd0, and the desired kernel parameters for +arguments. + + + +If you want to specify kernel parameters when booting via +MILO, you will have to interrupt bootstrap once you get +into MILO. See . + + + + + + Booting from Floppies with the ARC or AlphaBIOS Console + + + +In the OS Selection menu, set linload.exe as the boot +loader, and milo as the OS Path. Bootstrap using the +newly created entry. + + + + + Booting with MILO + + +MILO contained on the bootstrap media is configured to proceed straight +to Linux automatically. Should you wish to intervene, all you need is to +press space during MILO countdown. + + + +If you want to specify all the bits explicitly (for example, to supply +additional parameters), you can use a command like this: + + +MILO> boot fd0:linux.bin.gz root=/dev/fd0 load_ramdisk=1 + + +If you are booting from something other than a floppy, substitute +fd0 in the above example with the appropriate device name +in Linux notation. The help command would give you a brief +MILO command reference. + + + diff --git a/en/boot-installer/arm.xml b/en/boot-installer/arm.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7b506be4e --- /dev/null +++ b/en/boot-installer/arm.xml @@ -0,0 +1,113 @@ + + + + Booting from TFTP + +&boot-installer-intro-net.xml; + + Booting from TFTP on NetWinder + + + +NetWinders have two network interfaces: The 10Mbps NE2000-compatible +card is eth0 and the 100Mbps Tulip card is +eth1. + + + +You need NeTTrom 2.2.1 or later to boot the +installation system. NeTTrom 2.3.3 is recommended: get these files +from +: + + + +nettrom-2.3-3.armv4l.rpm + + + + +nettrom-2.3.3.bin + + + + +nettrom-2.3.3.bin.md5sum + + + + + + +After rebooting and interrupting the boot process during the countdown, you +must first configure the network either with a static address: + + + NeTTrom command-> setenv eth0_ip 192.168.0.10/24 + + +where 24 is the number of set bits in the netmask, or a dynamic address: + + + NeTTrom command-> boot diskless + + +You may also need to configure the route1 +settings if the TFTP +server is not on the local subnet. The rest of the config is pretty +standard (the save-all step is optional): + + + NeTTrom command-> setenv kerntftpserver 192.168.0.1 + NeTTrom command-> setenv kerntftpfile boot.img + NeTTrom command-> save-all + NeTTrom command-> setenv netconfig_eth0 flash + NeTTrom command-> setenv kernconfig tftp + NeTTrom command-> setenv rootdev /dev/ram + NeTTrom command-> setenv cmdappend root=/dev/ram + + +Only the last four of these interfere with normal disk booting, so it is +safe to issue save-all right before them, which will +store the network settings in case you need to boot from the network +again. + +If you want to use the serial console to install your NetWinder, you also +need the following setting: + + + NeTTrom command-> setenv cmdappend root=/dev/ram console=ttyS0,115200 + + +Use the printenv command to review your +environment settings. Finally, if your cmdappend +NeTTrom variable has the option, you must +remove it so the downloaded kernel can boot with its attached ramdisk. + + + + + Booting from TFTP on CATS + + + +On CATS machines, use boot de0: or similar at the +Cyclone prompt. + + + + + + + + Booting from CD-ROM + +&boot-installer-intro-cd.xml; + + + +To boot a CD-ROM from the Cyclone console prompt, use the command +boot cd0:cats.bin + + + diff --git a/en/boot-installer/boot-installer.xml b/en/boot-installer/boot-installer.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b064e9b04 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/boot-installer/boot-installer.xml @@ -0,0 +1,32 @@ + + + +Booting the Installation System + + + + + Booting the Installer on &arch-title; + + + + + +&boot-installer-alpha.xml; +&boot-installer-arm.xml; + +&boot-installer-i386.xml; +&boot-installer-ia64.xml; +&boot-installer-m68k.xml; +&boot-installer-mips.xml; + +&boot-installer-s390.xml; +&boot-installer-powerpc.xml; +&boot-installer-sparc.xml; + + + +&boot-installer-parameters.xml; +&boot-installer-trouble.xml; + + diff --git a/en/boot-installer/hppa.xml b/en/boot-installer/hppa.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3bf892313 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/boot-installer/hppa.xml @@ -0,0 +1,12 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/en/boot-installer/i386.xml b/en/boot-installer/i386.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..709ea73a8 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/boot-installer/i386.xml @@ -0,0 +1,379 @@ + + + + Booting from a CD-ROM + +&boot-installer-intro-cd.xml; + + + + + + + + + + Booting from Linux Using <command>LILO</command> or + <command>GRUB</command> + + +To boot the installer from hard disk, you must first download +and place the needed files as described in . + + + +If you intend to use the hard drive only for booting and then +download everything over the network, you should download the +netboot/debian-installer/i386/initrd.gz file and its +corresponding kernel. This will allow you to repartition the hard disk +from which you boot the installer, although you should do so with care. + + + +Alternatively, if you intend to keep an existing partition on the hard +drive unchanged during the install, you can download the +hd-media/initrd.gz file and its kernel, as well as +copy a CD iso to the drive (make sure the file is named ending in +.iso). The installer can then boot from the drive +and install from the CD image, without needing the network. + + + +For LILO, you will need to configure two +essential things in /etc/lilo.conf: + + + +to load the initrd.gz installer at boot time; + + + + +have the vmlinuz kernel use a RAM disk as +its root partition. + + + + +Here is a /etc/lilo.conf example: + + + + +image=/boot/newinstall/vmlinuz + label=newinstall + initrd=/boot/newinstall/initrd.gz + root=/dev/ram0 + append="devfs=mount,dall ramdisk_size=12000" + + +For more details, refer to the +initrd +4 and +lilo.conf +5 man pages. Now run +lilo and reboot. + + + +The procedure for GRUB is quite similar. Locate your +menu.lst in the /boot/grub/ +directory (sometimes in the /boot/boot/grub/), +add the following lines: + + +title New Install +kernel (hd0,0)/boot/newinstall/vmlinuz root=/dev/ram0 ramdisk_size=12000 +initrd (hd0,0)/boot/newinstall/initrd.gz + + +and reboot. If the boot fails, you can try adding +devfs=mount,dall to the kernel line. + + + + +Note that the value of the ramdisk_size may need to be +adjusted for the size of the initrd image. +From here on, there should be no difference between GRUB +or LILO. + + + + + + Booting from USB Memory Stick + + +Let's assume you have prepared everything from and . Now +just plug your USB stick into some free USB connector and reboot the +computer. The system should boot up, and you should be presented with +the boot: prompt. Here you can enter optional boot +arguments, or just hit &enterkey;. + + + +In case your computer doesn't support booting from USB memory devices, +you can still use a single floppy to do the initial boot and then +switch to USB. Boot your system as described in ; +the kernel on the boot floppy should detect your USB stick automatically. +When it asks for the root floppy, simply press &enterkey;. You should see +&d-i; starting. + + + + + + Booting from Floppies + + +You will have already downloaded the floppy images you needed and +created floppies from the images in . + + + + +To boot from the installer boot floppy, place it in the primary floppy +drive, shut down the system as you normally would, then turn it back +on. + + + +For installing from an LS-120 drive (ATAPI version) with a set of +floppies, you need to specify the virtual location for the floppy +device. This is done with the root= boot +argument, giving the device that the ide-floppy driver maps the device +to. For example, if your LS-120 drive is connected as the first IDE +device (master) on the second cable, you enter +linux root=/dev/hdc at the boot prompt. +Installation from LS-120 is only supported by 2.4 and later kernels. + + + +Note that on some machines, Control +Alt Delete does not +properly reset the machine, so a hard reboot is recommended. If +you are installing from an existing operating system (e.g., from a DOS +box) you don't have a choice. Otherwise, please do a hard reboot when +booting. + + + +The floppy disk will be accessed, and you should then see a screen +that introduces the boot floppy and ends with the boot: +prompt. + + + +Once you press &enterkey;, you should see the message +Loading..., followed by +Uncompressing Linux..., and +then a screenfull or so of information about the hardware in your +system. More information on this phase of the boot process can be +found below in . + + + +After booting from the boot floppy, the root floppy is +requested. Insert the root floppy and press &enterkey;, and the +contents are loaded into memory. The installer program +debian-installer is automatically launched. + + + + + Booting with TFTP + +&boot-installer-intro-net.xml; + + + +There are various ways to do a TFTP boot on i386. + + + + NIC or Motherboard that support PXE + + +It could be that your Network Interface Card or Motherboard provides +PXE boot functionality. +This is a Intel re-implemention +of TFTP boot. If so you may be able to configure your BIOS to boot from the +network. + + + + + NIC with Network BootROM + + +It could be that your Network Interface Card provides +TFTP boot functionality. + + + +Let us (&email-debian-boot-list;) know how did you manage it. +Please refer to this document. + + + + + Etherboot + + +The etherboot project +provides bootdiskettes and even bootroms that do a TFTPboot. + + + + + + The Boot Prompt + + +When the installer boots, you should be presented with a friendly graphical +screen showing the Debian logo and the boot prompt: + + +Press F1 for help, or ENTER to boot: + + +At the boot prompt +you can either just press &enterkey; to boot the installer with +default options or enter a specific boot method and, optionally, boot +parameters. + + + +Information on available boot methods and on boot parameters which might +be useful can be found by pressing F2 through +F7F8. If you add any parameters to +the boot command line, be sure to type the boot method (the default is +linux) and a space before the first parameter (e.g., +linux debconf/priority=medium). + + + +If you are installing the system via a remote management device that +provides a text interface to the VGA console, you may not be able to +see the initial graphical splash screen upon booting the installer; +you may even not see the boot prompt. Examples of these devices include +the text console of Compaq's integrated Lights Out (iLO) +and HP's Integrated Remote Assistant (IRA). +You can blindly press F1 + + + +In some cases these devices will require special escape sequences to +enact this keypress, for example the IRA uses Ctrl +F , 1. + + + + to bypass this screen and view the help text. Once you are +past the splash screen and at the help text your keystrokes will be echoed +at the prompt as expected. To prevent the installer from using the +framebuffer for the rest of the installation, you will also want to add +debian-installer/framebuffer=false to the boot prompt, +as described in the help text. + + + + + diff --git a/en/boot-installer/ia64.xml b/en/boot-installer/ia64.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3fa028406 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/boot-installer/ia64.xml @@ -0,0 +1,464 @@ + + + + Booting from a CD-ROM + +&boot-installer-intro-cd.xml; + + + CD Contents + + + +There are three basic variations of Debian Install CDs. +The Business Card CD has a minimal installation +that will fit on the small form factor CD media. +It requires a network connection in order to install the rest of the +base installation and make a usable system. +The Network Install CD has all of the packages +for a base install but requires a network connection to a Debian +mirror site in order to install the +extra packages one would want for a complete system . +The set of Debian CDs can install a complete system from the wide +range of packages without needing access to the network. + + + + + +The IA-64 architecture uses the next generation Extensible Firmware Interface +(EFI) from Intel. +Unlike the traditional x86 BIOS which knows little about the boot +device other than the partition table and Master Boot Record (MBR), +EFI can read and write files from FAT16 or FAT32 formatted disk +partitions. +This simplifies the often arcane process of starting a system. +The system boot loader and the EFI firmware that supports it have +a full filesystem to store the files necessary for booting the +machine. +This means that the system disk on an IA-64 system has an additional +disk partition dedicated to EFI instead of the simple MBR or boot +block on more conventional systems. + + + +The Debian Installer CD contains a small EFI partition where the +ELILO bootloader, its configuration file, the installer's +kernel, and initial filesystem (initrd) are located. +The running system also contains an EFI partition where the necessary +files for booting the system reside. +These files are readable from the EFI Shell as described below. + + + +Most of the details of how ELILO actually loads and +starts a system are transparent to the system installer. +However, the installer must set up an EFI partition prior to installing +the base system. Otherwise, the installation of ELILO +will fail, rendering the system un-bootable. +The EFI partition is allocated and formatted in the partitioning step +of the installation prior to loading any packages on the system disk. +The partitioning task also verifies that a suitable EFI partition is +present before allowing the installation to proceed. + + + +The EFI Boot Manager is presented as the last step of the firmware +initialization. +It displays a menu list from which the user can select +an option. +Depending on the model of system and what other software has been +loaded on the system, this menu may be different from one system +to another. +There should be at least two menu items displayed, +Boot Option Maintenance Menu and +EFI Shell (Built-in). +Using the first option is preferred, however, if that +option is not available or the CD for some reason does not +boot with it, use the second option. + + + + + IMPORTANT + +The EFI Boot Manager will select a default boot action, typically +the first menu choice, within a pre-set number of seconds. +This is indicated by a countdown at the bottom of the screen. +Once the timer expires and the systems starts the default action, +you may have to reboot the machine in order to continue the installation. +If the default action is the EFI Shell, you can return to the Boot Manager +by running exit at the shell prompt. + + + + + Option 1: Booting from the Boot Option Maintenance Menu + + + + + + + +Insert the CD in the DVD/CD drive and reboot the machine. +The firmware will display the EFI Boot Manager page and menu after +it completes its system initialization. + + + +Select Boot Maintenance Menu from the menu +with the arrow keys and press ENTER. +This will display a new menu. + + + +Select Boot From a File from the menu +with the arrow keys and press ENTER. +This will display a list of devices probed by the firmware. +You should see two menu lines containing either the label +Debian Inst [Acpi ... or +Removable Media Boot. +If you examine the rest of the menu line, you will notice that +the device and controller information should be the same. + + + +You can choose either of the entries that refer to the CD/DVD +drive. +Select your choice with the arrow keys and press ENTER. +If you choose Removable Media Boot the machine +will immediately start the boot load sequence. +If you choose Debian Inst [Acpi ... instead, it +will display a directory listing of the bootable portion of the +CD, requiring you to proceed to the next (additional) step. + + + +You will only need this step if you chose +Debian Inst [Acpi .... +The directory listing will also show +[Treat like Removable Media Boot] on the next to +the last line. +Select this line with the arrow keys and press ENTER. +This will start the boot load sequence. + + + + + + +These steps start the Debian boot loader which will display a +menu page for you to select a boot kernel and options. +Proceed to selecting the boot kernel and options. + + + + + + Option 2: Booting from the EFI Shell + + +If, for some reason, option 1 is not successful, reboot the machine +and when the EFI Boot Manager screen appears there should be +one option called EFI Shell [Built-in]. +Boot the Debian Installer CD with the following steps: + + + + + + +Insert the CD in the DVD/CD drive and reboot the machine. +The firmware will display the EFI Boot Manager page and menu after +it completes system initialization. + + + +Select EFI Shell from the menu with the arrow keys +and press ENTER. +The EFI Shell will scan all of the bootable devices and display +them to the console before displaying its command prompt. +The recognized bootable partitions on devices will show a device name of +fsn:. +All other recognized partitions will be named +blkn:. +If you inserted the CD just before entering the shell, this may +take a few extra seconds as it initializes the CD drive. + + + + +Examine the output from the shell looking for the CDROM drive. +It is most likely the fs0: device although +other devices with bootable partitions will also show up as +fsn. + + + +Enter fsn: and press +ENTER to select that +device where n is the partition number for the +CDROM. The shell will now display the partition number as its prompt. + + + +Enter elilo and press ENTER. +This will start the boot load sequence. + + + + + + +As with option 1, these steps start the Debian boot loader which will +display a menu page for you to select a boot kernel and options. +You can also enter the shorter +fsn:elilo command at +the shell prompt. +Proceed to selecting the boot kernel and options. + + + + + + + Installing using a Serial Console + + + +You may choose to perform an install using a monitor and keyboard +or using a serial connection. To use a monitor/keyboard setup, +select an option containing the string [VGA console]. To install +over a serial connection, choose an option containing the string +[BAUD baud serial console], where +BAUD is the speed of your serial console. +Menu items for the most typical baud rate settings on the ttyS0 +device are preconfigured. + + + +In most circumstances, you will want the installer to use the same +baud rate as your connection to the EFI console. If you aren't +sure what this setting is, you can obtain it using the command +baud at the EFI shell. + + + +If there is not an option available that is configured for the serial +device or baud rate you would like to use, you may override the console setting +for one of the existing menu options. For example, to use a +57600 baud console over the ttyS1 device, enter +console=ttyS1,57600n8 into +the Boot: text window. + + + + +Most IA-64 boxes ship with a default console setting of 9600 baud. +This setting is rather slow, and the normal installation process +will take a significant time to draw each screen. You should consider +either increasing the baud rate used for performing the installation, +or performing a Text Mode installation. See the Params +help menu for instructions on starting the installer in Text Mode. + + + +If you select the wrong console type, you +will be able to select the kernel and enter parameters but both +the display and your input will go dead as soon as the kernel starts, +requiring you to reboot before you can begin the installation. + + + + + Selecting the Boot Kernel and Options + + + +The boot loader will display a form with a menu list and a text +window with a Boot: prompt. +The arrow keys select an item from the menu and any text typed +at the keyboard will appear in the text window. +There are also help screens which can be displayed by pressing +the appropriate function key. +The General help screen explains the menu +choices and the Params screen explains +the common command line options. + + + +Consult the General help screen for the +description of the kernels and install modes most appropriate +for your installation. +You should also consult below for any additional +parameters that you may want to set in the Boot: +text window. +The kernel version you choose selects the kernel version that will be +used for both the installation process and the installed system. +If you encounter kernel problems with the installation, you may also +have those same problems with the system you install. +The following two steps will select and start the install: + + + + + + +Select the kernel version and installation mode most +appropriate to your needs with the arrow keys. + + + +Enter any boot parameters by typing at the keyboard. +The text will be displayed directly in the text window. +This is where kernel parameters (such as serial console +settings) are specified. + + + +Press ENTER. This will load and start the +kernel. +The kernel will display its usual initialization messages followed +by the first screen of the Debian Installer. + + + + + + +Proceed to the next chapter to continue the installation where you will +set up the language locale, network, and disk partitions. + + + + + + Booting with TFTP + + +Booting an IA64 system from the network is similar to a CD boot. +The only difference is how the installation kernel is loaded. +The EFI Boot Manager can load and start programs from a server on +the network. +Once the installation kernel is loaded and starts, the system install +will proceed thru the same steps as the CD install with the exception +that the packages of the base install will be loaded from the network +rather than the CD drive. + + + +&boot-installer-intro-net.xml; + + + +Network booting an ia64 system requires two architecture-specific actions. +On the boot server, DHCP and TFTP must be configured to deliver +elilo. +On the client a new boot option must be defined in the EFI boot manager +to enable loading over a network. + + + + + Configuring the Server + + +A suitable TFTP entry for network booting an ia64 system looks something +like this: + + +host mcmuffin { + hardware ethernet 00:30:6e:1e:0e:83; + fixed-address 10.0.0.21; + filename "debian-installer/ia64/elilo.efi"; +} + + +Note that the goal is to get elilo.efi running on +the client. + + + +Extract the netboot.tar.gz file into the directory used +as the root for your tftp server. Typical tftp root directories include +/var/lib/tftp and /tftpboot. +This will create a debian-installer directory +tree containing the boot files for an IA-64 system. + + + + +# cd /var/lib/tftp +# tar xvfz /home/user/netboot.tar.gz +./ +./debian-installer/ +./debian-installer/ia64/ +[...] + + +The netboot.tar.gz contains an +elilo.conf file that should work for most configurations. +However, should you need to make changes to this file, you can find it in the +debian-installer/ia64/ directory. + +It is possible to have different config files for different clients by naming +them using the client's IP address in hex with the suffix +.conf instead of elilo.conf. +See documentation provided in the elilo package +for details. + + + + + + Configuring the Client + + +To configure the client to support TFTP booting, start by booting to +EFI and entering the Boot Option Maintenance Menu. + + + + +Add a boot option. + + + + +You should see one or more lines with the text +Load File [Acpi()/.../Mac()]. If more +than one of these entries exist, choose the one containing the +MAC address of the interface from which you'll be booting. +Use the arrow keys to highlight your choice, then press enter. + + + + +Name the entry Netboot or something similar, +save, and exit back to the boot options menu. + + + + +You should see the new boot option you just created, and selecting it +should initiate a DHCP query, leading to a TFTP load of +elilo.efi from the server. + + + +The boot loader will display its prompt after it has downloaded and +processed its configuration file. +At this point, the installation proceeds with the same steps as a +CD install. Select a boot option as in above and when the kernel +has completed installing itself from the network, it will start the +Debian Installer. + + + +Proceed to the next chapter to continue the installation where +you will set up the language locale, network, and the disk partitions. + + + + diff --git a/en/boot-installer/intro-cd.xml b/en/boot-installer/intro-cd.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d32a37e9a --- /dev/null +++ b/en/boot-installer/intro-cd.xml @@ -0,0 +1,35 @@ + + + + + +The easiest route for most people will be to use a set of Debian CDs. +If you have a CD set, and if your machine supports booting directly off +the CD, great! Simply + +configure your system for booting off a CD as described in +, + +insert your CD, reboot, and proceed to the next chapter. + + + +Note that certain CD drives may require special drivers, and thus be +inaccessible in the early installation stages. If it turns out the +standard way of booting off a CD doesn't work for your hardware, +revisit this chapter and read about alternate kernels and installation +methods which may work for you. + + + +Even if you cannot boot from CD-ROM, you can probably install the +Debian system components and any packages you want from CD-ROM. +Simply boot using a different media, such as floppies. When it's +time to install the operating system, base system, and any additional +packages, point the installation system at the CD-ROM drive. + + + +If you have problems booting, see . + + diff --git a/en/boot-installer/intro-hd.xml b/en/boot-installer/intro-hd.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c3e00f1f4 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/boot-installer/intro-hd.xml @@ -0,0 +1,16 @@ + + + + + +Booting from an existing operating system is often a convenient +option; for some systems it is the only supported method of +installation. + + + +To boot the installer from hard disk, you will have already completed +downloading and placing the needed files in +. + + diff --git a/en/boot-installer/intro-net.xml b/en/boot-installer/intro-net.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b5594fef3 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/boot-installer/intro-net.xml @@ -0,0 +1,19 @@ + + + + + +Booting from the network requires that you have a network +connection and a TFTP network boot server (DHCP, RARP, or BOOTP). + + + +Older systems such as the 715 might require the use of an RBOOT server +instead of a BOOTP server. + + + +The installation method to support network booting is described in . + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/en/boot-installer/m68k.xml b/en/boot-installer/m68k.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1bf0f0201 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/boot-installer/m68k.xml @@ -0,0 +1,371 @@ + + + + Choosing an Installation Method + + + +Some &arch-title; subarchs have the option of booting using either a +2.4.x or 2.2.x linux kernel. When such a choice exists, try the 2.4.x +linux kernel. The installer should also require less memory when using +a 2.4.x linux kernel as 2.2.x support requires a fixed-sized ramdisk +and 2.4.x uses tmpfs. + + + +If you are using a 2.2.x linux kernel, then you need to use the &ramdisksize; +kernel parameter. + + + + + +Also, if you are using a 2.2.x linux kernel, then you must make sure you +are using a ramdisk built to accommodate it, see the +MANIFEST. +In general, this means you need to use the initrd22.gz ramdisk from the respective +directory. + + + +Make sure root=/dev/ram is one of your kernel +parameters. + + + +If you're having trouble, check +cts's &arch-title; debian-installer FAQ. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + Amiga + + +The only method of installation available to amiga is the hard drive +(see ). +In other words the cdrom is not bootable. + + + +Amiga does not currently work with bogl, so if +you are seeing bogl errors, you need to include the kernel parameter +debian-installer/framebuffer=false. + + + + + Atari + + +The installer for atari may be started from either the hard +drive (see ) or from floppies +(see ). +In other words the cdrom is not bootable. + + + +Atari does not currently work with bogl, so if +you are seeing bogl errors, you need to include the kernel parameter +debian-installer/framebuffer=false. + + + + + BVME6000 + + +The installer for BVME6000 may be started from a cdrom +(see ), floppies +(see ), or the net +(see ). + + + + + Macintosh + + +The only method of installation available to mac is from +the hard drive (see ). +In other words the cdrom is not bootable. +Macs do not have a working 2.4.x kernel. + + + +If your hardware uses a 53c9x-based scsi bus, then you may need to +include the kernel parameter mac53c9x=1,0. +Hardware with two such scsi buses, such as the Quadra 950, will need +mac53c9x=2,0 instead. Alternatively, the +parameter can be specified as mac53c9x=-1,0 +which will leave autodetection on, but which will disable SCSI +disconnects. Note that specifying this parameter is only necessary +if you have more than one hard disk; otherwise, the system will run +faster if you do not specify it. + + + + + MVME147 and MVME16x + + +The installer for MVME147 and MVME16x may be started from +either floppies (see ) +or the net (see ). +In other words the cdrom is not bootable. + + + + + Q40/Q60 + + +The only method of installation available to Q40/Q60 is +from the hard drive (see ). +In other words the cdrom is not bootable. + + + + + + + Booting from a Hard Disk + +&boot-installer-intro-hd.xml; + + + +At least six different ramdisks may be used to boot from the hard +drive, three different types each with and without support for a +2.2.x linux kernel (see +MANIFEST +for details). + + + +The three different types of ramdisks are cdrom, +hd-media, and nativehd. These +ramdisks differ only in their source for installation packages. +The cdrom ramdisk uses a cdrom to get +debian-installer packages. The hd-media ramdisk +uses an iso image file of a cdrom currently residing on a hard disk. +Finally, the nativehd ramdisk uses the net to +install packages. + + + + + + + + + + + + Booting from AmigaOS + + +In the Workbench, start the Linux installation +process by double-clicking on the StartInstall icon +in the debian directory. + + + +You may have to press the &enterkey; key twice after the Amiga +installer program has output some debugging information into a window. +After this, the screen will go grey, there will be a few seconds' +delay. Next, a black screen with white text should come up, displaying +all kinds of kernel debugging information. These messages may scroll +by too fast for you to read, but that's OK. After a couple of +seconds, the installation program should start automatically, so you +can continue down at . + + + + + + Booting from Atari TOS + + +At the GEM desktop, start the Linux installation process by +double-clicking on the bootstra.prg icon in the +debian directory and clicking +Ok at the program options dialog box. + + + +You may have to press the &enterkey; key after the Atari +bootstrap program has output some debugging information into a +window. After this, the screen will go grey, there will be a few +seconds' delay. Next, a black screen with white text should come up, +displaying all kinds of kernel debugging information. These messages +may scroll by too fast for you to read, but that's OK. After a couple +of seconds, the installation program should start automatically, so +you can continue below at . + + + + + + Booting from MacOS + + +You must retain the original Mac system and +boot from it. It is essential that, when booting +MacOS in preparation for booting the Penguin linux loader, you +hold the shift key down to prevent extensions from +loading. If you don't use MacOS except for loading linux, you can +accomplish the same thing by removing all extensions and control +panels from the Mac's System Folder. Otherwise extensions may be left +running and cause random problems with the running linux kernel. + + + +Macs require the Penguin +bootloader. If you do not have the tools to handle +a Stuffit archive, &penguin19.hfs; is an +hfs disk image with Penguin unpacked. + describes how to copy this +image to a floppy. + + + +At the MacOS desktop, start the Linux installation process by +double-clicking on the Penguin Prefs icon in +the Penguin directory. The +Penguin booter will start up. Go to the +Settings item in the +File menu, click the +Kernel tab. Select the kernel +(vmlinuz) and ramdisk +(initrd.gz) images in the +install directory by clicking on the corresponding +buttons in the upper right corner, and navigating the file select +dialogs to locate the files. + + + +To set the boot parameters in Penguin, choose File -> +Settings..., then switch to the +Options tab. Boot parameters may be typed in to +the text entry area. If you will always want to use these settings, +select File -> Save Settings as +Default. + + + +Close the Settings +dialog, save the settings and start the bootstrap using the +Boot Now item in the +File menu. + + + +The Penguin booter will output some debugging +information into a window. After this, the screen will go grey, there +will be a few seconds' delay. Next, a black screen with white text +should come up, displaying all kinds of kernel debugging +information. These messages may scroll by too fast for you to read, +but that's OK. After a couple of seconds, the installation program +should start automatically, so you can continue below at +. + + + + + + Booting from Q40/Q60 + + + +FIXME + + + +The installation program should start automatically, so you can +continue below at . + + + + + + + + Booting from a CD-ROM + + +Currently, the only &arch-title; subarchitecture that +supports CD-ROM booting is the BVME6000. + + + +&boot-installer-intro-cd.xml; + + + + + Booting with TFTP + +&boot-installer-intro-net.xml; + + + +After booting the VMEbus systems you will be presented with the LILO +Boot: prompt. At that prompt enter one of the +following to boot Linux and begin installation proper of the Debian +software using vt102 terminal emulation: + + + + + + + +type i6000 &enterkey; to install a BVME4000/6000 + + + + +type i162 &enterkey; to install an MVME162 + + + + +type i167 &enterkey; to install an MVME166/167 + + + + + + +You may additionally append the string +TERM=vt100 to use vt100 terminal emulation, +e.g., i6000 TERM=vt100 &enterkey;. + + + + + + + Booting from Floppies + + +For most &arch-title; architectures, booting from a local filesystem is the +recommended method. + + + +Booting from the boot floppy is supported only for Atari and VME +(with a SCSI floppy drive on VME) at this time. + + + diff --git a/en/boot-installer/mips.xml b/en/boot-installer/mips.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f03084b73 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/boot-installer/mips.xml @@ -0,0 +1,100 @@ + + + + + Booting with TFTP + + + SGI Indys TFTP Booting + + +After entering the command monitor use + + +bootp(): + + +on SGI Indys to boot linux and to begin installation of the Debian +Software. In order to make this +work you may have to unset the netaddr environment +variable. Type + + +unsetenv netaddr + + +in the command monitor to do this. + + + + + + Broadcom BCM91250A TFTP Booting + + +On the Broadcom BCM91250A evaluation board, you have to load the SiByl boot +loader via TFTP which will then load and start the Debian installer. In +most cases, you will first obtain an IP address via DHCP but it is also +possible to configure a static address. In order to use DHCP, you can +enter the following command on the CFE prompt: + + +ifconfig eth0 -auto + + +Once you have obtained an IP address, you can load SiByl with the following +command: + + +boot 192.168.1.1:/boot/sibyl + + +You need to substitute the IP address listed in this example with either +the name or the IP address of your TFTP server. Once you issue this +command, the installer will be loaded automatically. + + + + + + Boot Parameters + + + SGI Indys TFTP Booting + + +On SGI Indys you can append boot parameters to the +bootp(): command in the command monitor. + + + +Following the bootp(): command you can give the +path and name of the file to boot if you did not give an explicit name +via your bootp/dhcp server. Example: + + +bootp():/boot/tftpboot.img + + +Further kernel parameters can be passed via append: + + +bootp(): append="root=/dev/sda1" + + + + + + + Broadcom BCM91250A TFTP Booting + + +You cannot pass any boot parameters directly from the CFE prompt. Instead, +you have to edit the /boot/sibyl.conf file on the TFTP +server and add your parameters to the extra_args +variable. + + + + + diff --git a/en/boot-installer/mipsel.xml b/en/boot-installer/mipsel.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a9fd14ed6 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/boot-installer/mipsel.xml @@ -0,0 +1,12 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/en/boot-installer/parameters.xml b/en/boot-installer/parameters.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..90188ad34 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/boot-installer/parameters.xml @@ -0,0 +1,351 @@ + + + + Boot Parameters + + +Boot parameters are Linux kernel parameters which are generally used +to make sure that peripherals are dealt with properly. For the most +part, the kernel can auto-detect information about your peripherals. +However, in some cases you'll have to help the kernel a bit. + + + +If this is the first time you're booting the system, try the default +boot parameters (i.e., don't try setting parameters) and see if it works +correctly. It probably will. If not, you can reboot later and look for +any special parameters that inform the system about your hardware. + + + +Information on many boot parameters can be found in the + Linux +BootPrompt HOWTO, including tips for obscure hardware. This +section contains only a sketch of the most salient parameters. Some +common gotchas are included below in +. + + + +When the kernel boots, a message + + +Memory:availk/totalk available + + +should be emitted early in the process. +total should match the total amount of RAM, +in kilobytes. If this doesn't match the actual amount of RAM you have +installed, you need to use the +mem=ram parameter, +where ram is set to the amount of memory, +suffixed with k for kilobytes, or m for +megabytes. For example, both mem=65536k and +mem=64m mean 64MB of RAM. + + + +If you are booting with a serial console, generally the kernel will +autodetect +this (although not on DECstations). +If you have a videocard (framebuffer) and a keyboard also attached to +the computer which you wish to boot via serial console, you may have +to pass the +console=device +argument to the kernel, where device is +your serial device, which is usually something like +ttyS0. + + + +For &arch-title; the serial devices are ttya or +ttyb. +Alternatively, set the input-device and +output-device OpenPROM variables to +ttya. + + + + + Debian Installer Parameters + + +The installation system recognizes a few additional boot parameters + + + +Note that the kernel accepts a maximum of 8 command line options and +8 environment options (including any options added by default for the +installer). If these numbers are exceeded, 2.4 kernels will drop any +excess options and 2.6 kernels will panic. +With kernel 2.6.9 or newer, you can use 32 +command line options and 32 environment options. + + + + which may be useful. + + + + + +debconf/priority + + +This parameter sets the lowest priority of messages to be displayed. + + + +The default installation uses debconf/priority=high. +This means that both high and critical priority messages are shown, but medium +and low priority messages are skipped. +If problems are encountered, the installer adjusts the priority as needed. + + + +If you add debconf/priority=medium as boot parameter, you +will be shown the installation menu and gain more control over the installation. +When debconf/priority=low is used, all messages are shown +(this is equivalent to the expert boot method). +With debconf/priority=critical, the installation system +will display only critical messages and try to do the right thing without fuss. + + + + + + +DEBIAN_FRONTEND + + +This boot parameter controls the type of user interface used for the +installer. The current possible parameter settings are: + + + +DEBIAN_FRONTEND=noninteractive + +DEBIAN_FRONTEND=text + +DEBIAN_FRONTEND=newt + +DEBIAN_FRONTEND=slang + +DEBIAN_FRONTEND=ncurses + +DEBIAN_FRONTEND=bogl + +DEBIAN_FRONTEND=gtk + +DEBIAN_FRONTEND=corba + + + +The default front end is DEBIAN_FRONTEND=newt. +DEBIAN_FRONTEND=text may be preferable for +serial console installs. Generally only the +newt frontend is available on default install +media, so this is not very useful right now. + + + + + + +BOOT_DEBUG + + +Setting this boot parameter to 2 will cause the installer's boot process +to be verbosely logged. Setting it to 3 makes debug shells +available at strategic points in the boot process. (Exit the shells to +continue the boot process.) + + + +BOOT_DEBUG=0 +This is the default. + + + +BOOT_DEBUG=1 +More verbose than usual. + + + +BOOT_DEBUG=2 +Lots of debugging information. + + + +BOOT_DEBUG=3 + + +Shells are run at various points in the boot process to allow detailed +debugging. Exit the shell to continue the boot. + + + + + + + + + + +INSTALL_MEDIA_DEV + + +The value of the parameter is the path to the device to load the +Debian installer from. For example, +INSTALL_MEDIA_DEV=/dev/floppy/0 + + + +The boot floppy, which normally scans all floppies and USB storage +devices it can to find the root floppy, can be overridden by this +parameter to only look at the one device. + + + + + +debian-installer/framebuffer + + +Some architectures use the kernel framebuffer to offer installation in +a number of languages. If framebuffer causes a problem on your system +you can disable the feature by the parameter +debian-installer/framebuffer=false. Problem +symptoms are error messages about bterm or bogl, a blank screen, or +a freeze within a few minutes after starting the install. + + + +The video=vga16:off argument may also be used +to disable the framebuffer. Such problems have been reported on a Dell +Inspiron with Mobile Radeon card. + + + +Such problems have been reported on the Amiga 1200 and SE/30. + + + +Such problems have been reported on hppa. + + + +Because of display problems on some systems, framebuffer support is +disabled by default for &arch-title;. This can result +in ugly display on systems that do properly support the framebuffer, like +those with ATI graphical cards. +If you see display problems in the installer, you can try booting with +parameter debian-installer/framebuffer=true. + + + + + +debian-installer/probe/usb + + +Set to false to prevent probing for USB on +boot, if that causes problems. + + + + + +netcfg/disable_dhcp + + +By default, the &d-i; automatically probes for network configuration +via DHCP. If the probe succeeds, you won't have a chance to review and +change the obtained settings. You can get to the manual network setup +only in case the DHCP probe fails. + + + +If you have a DHCP server on your local network, but want to avoid it +because e.g. it gives wrong answers, you can use the parameter +netcfg/disable_dhcp=true to prevent configuring +the network with DHCP and to enter the information manually. + + + + + +hw-detect/start_pcmcia + + +Set to false to prevent starting PCMCIA +services, if that causes problems. Some laptops are well known for +this misbehavior. + + + + + +preseed/url + + +Specify the url to a preconfiguration file to download and use in +automating the install. See . + + + + + +preseed/file + + +Specify the path to a preconfiguration file to load to +automating the install. See . + + + + + +cdrom-detect/eject + + +By default, before rebooting, &d-i; automatically ejects the optical +media used during the installation. This can be unnecessary if the system +does not automatically boot off the CD. In some cases it may even be +undesirable, for example if the optical drive cannot reinsert the media +itself and the user is not there to do it manually. Many slot loading, +slim-line, and caddy style drives cannot reload media automatically. + + + +Set to false to disable automatic ejection, and +be aware that you may need to ensure that the system does not +automatically boot from the optical drive after the initial +installation. + + + + + +ramdisk_size + + +If you are using a 2.2.x kernel, you may need to set &ramdisksize;. + + + + + +rescue/enable + + +Set to true to enter rescue mode rather than +performing a normal installation. See . + + + + + + + + diff --git a/en/boot-installer/powerpc.xml b/en/boot-installer/powerpc.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7d7219d08 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/boot-installer/powerpc.xml @@ -0,0 +1,247 @@ + + + + Booting from a CD-ROM + +&boot-installer-intro-cd.xml; + + + +Currently, the only &arch-title; subarchitectures that support CD-ROM +booting are PReP and New World PowerMacs. On PowerMacs, hold the +c key, or else the combination of +Command, Option, +Shift, and Delete +keys together while booting to boot from the CD-ROM. + + + +OldWorld PowerMacs will not boot a Debian CD, because OldWorld +computers relied on a Mac OS ROM CD boot driver to be present on the CD, +and a free-software version of this driver is not available. All +OldWorld systems have floppy drives, so use the floppy drive to launch +the installer, and then point the installer to the CD for the needed +files. + + + +If your system doesn't boot directly from CD-ROM, you can still use +the CD-ROM to install the system. On NewWorlds, you can also use an +OpenFirmware command to boot from the CD-ROM manually. Follow the +instructions in for booting from +the hard disk, except use the path to yaboot on the +CD at the OF prompt, such as + + +0 > boot cd:,\install\yaboot + + + + + + + Booting from Hard Disk + +&boot-installer-intro-hd.xml; + + Booting CHRP from OpenFirmware + + + + Not yet written. + + + + + Booting OldWorld PowerMacs from MacOS + + +If you set up BootX in , you can +use it to boot into the installation system. Double click the +BootX application icon. Click on the +Options button and select Use +Specified RAM Disk. This will give you the +chance to select the ramdisk.image.gz file. You +may need to select the No Video Driver checkbox, +depending on your hardware. Then click the +Linux button to shut down MacOS and launch the +installer. + + + + + + + Booting NewWorld Macs from OpenFirmware + + +You will have already placed the vmlinux, +initrd.gz, yaboot, and +yaboot.conf files at the root level of your HFS +partition in . +Restart the computer, and immediately (during the chime) hold down the +Option, Command (cloverleaf/Apple), +o, and f keys all together. After +a few seconds you will be presented with the Open Firmware prompt. +At the prompt, type + + +0 > boot hd:x,yaboot + + +replacing x with the partition number of +the HFS partition where the +kernel and yaboot files were placed, followed by a &enterkey;. On some +machines, you may need to use ide0: instead of +hd:. In a few more seconds you will see a +yaboot prompt + + +boot: + + +At yaboot's boot: prompt, type either +install or install video=ofonly +followed by a &enterkey;. The +video=ofonly argument is for maximum +compatibility; you can try it if install +doesn't work. The Debian installation program should start. + + + + + + + Booting from USB memory stick + + +Currently, NewWorld PowerMac systems are known to support USB booting. + + + + + +Make sure you have prepared everything from . To boot a Macintosh system from a USB stick, +you will need to use the Open Firmware prompt, since Open Firmware does +not search USB storage devices by default. + +To get to the prompt, hold down +Command Option +o f all together while +booting (see ). + + + +You will need to work out where the USB storage device appears in the +device tree, since at the moment ofpath cannot work +that out automatically. Type dev / ls and +devalias at the Open Firmware prompt to get a +list of all known devices and device aliases. On the author's system +with various types of USB stick, paths such as +usb0/disk, usb0/hub/disk, +/pci@f2000000/usb@1b,1/disk@1, and +/pci@f2000000/usb@1b,1/hub@1/disk@1 work. + + + +Having worked out the device path, use a command like this to boot the +installer: + + +boot usb0/disk:2,\\:tbxi + + +The 2 matches the Apple_HFS or +Apple_Bootstrap partition onto which you copied the boot image earlier, +and the ,\\:tbxi part instructs Open Firmware to +boot from the file with an HFS file type of "tbxi" (i.e. +yaboot) in the directory previously blessed with +hattrib -b. + + + +The system should now boot up, and you should be presented with the +boot: prompt. Here you can enter optional boot +arguments, or just hit &enterkey;. + + + +This boot method is new, and may be difficult to get to work on some +NewWorld systems. If you have problems, please file an installation +report, as explained in . + + + + + Booting with TFTP + +&boot-installer-intro-net.xml; + + + +Currently, PReP and New World PowerMac systems support netbooting. + + + +On machines with Open Firmware, such as NewWorld Power Macs, enter the +boot monitor (see ) and +use the command boot enet:0. PReP and CHRP boxes +may have different ways of addressing the network. On a PReP machine, +you should try +boot server_ipaddr,file,client_ipaddr. + + + + + + + Booting from Floppies + + +Booting from floppies is supported for &arch-title;, although it is +generally only applicable for OldWorld systems. NewWorld systems are +not equipped with floppy drives, and attached USB floppy drives are +not supported for booting. + + + +You will have already downloaded the floppy images you needed and +created floppies from the images in . + + + +To boot from the boot-floppy-hfs.img floppy, +place it in floppy drive after shutting the system down, and before +pressing the power-on button. + + +For those not familiar with Macintosh +floppy operations: a floppy placed in the machine prior to boot will +be the first priority for the system to boot from. A floppy without a +valid boot system will be ejected, and the machine will then check for +bootable hard disk partitions. + + + +After booting, the root.bin floppy is +requested. Insert the root floppy and press &enterkey;. The installer +program is automatically launched after the root system has been +loaded into memory. + + + + + + PowerPC Boot Parameters + + +Many older Apple monitors used a 640x480 67Hz mode. If your video +appears skewed on an older Apple monitor, try appending the boot +argument video=atyfb:vmode:6 , which will +select that mode for most Mach64 and Rage video hardware. For Rage 128 +hardware, this changes to +video=aty128fb:vmode:6 . + + + diff --git a/en/boot-installer/s390.xml b/en/boot-installer/s390.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0fd68dce4 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/boot-installer/s390.xml @@ -0,0 +1,30 @@ + + + + s390 Limitations + + +In order to run the installation system a working network setup and +ssh session is needed on S/390. + + + +The booting process starts with a network setup that prompts you for +several network parameters. If the setup is successful, you will login +to the system by starting a ssh session which will launch the +standard installation system. + + + + + + s390 Boot Parameters + + +On S/390 you can append boot parameters in the parm file. This file can +either be in ASCII or EBCDIC format. Please read +Device Drivers and Installation Commands +for more information about S/390-specific boot parameters. + + + diff --git a/en/boot-installer/sparc.xml b/en/boot-installer/sparc.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..22295dac4 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/boot-installer/sparc.xml @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ + + + + Booting with TFTP + +&boot-installer-intro-net.xml; + + + +On machines with OpenBoot, simply enter the boot monitor on the +machine which is being installed (see +). +Use the command boot net to boot from a TFTP +and RARP server, or try boot net:bootp or +boot net:dhcp to boot from a TFTP and BOOTP +or DHCP server. Some older OpenBoot revisions require using +the device name, such as boot le(); these +probably don't support BOOTP nor DHCP. + + + + + + Booting from a CD-ROM + +&boot-installer-intro-cd.xml; + + + +Most OpenBoot versions support the boot cdrom +command which is simply an alias to boot from the SCSI device on ID 6 +(or the secondary master for IDE based systems). You may have to use +the actual device name for older OpenBoot versions that don't support +this special command. Note that some problems have been reported on Sun4m +(e.g., Sparc 10s and Sparc 20s) systems booting from CD-ROM. + + + + + + + Booting from Floppies + + +To boot from floppy on a Sparc, use + + +Stop-A -> OpenBoot: "boot floppy" + + +Be warned that the newer Sun4u (ultra) architecture does not support +floppy booting. A typical error message is Bad magic +number in disk label - Can't open disk label package. +Furthermore, a number of Sun4c models (such as the IPX) do not support +the compressed images found on the disks, so also are not supported. + + + +Several Sparcs (e.g. Ultra 10) have an OBP bug that prevents them from +booting (instead of not supporting booting at all). The appropriate +OBP update can be downloaded as product ID 106121 from +. + + + +If you are booting from the floppy, and you see messages such as + + +Fatal error: Cannot read partition +Illegal or malformed device name + + +then it is possible that floppy booting is simply not supported on +your machine. + + + + + IDPROM Messages + + +If you cannot boot because you get messages about a problem with +IDPROM, then it's possible that your NVRAM battery, which +holds configuration information for you firmware, has run out. See the +Sun NVRAM FAQ for more +information. + + + diff --git a/en/boot-installer/trouble.xml b/en/boot-installer/trouble.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0553914b8 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/boot-installer/trouble.xml @@ -0,0 +1,274 @@ + + + + + Troubleshooting the Installation Process + + + + + Floppy Disk Reliability + + + +The biggest problem for people using floppy disks to install Debian +seems to be floppy disk reliability. + + + +The boot floppy is the floppy with the worst problems, because it +is read by the hardware directly, before Linux boots. Often, the +hardware doesn't read as reliably as the Linux floppy disk driver, and +may just stop without printing an error message if it reads incorrect +data. There can also be failures in the Driver Floppies most of which +indicate themselves with a flood of messages about disk I/O errors. + + + +If you are having the installation stall at a particular floppy, the +first thing you should do is re-download the floppy disk image and +write it to a different floppy. Simply +reformatting the old +floppy may not be sufficient, even if it appears that the floppy was +reformatted and written with no errors. It is sometimes useful to try +writing the floppy on a different system. + + + +One user reports he had to write the images to floppy +three times before one worked, and then +everything was fine with the third floppy. + + + +Other users have reported that simply rebooting a few times with the +same floppy in the floppy drive can lead to a successful boot. This is +all due to buggy hardware or firmware floppy drivers. + + + + + Boot Configuration + + + +If you have problems and the kernel hangs during the boot process, +doesn't recognize peripherals you actually have, or drives are not +recognized properly, the first thing to check is the boot parameters, +as discussed in . + + + +If you are booting with your own kernel instead of the one supplied +with the installer, be sure that CONFIG_DEVFS is set in +your kernel. The installer requires +CONFIG_DEVFS. + + + +Often, problems can be solved by removing add-ons and peripherals, and +then trying booting again. Internal modems, sound +cards, and Plug-n-Play devices can be especially problematic. + + + +If you have a large amount of memory installed in your machine, more +than 512M, and the installer hangs when booting the kernel, you may +need to include a boot argument to limit the amount of memory the +kernel sees, such as mem=512m. + + + + + + Common &arch-title; Installation Problems + + +There are some common installation problems that can be solved or avoided by +passing certain boot parameters to the installer. + + + +Some systems have floppies with inverted DCLs. If you receive +errors reading from the floppy, even when you know the floppy is good, +try the parameter floppy=thinkpad. + + + +On some systems, such as the IBM PS/1 or ValuePoint (which have ST-506 +disk drivers), the IDE drive may not be properly recognized. Again, +try it first without the parameters and see if the IDE drive is +recognized properly. If not, determine your drive geometry +(cylinders, heads, and sectors), and use the parameter +hd=cylinders,heads,sectors. + + + +If you have a very old machine, and the kernel hangs after saying +Checking 'hlt' instruction..., then +you should try the no-hlt boot argument, which +disables this test. + + + +If your screen begins to show a weird picture while the kernel boots, +eg. pure white, pure black or colored pixel garbage, your system may +contain a problematic video card which does not switch to the +framebuffer mode properly. Then you can use the boot parameter +debian-installer/framebuffer=false or +video=vga16:off to disable the framebuffer +console. Only the English +language will be available during the installation due to limited +console features. See for details. + + + + + System Freeze During the PCMCIA Configuration Phase + + +Some laptop models produced by Dell are known to crash when PCMCIA device +detection tries to access some hardware addresses. Other laptops may display +similar problems. If you experience such a problem and you don't need PCMCIA +support during the installation, you can disable PCMCIA using the +hw-detect/start_pcmcia=false boot parameter. You can +then configure PCMCIA after the installation is completed and exclude the +resource range causing the problems. + + + +Alternatively, you can boot the installer in expert mode. You will +then be asked to enter the resource range options your hardware +needs. For example, if you have one of the Dell laptops mentioned +above, you should enter exclude port +0x800-0x8ff here. There is also a list of some common +resource range options in the System +resource settings section of the PCMCIA HOWTO. Note that you +have to omit the commas, if any, when you enter this value in the +installer. + + + + + + System Freeze while Loading the USB Modules + + +The kernel normally tries to install USB modules and the USB keyboard driver +in order to support some non-standard USB keyboards. However, there are some +broken USB systems where the driver hangs on loading. A possible workaround +may be disabling the USB controller in your mainboard BIOS setup. Another option +is passing the debian-installer/probe/usb=false parameter +at the boot prompt, which will prevent the modules from being loaded. + + + + + + + Interpreting the Kernel Startup Messages + + + +During the boot sequence, you may see many messages in the form +can't find something +, or +something not present, +can't initialize something +, or even this driver release depends +on something . +Most of these messages are harmless. You +see them because the kernel for the installation system is built to +run on computers with many different peripheral devices. Obviously, no +one computer will have every possible peripheral device, so the +operating system may emit a few complaints while it looks for +peripherals you don't own. You may also see the system pause for a +while. This happens when it is waiting for a device to respond, and +that device is not present on your system. If you find the time it +takes to boot the system unacceptably long, you can create a +custom kernel later (see ). + + + + + + + Bug Reporter + + +If you get through the initial boot phase but cannot complete the +install, the bug reporter menu choice may be helpful. It copies system +error logs and configuration information to a user-supplied floppy. +This information may provide clues as to what went wrong and how to +fix it. If you are submitting a bug report you may want to attach +this information to the bug report. + + + +Other pertinent installation messages may be found in +/var/log/ during the +installation, and /var/log/debian-installer/ +after the computer has been booted into the installed system. + + + + + + Submitting Installation Reports + + +If you still have problems, please submit an installation report. We also +encourage installation reports to be sent even if the installation is +successful, so that we can get as much information as possible on the largest +number of hardware configurations. Please use this template when filling out +installation reports, and file the report as a bug report against the +installation-reports pseudo package, by sending it to +submit@bugs.debian.org. + + +Package: installation-reports + +Debian-installer-version: <Fill in date and from where you got the image> +uname -a: <The result of running uname -a on a shell prompt> +Date: <Date and time of the install> +Method: <How did you install? What did you boot off? If network + install, from where? Proxied?> + +Machine: <Description of machine (eg, IBM Thinkpad R32)> +Processor: +Memory: +Root Device: <IDE? SCSI? Name of device?> +Root Size/partition table: <Feel free to paste the full partition + table, with notes on which partitions are mounted where.> +Output of lspci and lspci -n: + +Base System Installation Checklist: +[O] = OK, [E] = Error (please elaborate below), [ ] = didn't try it + +Initial boot worked: [ ] +Configure network HW: [ ] +Config network: [ ] +Detect CD: [ ] +Load installer modules: [ ] +Detect hard drives: [ ] +Partition hard drives: [ ] +Create file systems: [ ] +Mount partitions: [ ] +Install base system: [ ] +Install boot loader: [ ] +Reboot: [ ] + +Comments/Problems: + +<Description of the install, in prose, and any thoughts, comments + and ideas you had during the initial install.> + + +In the bug report, describe what the problem is, including the last +visible kernel messages in the event of a kernel hang. Describe the +steps that you did which brought the system into the problem state. + + + + diff --git a/en/boot-new/boot-new.xml b/en/boot-new/boot-new.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f045e1f3c --- /dev/null +++ b/en/boot-new/boot-new.xml @@ -0,0 +1,291 @@ + + + + + Booting Into Your New Debian System + + The Moment of Truth + + +Your system's first boot on its own power is what electrical engineers +call the smoke test. + + + +If you are booting directly into Debian, and the system doesn't start +up, either use your original installation boot media, or insert the +custom boot floppy if you have one, and reset your system. This way, +you will probably need to add some boot arguments like +root=root, where +root is your root partition, such as +/dev/sda1. + +Alternatively, see for instructions on using +the installer's built-in rescue mode. + + + + + BVME 6000 Booting + + +If you have just performed a diskless install on a BVM or Motorola +VMEbus machine: once the system has loaded the +tftplilo program from the TFTP server, from the +LILO Boot: prompt enter one of: + + + + +b6000 followed by &enterkey; +to boot a BVME 4000/6000 + + + +b162 followed by &enterkey; +to boot an MVME162 + + + +b167 followed by &enterkey; +to boot an MVME166/167 + + + + + + + + + Macintosh Booting + + + +Go to the directory containing the installation files and start up the +Penguin booter, holding down the +command key. Go to the +Settings dialogue ( +command T ), and locate +the kernel options line which should look like +root=/dev/ram video=font:VGA8x16 or similar. + + + +You need to change the entry to +root=/dev/yyyy. +Replace the yyyy with the Linux name of the +partition onto which you installed the system +(e.g. /dev/sda1); you wrote this down earlier. +The video=font:VGA8x8 is recommended especially +for users with tiny screens. The kernel would pick a prettier (6x11) +font but the console driver for this font can hang the machine, so +using 8x16 or 8x8 is safer at this stage. You can change this at any +time. + + + +If you don't want to start GNU/Linux immediately each time you start, +uncheck the Auto Boot option. Save your +settings in the Prefs file using the +Save Settings As Default option. + + + +Now select Boot Now ( +command B ) to start your +freshly installed GNU/Linux instead of the RAMdisk installer system. + + + +Debian should boot, and you should see the same messages as +when you first booted the installation system, followed by some new +messages. + + + + + + OldWorld PowerMacs + + +If the machine fails to boot after completing the installation, and +stops with a boot: prompt, try typing +Linux followed by &enterkey;. (The default boot +configuration in quik.conf is labeled Linux). The +labels defined in quik.conf will be displayed if +you press the Tab key at the boot: +prompt. You can also try booting back into the installer, and editing +the /target/etc/quik.conf placed there by the +Install Quik on a Hard Disk step. Clues +for dealing with quik are available at +. + + + +To boot back into MacOS without resetting the nvram, type +bye at the OpenFirmware prompt (assuming MacOS +has not been removed from the machine). To obtain an OpenFirmware +prompt, hold down the command +option o f + keys while cold booting the machine. If you need to reset +the OpenFirmware nvram changes to the MacOS default in order to boot +back to MacOS, hold down the command +option p r + keys while cold booting the machine. + + + +If you use BootX to boot into the installed system, +just select your desired kernel in the Linux +Kernels folder, un-choose the ramdisk option, and add +a root device corresponding to your installation; +e.g. /dev/hda8. + + + + + + NewWorld PowerMacs + + +On G4 machines and iBooks, you can hold down the +option key and get a graphical screen with a button +for each bootable OS, &debian; will be a button with a small penguin +icon. + + + +If you kept MacOS and at some point it changes the OpenFirmware +boot-device variable you should reset OpenFirmware to +its default configuration. To do this hold down the +command option p +r keys while cold booting the machine. + + + +The labels defined in yaboot.conf will be +displayed if you press the Tab key at the +boot: prompt. + + + +Resetting OpenFirmware on G3 or G4 hardware will cause it to boot +&debian; by default (if you correctly partitioned and placed the +Apple_Bootstrap partition first). If you have &debian; on a SCSI disk +and MacOS on an IDE disk this may not work and you will have to enter +OpenFirmware and set the boot-device variable, +ybin normally does this automatically. + + + +After you boot &debian; for the first time you can add any additional +options you desire (such as dual boot options) to +/etc/yaboot.conf and run ybin +to update your boot partition with the changed configuration. Please +read the yaboot HOWTO +for more information. + + + + + + + Debian Post-Boot (Base) Configuration + + + +After booting, you will be prompted to complete the configuration of +your basic system, and then to select what additional packages you +wish to install. The application which guides you through this +process is called base-config. Its concept is +very similar to the &d-i; from the first stage. Indeed, +base-config consists of a number of specialized +components, where each component handles one configuration task, +contains hidden menu in the background and also uses +the same navigation system. + + + +If you wish to re-run the base-config at any +point after installation is complete, as root run +base-config. + + + +&module-bc-timezone.xml; +&module-bc-shadow.xml; +&module-bc-ppp.xml; +&module-bc-apt.xml; +&module-bc-packages.xml; +&module-bc-install.xml; +&module-bc-mta.xml; + + + + + Log In + + + +After you've installed packages, you'll be presented with the login +prompt. Log in using the personal login and password you +selected. Your system is now ready to use. + + + +If you are a new user, you may want to explore the documentation which +is already installed on your system as you start to use it. There are +currently several documentation systems, work is proceeding on +integrating the different types of documentation. Here are a few +starting points. + + + +Documentation accompanying programs you have installed is in +/usr/share/doc/, under a subdirectory named after +the program. For example, the APT User's Guide for using +apt to install other programs on your system, is +located in +/usr/share/doc/apt/guide.html/index.html. + + + + +In addition, there are some special folders within the +/usr/share/doc/ hierarchy. Linux HOWTOs are +installed in .gz format, in +/usr/share/doc/HOWTO/en-txt/. After installing +dhelp you will find a browse-able index of +documentation in /usr/share/doc/HTML/index.html. + + + +One easy way to view these documents is to cd +/usr/share/doc/, and type lynx +followed by a space and a dot (the dot stands for the current +directory). + + + +You can also type info +command or man +command to see documentation on +most commands available at the command prompt. Typing +help will display help on shell commands. And +typing a command followed by --help will +usually display a short summary of the command's usage. If a command's +results scroll past the top of the screen, type | +more after the command to cause the results to pause +before scrolling past the top of the screen. To see a list of all +commands available which begin with a certain letter, type the letter +and then two tabs. + + + +For a more complete introduction to Debian and GNU/Linux, see +/usr/share/doc/debian-guide/html/noframes/index.html. + + + + + diff --git a/en/boot-new/modules/apt.xml b/en/boot-new/modules/apt.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5419d284b --- /dev/null +++ b/en/boot-new/modules/apt.xml @@ -0,0 +1,114 @@ + + + + + Configuring APT + + + +The main means that people use to install packages on their system is +via a program called apt-get, from the +apt package. + + + +Note that the actual program that installs packages is called +dpkg. However, this package is more of a low-level +tool. apt-get is a higher-level tool as it will +invoke dpkg as appropriate and also because it knows +to install other packages which are required for the package you're +trying to install, as well as how to retrieve the package from your +CD, the network, or wherever. + + + +Other front-ends for package management, like aptitude, +synaptic and the older dselect also +use and depend on apt-get. These front-ends are recommended +for new users, since they integrate some additional features (package +searching and status checks) in a nice user interface. + + + +APT must be configured so that it knows where to retrieve packages from. +The helper application which assists in this task is called +apt-setup. + + + +The next step in your configuration process is to tell APT where other +Debian packages can be found. Note that you can re-run this tool at +any point after installation by running apt-setup, +or by manually editing /etc/apt/sources.list. + + + +If an official CD-ROM is in the drive at this point, then that CD-ROM +should automatically be configured as an apt source without prompting. +You will notice this because you will see the CD-ROM being scanned. + + + +For users without an official CD-ROM, you will be offered an array of +choices for how Debian packages are accessed: FTP, HTTP, CD-ROM, or +a local file system. + + + +You should know that it's perfectly acceptable to have a number of +different APT sources, even for the same Debian archive. +apt-get will automatically pick the package with +the highest version number given all the available versions. Or, for +instance, if you have both an HTTP and a CD-ROM APT source, +apt-get should automatically use the local CD-ROM +when possible, and only resort to HTTP if a newer version is available +there. However, it is not a good idea to add unnecessary APT sources, +since this will tend to slow down the process of checking the network +archives for new versions. + + + + + Configuring Network Package Sources + + + +If you plan on installing the rest of your system via the network, the +most common option is to select the http +source. The ftp source is also acceptable, but +tends to be somewhat slower making connections. + + + +The next step during the configuration of network package sources is +to tell apt-setup which country you live in. This +configures which of the official Debian Internet mirrors you will +connect to. Depending on which country you select, you will be presented +with a list of possible servers. It's generally fine to pick the one at +the top of the list, but any of them should work. Note however that the +mirror list provided by the installation was generated when this version +of Debian was released and some mirrors may no longer be available. + + + +After you have selected a mirror, you will be asked if a proxy server +should be used. A proxy server is a server that will forward all your +HTTP and/or FTP requests to the Internet and is most often used to regulate +and optimize access to the Internet on corporate networks. In some networks +only the proxy server is allowed access to the Internet, in which case you +will have to enter the name of the proxy server. You may also have to +include an user name and password. Most home users will not need to specify +a proxy server, although some ISPs may provide proxy servers for their +users. + + + +After you select a mirror, your new network package source will be tested. +If all goes well, you will be prompted whether you want to add another +package source. If you have any problems using the package source you selected, +try using a different mirror (either from your country list or from the +global list), or try using a different network package source. + + + + diff --git a/en/boot-new/modules/install.xml b/en/boot-new/modules/install.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..30f9a81d0 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/boot-new/modules/install.xml @@ -0,0 +1,39 @@ + + + + + Prompts During Software Installation + + + +Each package you selected with tasksel or +aptitude is +downloaded, unpacked and then installed in turn by the +apt-get and dpkg programs. If +a particular program needs more information from the user, it will +prompt you during this process. You might also want to keep an eye on +the output during the process, to watch for any installation errors +(although you will be asked to acknowledge errors which prevented +a package's installation). + + + + + Settings for the X Server + + + +On iMacs, and some older Macintoshes as well, the X Server software +doesn't calculate appropriate video settings. You will need to choose +the Advanced option during configuration of the +video settings. For the monitor's horizontal sync range, enter 59–63. +You can leave the default for vertical refresh range. + + + +The mouse device should be set to +/dev/input/mice. + + + + diff --git a/en/boot-new/modules/mta.xml b/en/boot-new/modules/mta.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8c9ba2f28 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/boot-new/modules/mta.xml @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ + + + + + Configuring Your Mail Transport Agent + + + +Today, email is a very important part of many people's life, so it's +no surprise Debian lets you configure your mail system right as a part +of the installation process. The standard mail transport agent in +Debian is exim4, which is relatively small, +flexible, and easy to learn. + + + +You may ask if this is needed even if your computer is not connected +to any network. The short answer is: Yes. The longer explanation: Some +system utilities (like cron, +quota, aide, …) may send +you important notices via email. + + + +So on the first screen you will be presented with several common mail +scenarios. Choose the one that most closely resembles your needs: + + + + + +internet site + + +Your system is connected to a network and your mail is sent and +received directly using SMTP. On the following screens you will be +asked a few basic questions, like your machine's mail name, or a list of +domains for which you accept or relay mail. + + + + + +mail sent by smarthost + + +In this scenario is your outgoing mail forwarded to another machine, +called a smarthost, which does the actual job for +you. Smarthost also usually stores incoming mail addressed to your +computer, so you don't need to be permanently online. That also means +you have to download your mail from the smarthost via programs like +fetchmail. This option is suitable for dial-up users. + + + + + +local delivery only + + +Your system is not on a network and mail is sent or received only +between local users. Even if you don't plan to send any messages, this +option is highly recommended, because some system utilities may send +you various alerts from time to time (e.g. beloved Disk quota +exceeded). This option is also convenient for new users, +because it doesn't ask any further questions. + + + + + +no configuration at this time + + +Choose this if you are absolutely convinced you know what you are +doing. This will leave you with an unconfigured mail system — +until you configure it, you won't be able to send or receive any mail +and you may miss some important messages from your system utilities. + + + + + + + +If none of these scenarios suits your needs, or if you need a finer +setup, you will need to edit configuration files under the +/etc/exim4 directory after the installation is +complete. More information about exim4 may be found +under /usr/share/doc/exim4. + + + diff --git a/en/boot-new/modules/packages.xml b/en/boot-new/modules/packages.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b1a4ce454 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/boot-new/modules/packages.xml @@ -0,0 +1,162 @@ + + + + + Package Installation + + + +Next you will be offered a number of pre-rolled software +configurations offered by Debian. You could always choose, package by +package, what you want to install on your new machine. This is the +purpose of the aptitude program, described below. +But this can be a long task with around &num-of-distrib-pkgs; packages +available in Debian! + + + +So, you have the ability to choose tasks first, +and then add on more individual packages later. These tasks loosely +represent a number of different jobs or things you want to do with +your computer, such as desktop environment, +web server, or print server + + + +You should know that to present this list, +base-config is merely invoking the +tasksel program. For manual package +selection, the +aptitude program is being run. Any of these can be +run at any time after installation to install (or remove) more +packages. If you are looking for a specific single package, after +installation is complete, simply run aptitude install +package, where +package is the name of the package you are +looking for. + + + +. lists the space +requirements for the available tasks. + + + +Once you've selected your tasks, select +Ok. At this point, +aptitude will install the packages you've +selected. + + + +Even if you did not select any tasks at all, any standard, +important, or required priority packages that are not yet present on +your system will be installed. This functionality is the same as +running tasksel -ris at the command line, and +currently involves +a download of about 37M of archives. You will be shown the number of +packages to be installed, and how many kilobytes of packages, if any, +need to be downloaded. + + + + + +If you do want to choose what to install on a package by package basis, +select the manual package selection option in +tasksel. If you select one or more tasks alongside +this option, aptitude will be called with the +--visual-preview option. This means you will be able to review + + + +You can also change the default selections. If you would like to select any +additional package, use View +New Package View . + + + + the packages that are to be installed. If you do not select any +tasks, the normal aptitude screen will be displayed. After +making your selections you should press g +to start the download and installation of packages. + + + +If you choose manual package selection +without selecting any tasks, no packages will be installed +by default. This means you can use this option if you want to install a minimal +system, but also that the responsibility for selecting any packages not +installed as part of the base system (before the reboot) that might be required +for your system lies with you. + + + + + +Of the &num-of-distrib-pkgs; packages available in Debian, only +a small minority are covered by tasks offered in the Task Installer. +To see information on more packages, either use apt-cache +search search-string for some +given search string (see the +apt-cache 8 + man page), or run +aptitude as described below. + + + + + Advanced Package Selection with <command>aptitude</command> + + + +Aptitude is a modern program for managing +packages. aptitude allows you to +select individual packages, set of packages matching given criteria +(for advanced users), or whole tasks. + + + +The most basic keybindings are: + + + + + + KeyAction + + + + + + Up, Down + Move selection up or down. + + &enterkey; + Open/collapse/activate item. + + + + Mark package for installation. + + - + Mark package for removal. + + d + Show package dependencies. + + g + Actually download/install/remove packages. + + q + Quit current view. + + F10 + Activate menu. + + + +For more commands see the online help under the ? key. + + + + diff --git a/en/boot-new/modules/ppp.xml b/en/boot-new/modules/ppp.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..bd805fa28 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/boot-new/modules/ppp.xml @@ -0,0 +1,142 @@ + + + + + Setting Up PPP + + + +If no network was configured during the first stage of the installation, +you will next be asked whether you wish to install the rest of the system +using PPP. PPP is a protocol used to establish dialup connections with modems. +If you configure the modem at this point, the installation system will be able +to download additional packages or security updates from the Internet during +the next steps of the installation. +If you don't have a modem in your computer or if you prefer to configure +your modem after the installation, you can skip this step. + + + +In order to configure your PPP connection, you will need some information +from your Internet Service Provider (ISP), including phone number, username, +password and DNS servers (optional). Some ISPs provide installation guidelines +for Linux distributions. You can use that information even if they don't +specifically target Debian since most of the configuration parameters +(and software) is similar amongst Linux distributions. + + + +If you do choose to configure PPP at this point, a program named +pppconfig will be run. This program helps you +configure your PPP connection. Make sure, when it asks you +for the name of your dialup connection, that you name it +provider. + + + +Hopefully, the pppconfig program will walk you +through a trouble-free PPP connection setup. However, if it does not +work for you, see below for detailed instructions. + + + +In order to setup PPP, you'll need to know the basics of file viewing +and editing in GNU/Linux. To view files, you should use +more, and zmore for compressed +files with a .gz extension. For example, to +view README.debian.gz, type zmore +README.debian.gz. The base system comes with an editor +named nano, which is very simple to use, but does +not have a lot of features. You will probably want to install more +full-featured editors and viewers later, such as +jed, nvi, +less, and emacs. + + + +Edit /etc/ppp/peers/provider and replace +/dev/modem with +/dev/ttyS# where +# stands for the number of your serial +port. In Linux, serial ports are counted from 0; your first serial +port (i.e., COM1) +is /dev/ttyS0 under Linux. + +On Macintoshes with serial ports, the +modem port is /dev/ttyS0 and the printer port is +/dev/ttyS1. + +The next step is to edit +/etc/chatscripts/provider and insert your +provider's phone number, your user-name and password. Please do not +delete the \q that precedes the password. It hides the +password from appearing in your log files. + + + +Many providers use PAP or CHAP for login sequence instead of text mode +authentication. Others use both. If your provider requires PAP or +CHAP, you'll need to follow a different procedure. Comment out +everything below the dialing string (the one that starts with +ATDT) in +/etc/chatscripts/provider, modify +/etc/ppp/peers/provider as described above, and +add user name where +name stands for your user-name for the +provider you are trying to connect to. Next, edit +/etc/ppp/pap-secrets or +/etc/ppp/chap-secrets and enter your password +there. + + + +You will also need to edit /etc/resolv.conf and +add your provider's name server (DNS) IP addresses. The lines in +/etc/resolv.conf are in the following format: +nameserver +xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx where the +xs stand for numbers in your IP +address. Optionally, you could add the +usepeerdns option to the +/etc/ppp/peers/provider file, which will enable +automatic choosing of appropriate DNS servers, using settings the +remote host usually provides. + + + +Unless your provider has a login sequence different from the majority +of ISPs, you are done! Start the PPP connection by typing +pon as root, and monitor the process using +plog command. To disconnect, use +poff, again, as root. + + + +Read /usr/share/doc/ppp/README.Debian.gz file for +more information on using PPP on Debian. + + + +For static SLIP connections, you will need to add the +slattach command (from the +net-tools package) into +/etc/init.d/network. Dynamic SLIP will require +the gnudip package. + + + + + Setting Up PPP over Ethernet (PPPOE) + + + +PPPOE is a protocol related to PPP used for some broadband connections. +There is currently no support in base configuration to help you set +this up. However, the necessary software has been installed, which means +you can configure PPPOE manually at this stage of the installation by +switching to VT2 and running pppoeconf. + + + + + diff --git a/en/boot-new/modules/shadow.xml b/en/boot-new/modules/shadow.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..cfcc4daa1 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/boot-new/modules/shadow.xml @@ -0,0 +1,69 @@ + + + + + Setting Up Users And Passwords + + + Set the Root Password + + + +The root account is also called the +super-user; it is a login that bypasses all +security protection on your system. The root account should only be +used to perform system administration, and only used for as short +a time as possible. + + + +Any password you create should contain at least 6 characters, and +should contain both upper- and lower-case characters, as well as +punctuation characters. Take extra care when setting your root +password, since it is such a powerful account. Avoid dictionary +words or use of any personal information which could be guessed. + + + +If anyone ever tells you they need your root password, be extremely +wary. You should normally never give your root password out, unless you +are administering a machine with more than one system administrator. + + + + + + Create an Ordinary User + + + +The system will ask you whether you wish to create an ordinary user +account at this point. This account should be your main personal +log-in. You should not use the root account for +daily use or as your personal login. + + + +Why not? Well, one reason to avoid using root's privileges is that it +is very easy to do irreparable damage as root. Another reason is that +you might be tricked into running a Trojan-horse +program — that is a program that takes advantage of your +super-user powers to compromise the security of your system behind +your back. Any good book on Unix system administration will cover this +topic in more detail — consider reading one if it is new to you. + + + +You will first be prompted for the user's full name. Then you'll be asked +for a name for the user account; generally your first name or something +similar will suffice and indeed will be the default. Finally, you will be +prompted for a password for this account. + + + +If at any point after installation you would like to create another +account, use the adduser command. + + + + diff --git a/en/boot-new/modules/timezone.xml b/en/boot-new/modules/timezone.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..30d9dce0a --- /dev/null +++ b/en/boot-new/modules/timezone.xml @@ -0,0 +1,30 @@ + + + + + Configuring Your Time Zone + + + +After a welcome screen, you will be prompted to configure your time zone. +First select whether the hardware clock of your system is set to local +time or Greenwich Mean Time (GMT or UTC). The time displayed in the dialog +may help you decide on the correct option. +Macintosh hardware clocks are normally +set to local time. If you want to dual-boot, select local time instead of +GMT. +Systems that (also) run Dos or Windows are normally +set to local time. If you want to dual-boot, select local time instead of +GMT. + + + +Depending on the location selected at the beginning of the installation +process, you will next be shown either a single timezone or a list of +timezones relevant for that location. If a single timezone is shown, choose +Yes to confirm or choose No +to select from the full list of timezones. If a list is shown, select your +timezone from the list, or select Other for the full list. + + + diff --git a/en/hardware/hardware-supported.xml b/en/hardware/hardware-supported.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..bd9712a3a --- /dev/null +++ b/en/hardware/hardware-supported.xml @@ -0,0 +1,341 @@ + + + + + Supported Hardware + + + +Debian does not impose hardware requirements beyond the requirements +of the Linux kernel and the GNU tool-sets. Therefore, any +architecture or platform to which the Linux kernel, libc, +gcc, etc. have been ported, and for which a Debian +port exists, can run Debian. Please refer to the Ports pages at + for +more details on &arch-title; architecture systems which have been +tested with Debian. + + + +Rather than attempting to describe all the different hardware +configurations which are supported for &arch-title;, this section +contains general information and pointers to where additional +information can be found. + + + + Supported Architectures + + + +Debian &release; supports eleven major architectures and several +variations of each architecture known as flavors. + + + + + + + + ArchitectureDebian Designation + SubarchitectureFlavor + + + + + + Intel x86-based + i386 + + vanilla + + speakup + + linux26 + + + + Motorola 680x0 + m68k + Atari + atari + + Amiga + amiga + + 68k Macintosh + mac + + VME + bvme6000 + + mvme147 + + mvme16x + + + + DEC Alpha + alpha + + + + + + Sun SPARC + sparc + + sun4cdm + + sun4u + + + + ARM and StrongARM + arm + + netwinder + + riscpc + + shark + + lart + + + + IBM/Motorola PowerPC + powerpc + CHRP + chrp + + PowerMac + pmac + + PReP + prep + + APUS + apus + + + + HP PA-RISC + hppa + PA-RISC 1.1 + 32 + + PA-RISC 2.0 + 64 + + + + Intel ia64-based + ia64 + + + + + + MIPS (big endian) + mips + SGI Indy/Indigo 2 + r4k-ip22 + + r5k-ip22 + + Broadcom BCM91250A (SWARM) + sb1-swarm-bn + + + + MIPS (little endian) + mipsel + Cobalt + cobalt + + DECstation + r4k-kn04 + + r3k-kn02 + + Broadcom BCM91250A (SWARM) + sb1-swarm-bn + + + + IBM S/390 + s390 + IPL from VM-reader and DASD + generic + + IPL from tape + tape + + + + + + +This document covers installation for the +&arch-title; architecture. If you are looking +for information on any of the other Debian-supported architectures +take a look at the +Debian-Ports pages. + + + +This is the first official release of &debian; for the &arch-title; +architecture. We feel that it has proven itself sufficiently to be +released. However, because it has not had the exposure (and hence +testing by users) that some other architectures have had, you may +encounter a few bugs. Use our +Bug Tracking System to report any +problems; make sure to mention the fact that the bug is on the +&arch-title; platform. It can be necessary to use the +debian-&architecture; mailing list +as well. + + + + + + +&supported-alpha.xml; +&supported-arm.xml; +&supported-hppa.xml; +&supported-i386.xml; +&supported-ia64.xml; +&supported-m68k.xml; +&supported-mips.xml; +&supported-mipsel.xml; +&supported-powerpc.xml; +&supported-s390.xml; +&supported-sparc.xml; + + Graphics Card + + + +You should be using a VGA-compatible display interface for the console +terminal. Nearly every modern display card is compatible with +VGA. Ancient standards such CGA, MDA, or HGA should also work, +assuming you do not require X11 support. Note that X11 is not used +during the installation process described in this document. + + + +Debian's support for graphical interfaces is determined by the +underlying support found in XFree86's X11 system. Most AGP, PCI and +PCIe video cards work under XFree86. Details on supported graphics +buses, cards, monitors, and pointing devices can be found at +. Debian &release; ships +with XFree86 version &x11ver;. + + + +The XFree86 X11 window system is only supported on the SGI Indy. The +Broadcom BCM91250A evaluation board has standard 3.3v PCI slots and supports +VGA emulation or Linux framebuffer on a selected range of graphics cards. +A compatibility listing for +the BCM91250A is available. + + + +The XFree86 X11 window system is supported on some DECstation models. The +Broadcom BCM91250A evaluation board has standard 3.3v PCI slots and supports +VGA emulation or Linux framebuffer on a selected range of graphics cards. +A compatibility listing for +the BCM91250A is available. + + + + + + Laptops + + +Laptops are also supported. Laptops are often specialized or contain +proprietary hardware. To see if your particular laptop works well +with GNU/Linux, see the +Linux Laptop pages + + + + + + +Multiple Processors + + + +Multi-processor support — also called symmetric multi-processing +or SMP — is supported for this architecture. The standard Debian +&release; kernel image was compiled with SMP support. This should not +prevent installation, since the SMP kernel should boot on non-SMP systems; +the kernel will simply cause a bit more overhead. + + + +In order to optimize the kernel for single CPU systems, you'll have to +replace the standard Debian kernel. You can find a discussion of how +to do this in . At this time +(kernel version &kernelversion;) the way you disable SMP is to deselect +&smp-config-option; in the &smp-config-section; +section of the kernel config. + + + + + + + + Multiple Processors + + +Multi-processor support — also called symmetric +multi-processing or SMP — is supported for this architecture. +However, the standard Debian &release; kernel image does not support +SMP. This should not prevent installation, since the standard, +non-SMP kernel should boot on SMP systems; the kernel will simply use +the first CPU. + + + +In order to take advantage of multiple processors, you'll have to +replace the standard Debian kernel. You can find a discussion of how +to do this in . At this time +(kernel version &kernelversion;) the way you enable SMP is to select +&smp-config-option; in the &smp-config-section; +section of the kernel config. + + + + + + Multiple Processors + + +Multi-processor support — also called symmetric +multi-processing or SMP — is supported for this architecture, +and is supported by a precompiled Debian kernel image. Depending on your +install media, this SMP-capable kernel may or may not be installed by +default. This should not prevent installation, since the standard, +non-SMP kernel should boot on SMP systems; the kernel will simply use +the first CPU. + + + +In order to take advantage of multiple processors, you should check to see +if a kernel package that supports SMP is installed, and if not, choose an +appropriate kernel package. + +You can also build your own customized kernel to support SMP. You can find +a discussion of how to do this in . At this +time (kernel version &kernelversion;) the way you enable SMP is to select +&smp-config-option; in the &smp-config-section; +section of the kernel config. + + + + diff --git a/en/hardware/hardware.xml b/en/hardware/hardware.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a953e04d5 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/hardware/hardware.xml @@ -0,0 +1,21 @@ + + + + + System Requirements + + + +This section contains information about what hardware you need to get +started with Debian. You will also find links to further information +about hardware supported by GNU and Linux. + + + +&hardware-supported.xml; +&installation-media.xml; +&supported-peripherals.xml; +&memory-disk-requirements.xml; +&network-cards.xml; + + diff --git a/en/hardware/installation-media.xml b/en/hardware/installation-media.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..4f9344ec5 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/hardware/installation-media.xml @@ -0,0 +1,311 @@ + + + + + Installation Media + + + +This section will help you determine which different media types you can use to +install Debian. For example, if you have a floppy disk drive on your machine, +it can be used to install Debian. There is a whole chapter devoted media, +, which lists the advantages and +disadvantages of each media type. You may want to refer back to this page once +you reach that section. + + + + Floppies + + +In some cases, you'll have to do your first boot from floppy disks. +Generally, all you will need is a +high-density (1440 kilobytes) 3.5 inch floppy drive. + + + +For CHRP, floppy support is currently broken. + + + + + CD-ROM/DVD-ROM + + + +Whenever you see CD-ROM in this manual, it applies to both +CD-ROMs and DVD-ROMs, because both technologies are really +the same from the operating system's point of view, except for some very +old nonstandard CD-ROM drives which are neither SCSI nor IDE/ATAPI. + + + +CD-ROM based installation is supported for some architectures. +On machines which support bootable CD-ROMs, you should be able to do a +completely +floppy-less +tape-less +installation. Even if your system doesn't +support booting from a CD-ROM, you can use the CD-ROM in conjunction +with the other techniques to install your system, once you've booted +up by other means; see . + + + +Both SCSI and IDE/ATAPI CD-ROMs are supported. In addition, all +non-standard CD interfaces supported by Linux are supported by the +boot disks (such as Mitsumi and Matsushita drives). However, these +models might require special boot parameters or other massaging to get +them to work, and booting off these non-standard interfaces is +unlikely. The Linux CD-ROM HOWTO +contains in-depth information on using CD-ROMs with Linux. + + + +USB CD-ROM drives are also supported, as are FireWire devices that +are supported by the ohci1394 and sbp2 drivers. + + + +Both SCSI and IDE/ATAPI CD-ROMs are supported on &arch-title;, as long +as the controller is supported by the SRM console. This rules out many +add-on controller cards, but most integrated IDE and SCSI chips and +controller cards that were provided by the manufacturer can be expected +to work. To find out whether your device is supported from the SRM +console, see the SRM HOWTO. + + + +IDE/ATAPI CD-ROMs are supported on all ARM machines. +On RiscPCs, SCSI CD-ROMs are also supported. + + + +On SGI machines, booting from CD-ROM requires a SCSI CD-ROM drive +capable of working with a logical blocksize of 512 bytes. Many of the +SCSI CD-DROM drives sold for the PC market do not have this +capability. If your CD-ROM drive has a jumper labeled +Unix/PC or 512/2048, place it in the +Unix or 512 position. +To start the install, simply choose the System installation +entry in the firmware. The Broadcom BCM91250A supports standard IDE devices, +including CD-ROM drives, but CD images for this platform are currently not +provided because the firmware doesn't recognize CD drives. + + + +On DECstations, booting from CD-ROM requires a SCSI CD-ROM drive +capable of working with a logical blocksize of 512 bytes. Many of the +SCSI CD-DROM drives sold for the PC market do not have this capability. +If your CD-ROM drive has a jumper labeled Unix/PC or +512/2048, place it in the Unix or +512 position. + + + +CD 1 contains the installer for the r3k-kn02 subarchitecture +(the R3000-based DECstations 5000/1xx and 5000/240 as well as +the R3000-based Personal DECstation models), CD 2 the +installer for the r4k-kn04 subarchitecture (the R4x00-based +DECstations 5000/150 and 5000/260 as well as the Personal DECstation +5000/50). + + + +To boot from CD, issue the command boot +#/rzid +on the firmware prompt, where # is the +number of the TurboChannel device from which to boot (3 on most +DECstations) and id is the SCSI ID of the +CD-ROM drive. If you need to pass additional parameters, they can +optionally be appended with the following syntax: + + + +boot +#/rzid +param1=value1 param2=value2 ... + + + + + Hard Disk + + + +Booting the installation system directly from a hard disk is another option +for many architectures. This will require some other operating system +to load the installer onto the hard disk. + + + +In fact, installation from your local disk is the preferred +installation technique for most &architecture; machines. + + + +Although the &arch-title; does not allow booting from SunOS +(Solaris), you can install from a SunOS partition (UFS slices). + + + + + USB Memory Stick + + + +Many Debian boxes need their floppy and/or CD-ROM drives only for +setting up the system and for rescue purposes. If you operate some +servers, you will probably already have thought about omitting those +drives and using an USB memory stick for installing and (when +necessary) for recovering the system. This is also useful for small +systems which have no room for unnecessary drives. + + + + + Network + + + +You can also boot your system over the network. +This is the preferred installation technique for +Mips. + + + +Diskless installation, using network booting from a local area network +and NFS-mounting of all local filesystems, is another option. + + + +After the operating system kernel is installed, you can install the +rest of your system via any sort of network connection (including +PPP after installation of the base system), via FTP or HTTP. + + + + + Un*x or GNU system + + + +If you are running another Unix-like system, you could use it to install +&debian; without using the &d-i; described in the rest of the +manual. This kind of install may be useful for users with otherwise +unsupported hardware or on hosts which can't afford downtime. If you +are interested in this technique, skip to the . + + + + + Supported Storage Systems + + + +The Debian boot disks contain a kernel which is built to maximize the +number of systems it runs on. Unfortunately, this makes for a larger +kernel, which includes many drivers that won't be used for your +machine (see to learn how to +build your own kernel). Support for the widest possible range of +devices is desirable in general, to ensure that Debian can be +installed on the widest array of hardware. + + + +Generally, the Debian installation system includes support for floppies, +IDE drives, IDE floppies, parallel port IDE devices, SCSI controllers and +drives, USB, and FireWire. The file systems supported include FAT, +Win-32 FAT extensions (VFAT), and NTFS, among others. + + + +The disk interfaces that emulate the AT hard disk interface +which are often called MFM, RLL, IDE, or ATA are supported. Very old 8 bit +hard disk controllers used in the IBM XT computer are supported only +as a module. SCSI disk controllers from many different manufacturers +are supported. See the +Linux Hardware Compatibility HOWTO +for more details. + + + +Pretty much all storage systems supported by the Linux kernel are +supported by the Debian installation system. Note that the current +Linux kernel does not support floppies on the Macintosh at all, and +the Debian installation system doesn't support floppies for Amigas. +Also supported on the Atari is the Macintosh HFS system, and AFFS as a +module. Macs support the Atari (FAT) file system. Amigas support the +FAT file system, and HFS as a module. + + + +Any storage system supported by the Linux kernel is also supported by +the boot system. The following SCSI drivers are supported in the default +kernel: + + + + +Sparc ESP + + + + +PTI Qlogic,ISP + + + + +Adaptec AIC7xxx + + + + +NCR and Symbios 53C8XX + + + + +IDE systems (such as the UltraSPARC 5) are also supported. See +Linux for SPARC Processors FAQ +for more information on SPARC hardware supported by the Linux kernel. + + + +Any storage system supported by the Linux kernel is also supported by +the boot system. This includes both SCSI and IDE disks. Note, however, +that on many systems, the SRM console is unable to boot from IDE drives, +and the Jensen is unable to boot from floppies. (see + +for more information on booting the Jensen) + + + +Any storage system supported by the Linux kernel is also supported by +the boot system. Note that the current Linux kernel does not support +floppies on CHRP systems at all. + + + +Any storage system supported by the Linux kernel is also supported by +the boot system. Note that the current Linux kernel does not support +the floppy drive. + + + +Any storage system supported by the Linux kernel is also supported by +the boot system. + + + +Any storage system supported by the Linux kernel is also supported by +the boot system. This means that FBA and ECKD DASDs are supported with +the old Linux disk layout (ldl) and the new common S/390 disk layout (cdl). + + + + + + diff --git a/en/hardware/memory-disk-requirements.xml b/en/hardware/memory-disk-requirements.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5c2428471 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/hardware/memory-disk-requirements.xml @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ + + + + + Memory and Disk Space Requirements + + + +You must have at least &minimum-memory; of memory and &minimum-fs-size; of hard disk +space. For a minimal console-based system (all standard packages), +250MB is required. If you want to install a reasonable amount of +software, including the X Window System, and some development programs +and libraries, you'll need at least 400MB. For a more or less complete +desktop system, you'll need a few gigabytes. + + + +On the Amiga the size of FastRAM is relevant towards the total memory +requirements. Also, using Zorro cards with 16-bit RAM is not +supported; you'll need 32-bit RAM. The amiboot +program can be used to disable 16-bit RAM; see the +Linux/m68k FAQ. Recent kernels should +disable 16-bit RAM automatically. + + + +On the Atari, both ST-RAM and Fast RAM (TT-RAM) are used by Linux. +Many users have reported problems running the kernel itself in Fast +RAM, so the Atari bootstrap will place the kernel in ST-RAM. The +minimum requirement for ST-RAM is 2 MB. You will need an additional +12 MB or more of TT-RAM. + + + +On the Macintosh, care should be taken on machines with RAM-based +video (RBV). The RAM segment at physical address 0 is used as screen +memory, making the default load position for the kernel unavailable. +The alternate RAM segment used for kernel and RAMdisk must be at least +4 MB. + + + +FIXME: is this still true? + + + + diff --git a/en/hardware/network-cards.xml b/en/hardware/network-cards.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..cadc760c9 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/hardware/network-cards.xml @@ -0,0 +1,214 @@ + + + + + Network Connectivity Hardware + + + + + +Most PCI and many older ISA network cards are supported. +Some network interface cards are not supported by most Debian +installation disks, such as AX.25 cards and protocols; +NI16510 EtherBlaster cards; Schneider & Koch G16 cards; +and the Zenith Z-Note built-in network card. Microchannel (MCA) network +cards are not supported by the standard installation system, but see +Linux on MCA for some (old) +instructions. +FDDI networks are also not supported by the installation disks, both +cards and protocols. + + + + + +As for ISDN, the D-channel protocol for the (old) German 1TR6 is not +supported; Spellcaster BRI ISDN boards are also not supported by the +&d-i;. + + + + + +Any network interface card (NIC) supported by the Linux kernel should +also be supported by the boot disks. You may need to load your +network driver as a module. Again, see + for complete details. + + + + + +The following network interface cards (NICs) are supported from the bootable +kernel directly: + + + + +Sun LANCE + + + + + +Sun Happy Meal + + + + + + + +The following network interface cards are supported as modules. They +can be enabled once the drivers are installed during the setup. +However, due to the magic of OpenPROM, you still should be able to +boot from these devices: + + + + +Sun BigMAC + + + + + +Sun QuadEthernet + + + + +MyriCOM Gigabit Ethernet + + + + + + +Any network interface card (NIC) supported by the Linux kernel should +also be supported by the boot disks. You may need to load your +network driver as a module. + + + +Any network interface card (NIC) supported by the Linux kernel should +also be supported by the boot disks. You may need to load your +network driver as a module. + + + +Any network interface card (NIC) supported by the Linux kernel should +also be supported by the boot disks. You may need to load your +network driver as a module. + + + +Any network interface card (NIC) supported by the Linux kernel should +also be supported by the boot disks. You may need to load your +network driver as a module. + + + +Any network interface card (NIC) supported by the Linux kernel should +also be supported by the boot disks. You may need to load your +network driver as a module. + + + +Due to kernel limitations only the onboard network interfaces on +DECstations are supported, TurboChannel option network cards currently +do not work. + + + +Any network interface card (NIC) supported by the Linux kernel are +also be supported by the boot disks. All network drivers are compiled +as modules so you need to load one first during the initial network +setup. The list of supported network devices is: + + + + +Channel to Channel (CTC) and ESCON connection (real or emulated) + + + + +OSA-2 Token Ring/Ethernet and OSA-Express Fast Ethernet (non-QDIO) + + + + +Inter-User Communication Vehicle (IUCV) — available for VM guests only + + + + +OSA-Express in QDIO mode, HiperSockets and Guest-LANs + + + + + + + + +The following network interface cards are supported directly by the +boot disks on NetWinder and CATS machines: + + + + + PCI-based NE2000 + + + + + + DECchip Tulip + + + + + + +The following network interface cards are supported directly by the +boot disks on RiscPCs: + + + + + Ether1 + + + + + Ether3 + + + + + EtherH + + + + + + +If your card is mentioned in the lists above, the complete installation +can be carried out from the network with no need for CD-ROMs or floppy +disks. + + + +Any other network interface card (NIC) supported by the Linux kernel +should also be supported by the boot disks. You may need to load your +network driver as a module; this means that you will have to install +the operating system kernel and modules using some other media. + + + + diff --git a/en/hardware/supported-peripherals.xml b/en/hardware/supported-peripherals.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2afb2ee2a --- /dev/null +++ b/en/hardware/supported-peripherals.xml @@ -0,0 +1,187 @@ + + + + + Peripherals and Other Hardware + + +Linux supports a large variety of hardware devices such as mice, +printers, scanners, PCMCIA and USB devices. However, most of these +devices are not required while installing the system. + + + +USB hardware generally works fine, only some +USB keyboards may require additional configuration +(see ). + + + +Again, see the +Linux Hardware Compatibility HOWTO +to determine whether your specific hardware is supported by Linux. + + + +Package installations from XPRAM and tape are not supported by this +system. All packages that you want to install need to be available on a +DASD or over the network using NFS, HTTP or FTP. + + + +The Broadcom BCM91250A evaluation board offers standard 3.3v 32 bit and 64 +bit PCI slots as well as USB connectors. + + + +The Broadcom BCM91250A evaluation board offers standard 3.3v 32 bit and 64 +bit PCI slots as well as USB connectors. The Cobalt RaQ has no support for +additional devices but the Qube has one PCI slot. + + + + + Purchasing Hardware Specifically for GNU/Linux + + + +There are several vendors, who ship systems with Debian or other +distributions of GNU/Linux +pre-installed. You might pay more +for the privilege, but it does buy a level of peace of mind, since you can +be sure that the hardware is well-supported by GNU/Linux. + + + +Unfortunately, it's quite rare to find any vendor shipping +new &arch-title; machines at all. + + + +If you do have to buy a machine with Windows bundled, carefully read +the software license that comes with Windows; you may be able to +reject the license and obtain a rebate from your vendor. Searching +the Internet for windows refund may get you some useful +information to help with that. + + + +Whether or not you are purchasing a system with Linux bundled, or even +a used system, it is still important to check that your hardware is +supported by the Linux kernel. Check if your hardware is listed in +the references found above. Let your salesperson (if any) know that +you're shopping for a Linux system. Support Linux-friendly hardware +vendors. + + + + Avoid Proprietary or Closed Hardware + + +Some hardware manufacturers simply won't tell us how to write drivers +for their hardware. Others won't allow us access to the documentation +without a non-disclosure agreement that would prevent us from +releasing the Linux source code. + + + +Another example is the proprietary hardware in the older +Macintosh line. In fact, no specifications or documentation have ever +been released for any Macintosh hardware, most notably the ADB +controller (used by the mouse and keyboard), the floppy controller, +and all acceleration and CLUT manipulation of the video hardware +(though we do now support CLUT manipulation on nearly all internal +video chips). In a nutshell, this explains why the Macintosh Linux +port lags behind other Linux ports. + + + +Since we haven't been granted access to the documentation on these +devices, they simply won't work under Linux. You can help by asking +the manufacturers of such hardware to release the documentation. If +enough people ask, they will realize that the free software community +is an important market. + + + + + + Windows-specific Hardware + + +A disturbing trend is the proliferation of Windows-specific modems and +printers. In some cases these are specially designed to be operated by +the Microsoft Windows operating system and bear the legend WinModem +or Made especially for Windows-based computers. This +is generally done by removing the embedded processors of the hardware +and shifting the work they do over to a Windows driver that is run by +your computer's main CPU. This strategy makes the hardware less +expensive, but the savings are often not passed on to the +user and this hardware may even be more expensive than equivalent +devices that retain their embedded intelligence. + + + +You should avoid Windows-specific hardware for two reasons. The first +is that the manufacturers do not generally make the resources +available to write a Linux driver. Generally, the hardware and +software interface to the device is proprietary, and documentation is +not available without a non-disclosure agreement, if it is available +at all. This precludes its being used for free software, since free +software writers disclose the source code of their programs. The +second reason is that when devices like these have had their embedded +processors removed, the operating system must perform the work of the +embedded processors, often at real-time priority, +and thus the CPU is not available to run your programs while it is +driving these devices. Since the typical Windows user does not +multi-process as intensively as a Linux user, the manufacturers hope +that the Windows user simply won't notice the burden this hardware +places on their CPU. However, any multi-processing operating system, +even Windows 2000 or XP, suffers from degraded performance when +peripheral manufacturers skimp on the embedded processing power of +their hardware. + + + +You can help this situation by encouraging these manufacturers to +release the documentation and other resources necessary for us to +program their hardware, but the best strategy is simply to avoid this +sort of hardware until it is listed as working in the +Linux Hardware Compatibility HOWTO. + + + + + + + Fake or <quote>Virtual</quote> Parity RAM + + +If you ask for Parity RAM in a computer store, you'll probably get +virtual parity memory modules instead of +true parity ones. Virtual parity SIMMs can often +(but not always) be distinguished because they only have one more chip +than an equivalent non-parity SIMM, and that one extra chip is smaller +than all the others. Virtual-parity SIMMs work exactly like non-parity +memory. They can't tell you when you have a single-bit RAM error the +way true-parity SIMMs do in a motherboard that implements +parity. Don't ever pay more for a virtual-parity SIMM than a +non-parity one. Do expect to pay a little more for true-parity SIMMs, +because you are actually buying one extra bit of memory for every 8 +bits. + + + +If you want complete information on &arch-title; RAM issues, and what +is the best RAM to buy, see the +PC Hardware FAQ. + + + +Most, if not all, Alpha systems require true-parity RAM. + + + + + + diff --git a/en/hardware/supported/alpha.xml b/en/hardware/supported/alpha.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3504e7f84 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/hardware/supported/alpha.xml @@ -0,0 +1,457 @@ + + + + + CPU, Main Boards, and Video Support + + +Complete information regarding supported DEC Alphas can be found at +Linux Alpha HOWTO. The +purpose of this section is to describe the systems supported +by the boot disks. + + + +Alpha machines are subdivided into different system types because there +are a number of generations of motherboard and supporting chipsets. +Different systems (sub-architectures) often have radically +different engineering and capabilities. Therefore, the process of +installing and, more to the point, booting, can vary from system to system. + + + +The following table lists the system types supported by the Debian +installation system. The table also indicates the code +name for these system types. You'll need to know this code +name when you actually begin the installation process: + + + + + + + + + + + + Hardware Type + AliasesMILO image + + + + + + ALCOR + AlphaStation 500 5/266.300 + Maverick + alcor + + AlphaStation 500 5/333...500 + Bret + alcor + + AlphaStation 600/266...300 + Alcor + alcor + + AlphaStation 600/300...433 + XLT + xlt + + + + BOOK1 + AlphaBook1 (laptop) + Alphabook1/Burns + book1 + + + + AVANTI + AlphaStation 200 4/100...166 + Mustang + avanti + + AlphaStation 200 4/233 + Mustang+ + avanti + + AlphaStation 205 4/133...333 + LX3 + avanti + + AlphaStation 250 4/300 + M3+ + avanti + + AlphaStation 255 4/133...333 + LX3+ + avanti + + AlphaStation 300 4/266 + Melmac + avanti + + AlphaStation 400 4/166 + Chinet + avanti + + AlphaStation 400 4/233...300 + Avanti + avanti + + + + EB164 + AlphaPC164 + PC164 + pc164 + + AlphaPC164-LX + LX164 + lx164 + + AlphaPC164-SX + SX164 + sx164 + + EB164 + EB164 + eb164 + + + + EB64+ + AlphaPC64 + Cabriolet + cabriolet + + AlphaPCI64 + Cabriolet + cabriolet + + EB64+ + EB64+ + eb64p + + + + EB66 + EB66 + EB66 + eb66 + + EB66+ + EB66+ + eb66p + + + + JENSEN + DEC 2000 Model 300(S) + Jensen + N/A + + DEC 2000 Model 500 + Culzen + N/A + + DECpc 150 + Jensen + N/A + + + + MIATA + Personal WorkStation 433a + Miata + miata + + Personal WorkStation 433au + Miata + miata + + Personal WorkStation 466au + Miata + miata + + Personal WorkStation 500a + Miata + miata + + Personal WorkStation 500au + Miata + miata + + Personal WorkStation 550au + Miata + miata + + Personal WorkStation 600a + Miata + miata + + Personal WorkStation 600au + Miata + miata + + + + MIKASA + AlphaServer 1000 4/200 + Mikasa + mikasa + + AlphaServer 1000 4/233..266 + Mikasa+ + mikasa + + AlphaServer 1000 5/300 + Mikasa-Pinnacle + mikasa + + AlphaServer 1000 5/300 + Mikasa-Primo + mikasa + + + + NAUTILUS + UP1000 + Nautilus + N/A + + UP1100 + Galaxy-Train/Nautilus Jr. + N/A + + + + NONAME + AXPpci33 + Noname + noname + + UDB + Multia + noname + + + + NORITAKE + AlphaServer 1000A 4/233...266 + Noritake + N/A + + AlphaServer 1000A 5/300 + Noritake-Pinnacle + N/A + + AlphaServer 1000A 5/333...500 + Noritake-Primo + N/A + + AlphaServer 800 5/333...500 + Corelle + N/A + + AlphaStation 600 A + Alcor-Primo + N/A + + Digital Server 3300 + Corelle + N/A + + Digital Server 3300R + Corelle + N/A + + + + PLATFORM 2000 + P2K + P2K + p2k + + + + RAWHIDE + AlphaServer 1200 5/xxx + Tincup/DaVinci + N/A + + AlphaServer 4000 5/xxx + Wrangler/Durango + N/A + + AlphaServer 4100 5/xxx + Dodge + N/A + + Digital Server 5300 + Tincup/DaVinci + N/A + + Digital Server 7300 + Dodge + N/A + + + + RUFFIAN + DeskStation AlphaPC164-UX + Ruffian + ruffian + + DeskStation RPL164-2 + Ruffian + ruffian + + DeskStation RPL164-4 + Ruffian + ruffian + + DeskStation RPX164-2 + Ruffian + ruffian + + DeskStation RPX164-4 + Ruffian + ruffian + + Samsung AlphaPC164-BX + Ruffian + ruffian + + + + SABLE + AlphaServer 2000 4/xxx + Demi-Sable + N/A + + AlphaServer 2000 5/xxx + Demi-Gamma-Sable + N/A + + AlphaServer 2100 4/xxx + Sable + N/A + + AlphaServer 2100 5/xxx + Gamma-Sable + N/A + + + + TAKARA + 21164 PICMG SBC + Takara + takara + + + + TITAN + AlphaServer DS15 + HyperBrick2 + N/A + + AlphaServer DS25 + Granite + N/A + + AlphaServer ES45 + Privateer + N/A + + UNKNOWN + Yukon + N/A + + + + TSUNAMI + AlphaServer DS10 + Webbrick + N/A + + AlphaServer DS10L + Slate + N/A + + AlphaServer DS20 + Catamaran/Goldrush + N/A + + AlphaServer DS20E + Goldrack + N/A + + AlphaServer DS20L + Shark + N/A + + AlphaServer ES40 + Clipper + N/A + + DP264 + DP264 + N/A + + SMARTengine 21264 PCI/ISA SBC + Eiger + N/A + + UNKNOWN + Warhol + N/A + + UNKNOWN + Windjammer + N/A + + UP2000 + Swordfish + N/A + + XP1000 + Monet/Brisbane + N/A + + XP900 + Webbrick + N/A + + + + WILDFIRE + AlphaServer GS160 + Wildfire + N/A + + AlphaServer GS320 + Wildfire + N/A + + + + XL + XL-233...266 + XL + xl + + + + + + +It is believed that Debian &releasename; supports installing on all +alpha sub-architectures with the exception of the ARC-only Ruffian and +XL sub-architectures and the Titan subarchitecture, which requires a +change to the kernel compile options. + + + diff --git a/en/hardware/supported/arm.xml b/en/hardware/supported/arm.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..dcd55b6ca --- /dev/null +++ b/en/hardware/supported/arm.xml @@ -0,0 +1,95 @@ + + + + + CPU, Main Boards, and Video Support + + + +Each distinct ARM architecture requires its own kernel. Because of +this the standard Debian distribution only supports installation on +a number of the most common systems. The Debian userland however may be used by any ARM CPU including xscale. + + + + + +Most ARM CPUs may be run in either endian mode (big or little). However, +almost every current system implementation uses little-endian mode. +Debian currently only supports little-endian ARM systems. + + + + + +The commonly supported systems are + + + +Netwinder + + +This is actually the name for the group of machines +based upon the StrongARM 110 CPU and Intel 21285 Northbridge. It +comprises of machines like: Netwinder (possibly one of the most common ARM +boxes), CATS (also known as the EB110ATX), EBSA 285 and Compaq +personal server (cps, aka skiff). + + + + + +Bast + + +This is a modern ARM 920 board with a 266MHz Samsung +processor. It has integrated IDE, USB, Serial, Parallel, audio, video, +flash and two ethernet ports. This system has a good bootloader which +is also found on the CATS and Riscstation systems. + + + + + +RiscPC + + +This machine is the oldest supported hardware: it was released +in 1994. It has RISC OS in ROM, Linux can be booted from that OS using +linloader. The RiscPC has a modular CPU card and typically has a 30MHz +610, 40MHz 710 or 233MHz Strongarm 110 CPU fitted. The mainboard has +integrated IDE, SVGA video, parallel port, single serial port, PS/2 +keyboard and proprietary mouse port. The proprietary module expansion +bus allows for up to eight expansion cards to be fitted depending on +configuration, several of these modules have Linux drivers. + + + + + +Riscstation + + +This is an inexpensive 56MHz 7500FE based machine with +integrated video, IDE, PS/2 keyboard and mouse and two serial +ports. Its lack of processing power was made up for by its price. It +may be found in two configurations one with RISC OS and one with a +simple bootloader. + + + + + +LART + + +This is a modular open hardware platform intended to be built +by enthusiasts. To be useful to install Debian it requires its KSB +expansion board. + + + + + + + diff --git a/en/hardware/supported/hppa.xml b/en/hardware/supported/hppa.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a85eb5a7f --- /dev/null +++ b/en/hardware/supported/hppa.xml @@ -0,0 +1,17 @@ + + + + + CPU, Main Boards, and Video Support + + +The are two major support &architecture; flavors: +PA-RISC 1.1 and PA-RISC 2.0. The PA-RISC 1.1 architecture is targeted +at 32-bit processors whereas the 2.0 architecture is targeted to +the 64-bit processors. Some systems are able to run either kernel. +In both cases, the userland is 32-bit. There is the possibility of +a 64-bit userland in the future. + + + + diff --git a/en/hardware/supported/i386.xml b/en/hardware/supported/i386.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c1a709bf7 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/hardware/supported/i386.xml @@ -0,0 +1,37 @@ + + + + + CPU, Main Boards, and Video Support + + +Complete information concerning supported peripherals can be found at +Linux Hardware Compatibility HOWTO. +This section merely outlines the basics. + + + + CPU + + +Nearly all x86-based processors are supported; this includes AMD and +VIA (former Cyrix) processors as well. Also the new processors like +Athlon XP and Intel P4 Xeon are supported. However, Linux will +not run on 286 or earlier processors. + + + + + I/O Bus + + +The system bus is the part of the motherboard which allows the CPU to +communicate with peripherals such as storage devices. Your computer +must use the ISA, EISA, PCI, the Microchannel Architecture (MCA, used +in IBM's PS/2 line), or VESA Local Bus (VLB, sometimes called the VL +bus). + + + + + diff --git a/en/hardware/supported/ia64.xml b/en/hardware/supported/ia64.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..53394db87 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/hardware/supported/ia64.xml @@ -0,0 +1,3 @@ + + + diff --git a/en/hardware/supported/m68k.xml b/en/hardware/supported/m68k.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..92c8030d3 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/hardware/supported/m68k.xml @@ -0,0 +1,39 @@ + + + + CPU, Main Boards, and Video Support + + +Complete information concerning supported M68000 based +(&architecture;) systems can be found at the +Linux/m68k FAQ. This section merely +outlines the basics. + + + +The &architecture; port of Linux runs on any 680x0 with a PMMU (Paged +Memory Management Unit) and a FPU (floating-point unit). This +includes the 68020 with an external 68851 PMMU, the 68030, and better, +and excludes the EC line of 680x0 processors. See the +Linux/m68k FAQ for complete details. + + + +There are four major flavors of supported +&architecture; flavors: Amiga, Atari, Macintosh +and VME machines. Amiga and Atari were the first two systems to which +Linux was ported; in keeping, they are also the two most +well-supported Debian ports. The Macintosh line is supported +incompletely, both by Debian and by the Linux kernel; see +Linux m68k for Macintosh for project +status and supported hardware. The BVM and Motorola single board +VMEbus computers are the most recent addition to the list of machines +supported by Debian. Ports to other &architecture; architectures, +such as the Sun3 architecture and NeXT black box, are underway but not +yet supported by Debian. + + + + + + diff --git a/en/hardware/supported/mips.xml b/en/hardware/supported/mips.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a087dc4d9 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/hardware/supported/mips.xml @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ + + + + + CPU, Main Boards, and Video Support + + +Debian on &arch-title; currently supports two subarchitectures: + + + + +SGI IP22: this platform includes the SGI machines Indy, Indigo 2 and +Challenge S. Since these machines are very similar, whenever this document +refers to the SGI Indy, the Indigo 2 and Challenge S are meant as well. + + + + +Broadcom BCM91250A (SWARM): this is an ATX form factor evaluation board from +Broadcom based on their SiByte processor family. + + + + +Complete information regarding supported mips/mipsel machines can be found +at the Linux-MIPS homepage. In the +following, only the systems supported by the Debian installer will be +covered. If you are looking for support for other subarchitectures, please +contact the +debian-&architecture; mailing list. + + + + CPU + + +On SGI IP22, SGI Indy, Indigo 2 and Challenge S with R4000, R4400, R4600 and R5000 +processors are supported by the Debian installation system on big endian +MIPS. The Broadcom BCM91250A evaluation board comes with an SB1250 chip with +two SB-1 cores which are supported in SMP mode by this installer. + + + +Some MIPS machines can be operated in both big and little endian mode. For +little endian MIPS, please read the documentation for the mipsel +architecture. + + + + + diff --git a/en/hardware/supported/mipsel.xml b/en/hardware/supported/mipsel.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..aa06c45ce --- /dev/null +++ b/en/hardware/supported/mipsel.xml @@ -0,0 +1,149 @@ + + + + + CPU, Main Boards, and Video Support + + +Debian on &arch-title; currently supports three subarchitectures: + + + + +DECstation: various models of the DECstation are supported. + + + + +Cobalt Microserver: only MIPS based Cobalt machines are covered here. +This included the Cobalt Qube, RaQ, Qube2 and RaQ2, and the Gateway +Microserver. + + + + +Broadcom BCM91250A (SWARM): this is an ATX form factor evaluation board from +Broadcom based on their SiByte processor family. + + + + +Complete information regarding supported mips/mipsel machines can be found +at the Linux-MIPS homepage. In the +following, only the systems supported by the Debian installer will be +covered. If you are looking for support for other subarchitectures, please +contact the +debian-&architecture; mailing list. + + + + CPU/Machine types + + + +Currently only DECstations with R3000 and R4000/R4400 CPUs are +supported by the Debian installation system on little endian MIPS. +The Debian installation system works on the following machines: + + + + + + + + System TypeCPUCode-name + Debian subarchitecture + + + + + + DECstation 5000/1xx + R3000 + 3MIN + r3k-kn02 + + DECstation 5000/150 + R4000 + 3MIN + r4k-kn04 + + DECstation 5000/200 + R3000 + 3MAX + r3k-kn02 + + DECstation 5000/240 + R3000 + 3MAX+ + r3k-kn02 + + DECstation 5000/260 + R4400 + 3MAX+ + r4k-kn04 + + Personal DECstation 5000/xx + R3000 + Maxine + r3k-kn02 + + Personal DECstation 5000/50 + R4000 + Maxine + r4k-kn04 + + + + + +All Cobalt machines are supported which have a serial console (which is +needed for the installation). + + + +The Broadcom BCM91250A evaluation board comes with an SB1250 chip with two +SB-1 cores which are supported in SMP mode by this installer. + + + + + Supported console options + + +Serial console is available on all supported DECstations (9600 bps, +8N1). For using serial console, you have to boot the installer image +with the console=ttySx kernel +parameter (with x being the number +of the serial port you have your terminal connected to — usually +2, but 0 for the Personal DECstations). +On 3MIN and 3MAX+ (DECstation 5000/1xx, 5000/240 and 5000/260) local console +is available with the PMAG-BA and the PMAGB-B graphics options. + + + +If you have a Linux system to use as serial terminal, an easy way +is to run cu + + +In Woody this command was part of the uucp package, +but in later releases it is available as a separate package. + + + on it. Example: + + +$ cu -l /dev/ttyS1 -s 9600 + + +where the option -l (line) sets the serial port to use +and -s (speed) sets the speed for the connection (9600 +bits per second). + + + +Both Cobalt and Broadcom BCM91250A use 115200 bps. + + + + diff --git a/en/hardware/supported/powerpc.xml b/en/hardware/supported/powerpc.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7b5d53aad --- /dev/null +++ b/en/hardware/supported/powerpc.xml @@ -0,0 +1,381 @@ + + + + + CPU, Main Boards, and Video Support + + +There are four major supported &architecture; +subarchitectures: PMac (Power-Macintosh), PReP, APUS (Amiga Power-UP +System), and CHRP machines. Each subarchitecture has its own boot +methods. In addition, there are four different kernel flavours, +supporting different CPU variants. + + + +Ports to other &architecture; architectures, such +as the Be-Box and MBX architecture, are underway but not yet supported +by Debian. We may have a 64-bit port in the future. + + + + Kernel Flavours + + + +There are four flavours of the powerpc kernel in Debian, based on the +CPU type: + + + +powerpc + + +Most systems use this kernel flavour, which supports the PowerPC 601, +603, 604, 740, 750, and 7400 processors. All Apple Power Macintosh +systems up to and including the G4 use one of these processors. + + + + + +power3 + + +The POWER3 processor is used in older IBM 64-bit server systems: known +models include the IntelliStation POWER Model 265, the pSeries 610 and +640, and the RS/6000 7044-170, 7043-260, and 7044-270. + + + + + +power4 + + +The POWER4 processor is used in more recent IBM 64-bit server systems: +known models include the pSeries 615, 630, 650, 655, 670, and 690. + + + +The Apple G5 is also based on the POWER4 architecture, and uses this +kernel flavour. + + + + + +apus + + +This kernel flavour supports the Amiga Power-UP System. + + + + + + + + + + Power Macintosh (pmac) subarchitecture + + + +Apple (and briefly a few other manufacturers — Power Computing, for +example) makes a series of Macintosh computers based on the PowerPC +processor. For purposes of architecture support, they are categorized +as NuBus, OldWorld PCI, and NewWorld. + + + +Macintosh computers using the 680x0 series of processors are not in +the PowerPC family but are instead m68k machines. Those models start +with Mac II or have a 3-digit model number such as Centris 650 +or Quadra 950. Apple's pre-iMac PowerPC model numbers have four digits. + + + +NuBus systems are not currently supported by debian/powerpc. The +monolithic Linux/PPC kernel architecture does not have support for +these machines; instead, one must use the MkLinux Mach microkernel, +which Debian does not yet support. These include the following: + + + + +Power Macintosh 6100, 7100, 8100 + + + + +Performa 5200, 6200, 6300 + + + + +Powerbook 1400, 2300, and 5300 + + + + +Workgroup Server 6150, 8150, 9150 + + + + +A linux kernel for these machines and limited support is available at + + + + +OldWorld systems are most Power Macintoshes with a floppy drive and a +PCI bus. Most 603, 603e, 604, and 604e based Power Macintoshes are +OldWorld machines. The beige colored G3 systems are also OldWorld. + + + +The so called NewWorld PowerMacs are any PowerMacs in translucent +colored plastic cases. That includes all iMacs, iBooks, G4 systems, +blue colored G3 systems, and most PowerBooks manufactured in and after +1999. The NewWorld PowerMacs are also known for using the ROM in +RAM system for MacOS, and were manufactured from mid-1998 onwards. + + + +Specifications for Apple hardware are available at +AppleSpec, +and, for older hardware, +AppleSpec Legacy. + + + + + + + + + + + Model Name/Number + Generation + + + + + + Apple + iMac Bondi Blue, 5 Flavors, Slot Loading + NewWorld + + iMac Summer 2000, Early 2001 + NewWorld + + iMac G5 + NewWorld + + iBook, iBook SE, iBook Dual USB + NewWorld + + iBook2 + NewWorld + + iBook G4 + NewWorld + + Power Macintosh Blue and White (B&W) G3 + NewWorld + + Power Macintosh G4 PCI, AGP, Cube + NewWorld + + Power Macintosh G4 Gigabit Ethernet + NewWorld + + Power Macintosh G4 Digital Audio, Quicksilver + NewWorld + + Power Macintosh G5 + NewWorld + + PowerBook G3 FireWire Pismo (2000) + NewWorld + + PowerBook G3 Lombard (1999) + NewWorld + + PowerBook G4 Titanium + NewWorld + + PowerBook G4 Aluminum + NewWorld + + Xserve G5 + NewWorld + + Performa 4400, 54xx, 5500 + OldWorld + + Performa 6360, 6400, 6500 + OldWorld + + Power Macintosh 4400, 5400 + OldWorld + + Power Macintosh 7200, 7300, 7500, 7600 + OldWorld + + Power Macintosh 8200, 8500, 8600 + OldWorld + + Power Macintosh 9500, 9600 + OldWorld + + Power Macintosh (Beige) G3 Minitower + OldWorld + + Power Macintosh (Beige) Desktop, All-in-One + OldWorld + + PowerBook 2400, 3400, 3500 + OldWorld + + PowerBook G3 Wallstreet (1998) + OldWorld + + Twentieth Anniversary Macintosh + OldWorld + + Workgroup Server 7250, 7350, 8550, 9650, G3 + OldWorld + + + + Power Computing + PowerBase, PowerTower / Pro, PowerWave + OldWorld + + PowerCenter / Pro, PowerCurve + OldWorld + + + + UMAX + C500, C600, J700, S900 + OldWorld + + + + APS + APS Tech M*Power 604e/2000 + OldWorld + + + + Motorola + Starmax 3000, 4000, 5000, 5500 + OldWorld + + + + + + + + PReP subarchitecture + + + + + + + + + + Model Name/Number + + + + + + Motorola + Firepower, PowerStack Series E, PowerStack II + + MPC 7xx, 8xx + + MTX, MTX+ + + MVME2300(SC)/24xx/26xx/27xx/36xx/46xx + + MCP(N)750 + + + + IBM RS/6000 + 40P, 43P + + Power 830/850/860 (6070, 6050) + + 6030, 7025, 7043 + + p640 + + + + + + + + CHRP subarchitecture + + + + + + + + + + Model Name/Number + + + + + + IBM RS/6000 + B50, 43P-150, 44P + + + Genesi + Pegasos I, Pegasos II + + + + + + + + APUS subarchitecture + + + + + + + + + + Model Name/Number + + + + + + Amiga Power-UP Systems (APUS) + A1200, A3000, A4000 + + + + + + diff --git a/en/hardware/supported/s390.xml b/en/hardware/supported/s390.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8f85977a6 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/hardware/supported/s390.xml @@ -0,0 +1,21 @@ + + + + + S/390 and zSeries machine types + + +Complete information regarding supported S/390 and zSeries machines can +be found in IBM's Redbook + +Linux for IBM eServer zSeries and S/390: Distributions in +chapter 2.1 or at the +technical details web page at +developerWorks. +In short, G5, Multiprise 3000, G6 and all zSeries are fully supported; +Multiprise 2000, G3 and G4 machines are supported with IEEE floating +point emulation and thus degraded performance. + + + + diff --git a/en/hardware/supported/sparc.xml b/en/hardware/supported/sparc.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0086365f2 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/hardware/supported/sparc.xml @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + CPU, Main Boards, and Video Support + + +Currently the &architecture; port supports +several types of Sparc systems. The most common identifiers for Sparc +systems are sun4, sun4c, sun4m, sun4d and sun4u. Currently we do not +support very old sun4 hardware. However, the other systems are +supported. Sun4d has been tested the least of these, so expect +possible problems with regard to the kernel stability. Sun4c and +Sun4m, the most common of the older Sparc hardware, includes such +systems as SparcStation 1, 1+, IPC, IPX and the SparcStation LX, 5, +10, and 20, respectively. The UltraSPARC class systems fall under the +sun4u identifier, and are supported using the sun4u set of install +images. Some systems that fall under these supported identifiers are +known to not be supported. Known unsupported systems are the AP1000 +multicomputer and the Tadpole Sparcbook 1. See the +Linux for SPARCProcessors FAQ +for complete information. + + + + Memory Configuration + + +Some older Sun workstations, notably the Sun IPX and Sun IPC have +memory banks located at fixed locations in physical memory. Thus if +the banks are not filled gaps will exist in the physical memory space. +The Linux installation requires a contiguous memory block into which +to load the kernel and the initial RAMdisk. If this is not available a +Data Access Exception will result. + + + +Thus you must configure the memory so that the lowest memory block is +contiguous for at least 8Mb. In the IPX and IPC cited above, memory banks +are mapped in at 16Mb boundaries. In effect this means that you must have +a sufficiently large SIMM in bank zero to hold the kernel and RAMdisk. +In this case 4Mb is not sufficient. + + + +Example: +In a Sun IPX you have a 16Mb SIMM and a 4Mb SIMM. There are four +SIMM banks (0,1,2,3). [Bank zero is that furthest away from the SBUS +connectors]. You must therefore install the 16Mb SIMM in bank 0; it is +then recommended to install the 4Mb SIMM in bank 2. + + + + + Graphics Configuration + + +Especially in the case of older Sun workstations, it is very common +for there to be an onboard framebuffer which has been superseded (for +example the bwtwo on a sun IPC), and an SBUS card containing a later +probably accelerated buffer is then plugged in to an SBUS slot. +Under Solaris/SunOS this causes no problems because both cards are +initialized. + + + +However with Linux this can cause a problem, in that the boot PROM +monitor may display its output on this additional card; however the +linux kernel boot messages may then be directed to the original on +board framebuffer, leaving no error messages on +the screen, with the machine apparently stuck loading the RAMdisk. + + + +To avoid this problem, connect the monitor (if required) to the video +card in the lowest numbered SBUS slot (on motherboard card counts +as below external slots). Alternatively it is possible to use a serial +console. + + + + diff --git a/en/howto/installation-howto.xml b/en/howto/installation-howto.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9513858ac --- /dev/null +++ b/en/howto/installation-howto.xml @@ -0,0 +1,350 @@ + + + + +Installation Howto + + + +This document describes how to install &debian; &releasename; for +the &arch-title; (&architecture;) with the +new &d-i;. It is a quick walkthrough of the installation process +which should contain all the information you will need for most installs. +When more information can be useful, we will link to more detailed +explanations in the &debian; +Installation Guide. + + + + + Preliminaries + + + +The debian-installer is still in a beta state. + +If you encounter bugs during your install, please refer to + for instructions +on how to report them. If you have questions which cannot be +answered by this document, please direct them to the debian-boot +mailing list (&email-debian-boot-list;) or ask on IRC (#debian-boot +on the freenode network). + + + + + + Booting the installer + + + +For some quick links to CD images, check out the +&d-i; home page. + +The debian-cd team provides builds of CD images using &d-i; on the +Debian CD page. +For more information on where to get CDs, see . + + + +Some installation methods require other images than CD images. + +The &d-i; home page has links to +other images. + + explains how to find images on Debian +mirrors. + + + +The subsections below will give the details about which images you should +get for each possible means of installation. + + + + + CDROM + + + +There are two different netinst CD images which can be used to install +&releasename; with the &d-i;. These images are intended to boot from CD +and install additional packages over a network, hence the name 'netinst'. +The difference between the two images is that on the full netinst image +the base packages are included, whereas you have to download these from +the web if you are using the business card image. If you'd rather, you can +get a full size CD image which will not need the network to install. You +only need the first CD of the set. + + + +Download whichever type you prefer and burn it to a CD. +To boot the CD, you may need to change your BIOS +configuration, as explained in . + +To boot a PowerMac from CD, press the c key while booting. See + for other ways to boot from CD. + + + + + + + Floppy + + +If you can't boot from CD, you can download floppy images to install +Debian. You need the floppy/boot.img, the +floppy/root.img and possibly one of the driver disks. + + + +The boot floppy is the one with boot.img on it. +This floppy, when booted, will prompt you to insert a second floppy — +use the one with root.img on it. + + + +If you're planning to install over the network, you will usually need +the floppy/net-drivers.img, which contains additional +drivers for many ethernet cards, and support for PCMCIA. + + + +If you have a CD, but cannot boot from it, then boot from floppies and use +floppy/cd-drivers.img on a driver disk to complete the +install using the CD. + + + +Floppy disks are one of the least reliable media around, so be prepared for +lots of bad disks (see ). Each +.img file you downloaded goes on a single floppy; +you can use the dd command to write it to /dev/fd0 or some other means +(see for details). +Since you'll have more than one floppy, it's a good idea to label them. + + + + + + USB memory stick + + +It's also possible to install from removable USB storage devices. For +example a USB keychain can make a handy Debian install medium that you +can take with you anywhere. + + + +The easiest way to prepare your USB memory stick is to download +hd-media/boot.img.gz, and use gunzip to extract the 128 MB +image from that file. Write this image directly to your memory stick, which +must be at least 128 mb in size. Of course this will destroy anything already +on the memory stick. Then mount the memory stick, which will now have a FAT +filesystem on it. Next, download a Debian netinst CD image, and copy that file +to the memory stick; any filename is ok as long as it ends in +.iso. + + + +There are other, more flexible ways to set up a memory stick to use the +debian-installer, and it's possible to get it to work with smaller memory +sticks. For details, see . + + + +Some BIOSes can boot USB storage directly, and some cannot. You may need to +configure your BIOS to boot from a removable drive or even a +USB-ZIP to get it to boot from the USB device. If it +doesn't, you can boot from one floppy and use the USB stick for the rest of +the install. For helpful hints and details, see . + + + +Booting Macintosh systems from USB storage devices involves manual use +of Open Firmware. For directions, see . + + + + + + Booting from network + + +It's also possible to boot &d-i; completely from the net. The +various methods to netboot depend on your architecture and netboot setup. +The files in netboot/ can be used to netboot &d-i;. + + + +The easiest thing to set up is probably PXE netbooting. Untar the +file netboot/pxeboot.tar.gz into +/var/lib/tftpboot or +wherever is appropriate for your tftp server. Set up your DHCP server to pass +filename /pxelinux.0 to clients, and with luck +everything will just work. +For detailed instructions, see . + + + + + + Booting from hard disk + + +It's possible to boot the installer using no removable media, but just an +existing hard disk, which can have a different OS on it. Download +hd-media/initrd.gz, hd-media/vmlinuz, +and a Debian CD image to the top-level directory of the hard disk. Make sure +that the CD image has a filename ending in .iso. Now +it's just a matter of booting linux with the initrd. + + explains one way to do it. + + + + + + + +Installation + + +Once the installer starts, you will be greeted with an initial screen. Press +&enterkey; to boot, or read the instructions for other boot +methods and parameters (see ). + + +If you want a 2.6 kernel, type linux26 at the +boot: prompt. + + +If you want a 2.4 kernel, type install24 at the +boot: prompt. + + + + +The 2.6 kernel is available for most boot methods, but not when booting from +a floppy. + + +The 2.6 kernel is the default for most boot methods, but is not available +when booting from a floppy. + + + + + + + +After a while you will be asked to select your language. Use the arrow keys +to pick a language and press &enterkey; to continue. Next you'll be asked to +select your country, with the choices including countries where your +language is spoken. If it's not on the short list, a list of all the +countries in the world is available. + + + +You may be asked to confirm your keyboard layout. Choose the default unless +you know better. + + + +Now sit back while debian-installer detects some of your hardware, and +loads the rest of itself from CD, floppy, USB, etc. + + + +Next the installer will try to detect your network hardware and set up +networking by DHCP. If you are not on a network or do not have DHCP, you +will be given the opportunity to configure the network manually. + + + +Now it is time to partition your disks. First you will be given the +opportunity to automatically partition either an entire drive, or free +space on a drive. This is recommended for new users or anyone in a hurry, +but if you do not want to autopartition, choose manual from the menu. + + + +If you have an existing DOS or Windows partition that you want to preserve, +be very careful with automatic partitioning. If you choose manual partitioning, +you can use the installer to resize existing FAT or NTFS partitions to create +room for the Debian install: simply select the partition and specify its new size. + + + +On the next screen you will see your partition table, how the partitions +will be formatted, and where they will be mounted. Select a partition to +modify or delete it. If you did automatic partitioning, you should just be +able to choose Finished partitioning from the +menu to use what it set up. Remember to assign at least one partition for +swap space and to mount a partition on /. + has more information about partitioning. + + + +Now &d-i; formats your partitions and starts to install the base system, +which can take a while. That is followed by installing a kernel. + + + +The last step is to install a boot loader. If the installer detects +other operating systems on your computer, it will add them to the boot menu +and let you know. +By default GRUB will be installed to the master boot +record of the first harddrive, which is generally a good choice. You'll be +given the opportunity to override that choice and install it elsewhere. + + + + +&d-i; will now tell you that the installation has +finished. Remove the cdrom or other boot media and hit &enterkey; +to reboot your machine. It should boot up into the next stage of the install +process, which is explained in . + + + +If you need more information on the install process, see +. + + + + + + Send us an installation report + + +If you successfully managed an installation with &d-i;, +please take time to provide us with a report. There is a template +named install-report.template in the +/root directory of a freshly +installed system. Please fill it out and file it as a bug against the +package installation-reports, as explained in +. + + + +If you did not reach base-config or ran into other trouble, you +probably found a bug in debian-installer. To improve the installer it +is necessary that we know about them, so please take the time to +report them. You can use an installation report to report problems; +if the install completely fails, see . + + + + + + And finally.. + + +We hope that your Debian installation is pleasant and that you find Debian +useful. You might want to read . + + + + diff --git a/en/install-methods/automatic-install.xml b/en/install-methods/automatic-install.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..4000f2aea --- /dev/null +++ b/en/install-methods/automatic-install.xml @@ -0,0 +1,111 @@ + + + + + Automatic Installation + + +For installing on multiple computers it's possible to do fully +automatic installations. Debian packages intended for this include +fai (which uses an install server), +replicator, +systemimager, +autoinstall, and +the Debian Installer itself. + + + + + Automatic Installation Using the Debian Installer + + +The Debian Installer supports automating installs via preconfiguration +files. A preconfiguration file can be loaded from the network or from +removable media, and used to fill in answers to question asked during the +installation process. + + + +Although most dialogs used by &d-i; can be preseeded using this method, +there are some notable exceptions. You can (re)partition an entire disk +or use available free space on a disk; it is not possible to use existing +partitions. You currently cannot use preseeding to set up RAID and LVM. +Also, with the exception of network driver modules, +it is not possible to preconfigure kernel module parameters. + + + +The preconfiguration file is in the format used by the +debconf-set-selections command. A well documented and working example that +you can edit is in . + + + +Alternatively, one way to get a complete file listing +all the values that can be preseeded is to do a manual install, +and then use debconf-get-selections, +from the debconf-utils package, +to dump both the debconf database and the cdebconf +database in /var/log/debian-installer/cdebconf to a single file: + + +$ debconf-get-selections --installer > file +$ debconf-get-selections >> file + + +However, a file generated in this manner will have some items that should +not be preseeded, and the file in is a +better starting place for most users. + + + +Once you have a preconfiguration file, you can edit it if necessary, and +place it on a web server, or copy it onto the installer's boot media. Wherever +you place the file, you need to pass a parameter to the installer at boot +time to tell it to use the file. + + + +To make the installer use a preconfiguration file downloaded from the +network, add preseed/url=http://url/to/preseed.cfg to the kernel boot +parameters. Of course the preconfiguration will not take effect until the +installer manages to set up the network to download the file, so this is +most useful if the installer can set up the network via DHCP without asking +any questions. You may want to set the installation priority to critical to +avoid any questions while the network is being configured. See +. + + + +To place a preconfiguration file on a CD, you would need to remaster the +ISO image to include your preconfiguration file. See the manual page for +mkisofs for details. Alternatively, put the preseed file on a floppy, and +use preseed/file=/floppy/preseed.cfg + + + +If you'll be booting from a USB memory stick, then you can simply copy your +preconfiguration file onto the memory stick's filesystem, and edit the +syslinux.cfg file to add preseed/file=/hd-media/preseed.cfg to the kernel boot +parameters. + + + + + Using Preseeding to Change Default Values + + +It is also possible to use preseeding to change the default answer for a +question, but still have the question asked. To do this the +seen flag must be reset to false after +setting the value for a template. + + +d-i foo/bar string value +d-i foo/bar seen false + + + + + + diff --git a/en/install-methods/boot-drive-files.xml b/en/install-methods/boot-drive-files.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..acde0cb56 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/install-methods/boot-drive-files.xml @@ -0,0 +1,176 @@ + + + + + Preparing Files for Hard Disk Booting + + +The installer may be booted using boot files placed on an +existing hard drive partition, either launched from another operating +system or by invoking a boot loader directly from the BIOS. + + + +A full, pure network installation can be achieved using this +technique. This avoids all hassles of removable media, like finding +and burning CD images or struggling with too numerous and +unreliable floppy disks. + + + +The installer cannot boot from files on an NTFS file system. + + + +The installer cannot boot from files on an HFS+ file system. MacOS +System 8.1 and above may use HFS+ file systems; NewWorld PowerMacs all +use HFS+. To determine whether your existing file system is HFS+, +select Get Info for the volume in question. HFS +file systems appear as Mac OS Standard, while +HFS+ file systems say Mac OS Extended. You must +have an HFS partition in order to exchange files between MacOS and +Linux, in particular the installation files you download. + + + +Different programs are used for hard disk installation system booting, +depending on whether the system is a NewWorld or an +OldWorld model. + + + + + Hard disk installer booting using <command>LILO</command> or + <command>GRUB</command> + + +This section explains how to add to or even replace an existing linux +installation using either LILO or +GRUB. + + + +At boot time, both bootloaders support loading in memory not +only the kernel, but also a disk image. This RAM disk can be used as +the root file-system by the kernel. + + + +Copy the following files from the Debian archives to a +convenient location on your hard drive, for instance to +/boot/newinstall/. + + + + +vmlinuz (kernel binary) + + + + +initrd.gz (ramdisk image) + + + + + + +Finally, to configure the bootloader proceed to +. + + + + + + + Hard Disk Installer Booting for OldWorld Macs + + +The boot-floppy-hfs floppy uses +miBoot to launch Linux installation, but +miBoot cannot easily be used for hard disk +booting. BootX, launched from MacOS, +supports booting from files placed on the hard +disk. BootX can also be used to dual-boot +MacOS and Linux after your Debian installation is complete. For the +Performa 6360, it appears that quik cannot make the +hard disk bootable. So BootX is required +on that model. + + + +Download and unstuff the BootX +distribution, available from , +or in the +dists/woody/main/disks-powerpc/current/powermac +directory on Debian http/ftp mirrors and official Debian CDs. Use +Stuffit Expander to extract it from its +archive. Within the package, there is an empty folder called +Linux Kernels. Download +linux.bin and +ramdisk.image.gz from the +disks-powerpc/current/powermac folder, and place +them in the Linux Kernels folder. Then place the +Linux Kernels folder in the active System Folder. + + + + + + Hard Disk Installer Booting for NewWorld Macs + + +NewWorld PowerMacs support booting from a network or an ISO9660 +CD-ROM, as well as loading ELF binaries directly from the hard +disk. These machines will boot Linux directly via +yaboot, which supports loading a kernel and RAMdisk +directly from an ext2 partition, as well as dual-booting with +MacOS. Hard disk booting of the installer is particularly appropriate +for newer machines without floppy drives. BootX is +not supported and must not be used on NewWorld PowerMacs. + + + +Copy (not move) the following four files which +you downloaded earlier from the Debian archives, onto the root level +of your hard drive (this can be accomplished by +option-dragging each file to the hard drive icon). + + + + +vmlinux + + + + +initrd.gz + + + + +yaboot + + + + +yaboot.conf + + + + + + +Make a note of the partition number of the MacOS partition where you +place these files. If you have the MacOS pdisk +program, you can use the L command to check for the partition +number. You will need this partition number for the command you type +at the Open Firmware prompt when you boot the installer. + + + +To boot the installer, proceed to . + + + + diff --git a/en/install-methods/boot-usb-files.xml b/en/install-methods/boot-usb-files.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e80e0f6e0 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/install-methods/boot-usb-files.xml @@ -0,0 +1,125 @@ + + + + + Preparing Files for USB Memory Stick Booting + + + +For preparing the USB stick you will need a system where GNU/Linux is +already running and where USB is supported. You should ensure that the +usb-storage kernel module is loaded (modprobe +usb-storage) and try to find out which SCSI device the USB +stick has been mapped to (in this example +/dev/sda is used). To write to your stick, you +will probably have to turn off its write protection switch. + + + +Note, that the USB stick should be at least 128 MB in size (smaller +setups are possible if you follow ). + + + + + Copying the files — the easy way + + +There is an all-in-one file hd-media/boot.img.gz +which contains all the installer files (including the kernel) as well +as SYSLINUX and its configuration file. You only +have to extract it directly to your USB stick: + + +# zcat boot.img.gz > /dev/sda + + +Of course this will destroy anything already on the device, so take +care that you use the correct device name for your USB stick. + + + +There is an all-in-one file hd-media/boot.img.gz +which contains all the installer files (including the kernel) as well +as yaboot and its configuration file. Create a +partition of type "Apple_Bootstrap" on your USB stick using +mac-fdisk's C command and +extract the image directly to that: + + +# zcat boot.img.gz > /dev/sda2 + + +Of course this will destroy anything already on the device, so take +care that you use the correct device name for your USB stick. + + + +After that, mount the USB memory stick (mount +/dev/sda +/dev/sda2 +/mnt), which will now have +a FAT filesystem +an HFS filesystem +on it, and copy a Debian netinst or businesscard ISO image to it. +Please note that the file name must end in .iso. +Unmount the stick (umount /mnt) and you are done. + + + + + + Copying the files — the flexible way + + +If you like more flexibility or just want to know what's going on, you +should use the following method to put the files on your stick. + + + +&usb-setup-i386.xml; +&usb-setup-powerpc.xml; + + + Adding an ISO image + + +Now you should put any Debian ISO image (businesscard, netinst or even +a full one) onto your stick (if it fits). The file name of such an +image must end in .iso. + + + +If you want to install over the network, without using an ISO image, +you will of course skip the previous step. Moreover you will have to +use the initial ramdisk from the netboot +directory instead of the one from hd-media, +because hd-media/initrd.gz does not have network +support. + + + +When you are done, unmount the USB memory stick (umount +/mnt) and activate its write protection switch. + + + + + + + Booting the USB stick + + +If your system refuses to boot from the memory stick, the stick may +contain an invalid master boot record (MBR). To fix this, use the +install-mbr command from the package +mbr: + + +# install-mbr /dev/sda + + + + + + diff --git a/en/install-methods/create-floppy.xml b/en/install-methods/create-floppy.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..433c91697 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/install-methods/create-floppy.xml @@ -0,0 +1,108 @@ + + + + + Creating Floppies from Disk Images + + +Bootable floppy disks are generally used as a last resort to boot the +installer on hardware that cannot boot from CD or by other means. + + + +Floppy disk booting reportedly fails on Mac USB floppy drives. + + + +Floppy disk booting is not supported on Amigas or +68k Macs. + + + +Disk images are files containing the complete contents of a floppy +disk in raw form. Disk images, such as +boot.img, cannot simply be copied to floppy +drives. A special program is used to write the image files to floppy +disk in raw mode. This is required because these +images are raw representations of the disk; it is required to do a +sector copy of the data from the file onto the +floppy. + + + +There are different techniques for creating floppies from disk images, +which depend on your platform. This section describes how to create +floppies from disk images on different platforms. + + + +No matter which method you use to create your floppies, you should +remember to flip the write-protect tab on the floppies once you have +written them, to ensure they are not damaged unintentionally. + + + + Writing Disk Images From a Linux or Unix System + + +To write the floppy disk image files to the floppy disks, you will +probably need root access to the system. Place a good, blank floppy +in the floppy drive. Next, use the command + + +$ dd if=filename of=/dev/fd0 bs=1024 conv=sync ; sync + + +where filename is one of the floppy disk image +files (see for what +filename should be). +/dev/fd0 is a commonly used name of the floppy +disk device, it may be different on your workstation +(on Solaris, it is +/dev/fd/0). +The command may return to the +prompt before Unix has finished writing the floppy disk, so look for +the disk-in-use light on the floppy drive and be sure that the light +is out and the disk has stopped revolving before you remove it from +the drive. On some systems, you'll have to run a command to eject the +floppy from the drive +(on Solaris, use eject, see +the manual page). + + + +Some systems attempt to automatically mount a floppy disk when you +place it in the drive. You might have to disable this feature before +the workstation will allow you to write a floppy in raw +mode. Unfortunately, how to accomplish this will vary +based on your operating system. + +On Solaris, you can work around +volume management to get raw access to the floppy. First, make sure +that the floppy is auto-mounted (using volcheck or +the equivalent command in the file manager). Then use a +dd command of the form given above, just replace +/dev/fd0 with +/vol/rdsk/floppy_name, +where floppy_name is the name the floppy +disk was given when it was formatted (unnamed floppies default to the +name unnamed_floppy). On other systems, ask your +system administrator. + + + + +If writing a floppy on powerpc Linux, you will need to eject it. The +eject program handles this nicely; you might need +to install it. + + + + + +&floppy-i386.xml; +&floppy-m68k.xml; +&floppy-powerpc.xml; + + + diff --git a/en/install-methods/download/alpha.xml b/en/install-methods/download/alpha.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..280187987 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/install-methods/download/alpha.xml @@ -0,0 +1,36 @@ + + + + + Alpha Installation Files + + +If you choose to boot from ARC console firmware using +MILO, you will also need to prepare a disk +containing MILO and LINLOAD.EXE +from the provided disk images. See +for more information on Alpha +firmware and boot loaders. The floppy images can be found in the +MILO directory as +milo_subarchitecture.bin. + + + +Unfortunately, these MILO images could not be +tested and might not work for all subarchitectures. If you find it +doesn't work for you, try copying the appropriate +MILO binary onto the floppy +(). +Note that those MILOs don't support ext2 sparse +superblocks, so you can't use them to load kernels from newly +generated ext2 file systems. As a workaround, you can put your kernel +onto the FAT partition next to the MILO. + + + +MILO binaries are platform-specific. See + to determine the appropriate +MILO image for your Alpha platform. + + + diff --git a/en/install-methods/download/arm.xml b/en/install-methods/download/arm.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..69619a91d --- /dev/null +++ b/en/install-methods/download/arm.xml @@ -0,0 +1,37 @@ + + + + + + RiscPC Installation Files + + +The RiscPC installer is booted initially from RISC OS. All the +necessary files are provided in one Zip archive, &rpc-install-kit;. +Download this file onto the RISC OS machine, copy the +linloader.!Boot components into place, and run +!dInstall. + + + + + + NetWinder Installation Files + + +The easiest way to boot a NetWinder is over the network, using the +supplied TFTP image &netwinder-boot-img;. + + + + + + CATS Installation Files + + +The only supported boot method for CATS is to use the combined image +&cats-boot-img;. This can be loaded from any device accessible to the +Cyclone bootloader. + + + diff --git a/en/install-methods/download/m68k.xml b/en/install-methods/download/m68k.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a89b62076 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/install-methods/download/m68k.xml @@ -0,0 +1,23 @@ + + + + + + Choosing a Kernel + + + +Some m68k subarchs have a choice of kernels to install. In general we +recommend trying the most recent version first. If your subarch or +machine needs to use a 2.2.x kernel, make sure you choose one of the +images that supports 2.2.x kernels (see the MANIFEST). + + + + +All of the m68k images for use with 2.2.x kernels, require the kernel +parameter &ramdisksize;. + + + diff --git a/en/install-methods/download/powerpc.xml b/en/install-methods/download/powerpc.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3e4f4e486 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/install-methods/download/powerpc.xml @@ -0,0 +1,28 @@ + + + + diff --git a/en/install-methods/downloading-files.xml b/en/install-methods/downloading-files.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..295697a37 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/install-methods/downloading-files.xml @@ -0,0 +1,37 @@ + + + + + Downloading Files from Debian Mirrors + + + +To find the nearest (and thus probably the fastest) mirror, see the +list of Debian mirrors. + + + +When downloading files from a Debian mirror, be sure to download the +files in binary mode, not text or automatic +mode. + + + + + Where to Find Installation Images + + +The installation images are located on each Debian mirror in the directory +debian/dists/&releasename;/main/installer-&architecture;/current/images/ +— the MANIFEST +lists each image and its purpose. + + +&download-alpha.xml; +&download-arm.xml; +&download-powerpc.xml; +&download-m68k.xml; + + + + diff --git a/en/install-methods/floppy/i386.xml b/en/install-methods/floppy/i386.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..fa2f1cd81 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/install-methods/floppy/i386.xml @@ -0,0 +1,35 @@ + + + + + + + + Writing Disk Images From DOS, Windows, or OS/2 + + + +If you have access to an i386 machine, you can use one of the +following programs to copy images to floppies. + + + +The rawrite1 and rawrite2 programs +can be used under MS-DOS. To use these programs, first make sure that you +are booted into DOS. Trying to use these programs from within a DOS box in +Windows, or double-clicking on these programs from the Windows Explorer is +not expected to work. + + + +The rwwrtwin program runs on Windows 95, NT, 98, 2000, +ME, XP and probably later versions. To use it you will need to unpack +diskio.dll in the same directory. + + + +These tools can be found on the Official Debian CD-ROMs under the +/tools directory. + + + diff --git a/en/install-methods/floppy/m68k.xml b/en/install-methods/floppy/m68k.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..4b9f42e14 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/install-methods/floppy/m68k.xml @@ -0,0 +1,29 @@ + + + + + Writing Disk Images on Atari Systems + + +You'll find the &rawwrite.ttp; program in the same directory as the +floppy disk images. Start the program by double clicking on the +program icon, and type in the name of the floppy image file you want +written to the floppy at the TOS program command line dialog box. + + + + + + Writing Disk Images on Macintosh Systems + + +There is no MacOS application to write images to floppy disks +(and there would be no point in doing this as you can't use these +floppies to boot the installation system or install kernel and modules +from on Macintosh). However, these files are needed for the +installation of the operating system and modules, later in the +process. + + + + diff --git a/en/install-methods/floppy/powerpc.xml b/en/install-methods/floppy/powerpc.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a4c272647 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/install-methods/floppy/powerpc.xml @@ -0,0 +1,122 @@ + + + + + Writing Disk Images From MacOS + + +An AppleScript, Make Debian Floppy, is +available for burning floppies from the provided disk image files. It +can be downloaded from +. To +use it, just unstuff it on your desktop, and then drag any floppy +image file to it. You must have Applescript installed and enabled in +your extensions manager. Disk Copy will ask you to confirm that you +wish to erase the floppy and proceed to write the file image to it. + + + +You can also use the MacOS utility Disk Copy +directly, or the freeware utility suntar. The +root.bin file is an example of a floppy +image. Use one of the following methods to create a floppy from the +floppy image with these utilities. + + + + + Writing Disk Images with <command>Disk Copy</command> + + +If you are creating the floppy image from files which were originally +on the official &debian; CD, then the Type and Creator are already set +correctly. The following Creator-Changer steps are +only necessary if you downloaded the image files from a Debian mirror. + + + + + +Obtain +Creator-Changer +and use it to open the root.bin file. + + + + +Change the Creator to ddsk (Disk Copy), and the +Type to DDim (binary floppy image). The case is +sensitive for these fields. + + + + +Important: In the Finder, use Get +Info to display the Finder information about the floppy +image, and X the File Locked check box so +that MacOS will be unable to remove the boot blocks if the image is +accidentally mounted. + + + + +Obtain Disk Copy; if you have a MacOS system or CD it +will very likely be there already, otherwise try +. + + + + +Run Disk Copy, and select +Utilities Make a Floppy +, then select the +locked image file from the resulting dialog. It +will ask you to insert a floppy, then ask if you really want to erase +it. When done it should eject the floppy. + + + + + + + + Writing Disk Images with <command>suntar</command> + + + + + +Obtain suntar from +. Start the suntar program and select +Overwrite Sectors... from the Special +menu. + + + + +Insert the floppy disk as requested, then hit &enterkey; (start at +sector 0). + + + + +Select the root.bin file in the file-opening dialog. + + + + +After the floppy has been created successfully, select +File Eject . +If there are any errors writing the floppy, simply toss that floppy and +try another. + + + + +Before using the floppy you created, set the write protect +tab! Otherwise if you accidentally mount it in MacOS, +MacOS will helpfully ruin it. + + + + diff --git a/en/install-methods/install-methods.xml b/en/install-methods/install-methods.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..47ff9c1bc --- /dev/null +++ b/en/install-methods/install-methods.xml @@ -0,0 +1,16 @@ + + + + + Obtaining System Installation Media + +&official-cdrom.xml; +&downloading-files.xml; +&ipl-tape.xml; +&create-floppy.xml; +&boot-usb-files.xml; +&boot-drive-files.xml; +&install-tftp.xml; +&automatic-install.xml; + + diff --git a/en/install-methods/install-tftp.xml b/en/install-methods/install-tftp.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6bfe2f744 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/install-methods/install-tftp.xml @@ -0,0 +1,430 @@ + + + + + Preparing Files for TFTP Net Booting + + +If your machine is connected to a local area network, you may be able +to boot it over the network from another machine, using TFTP. If you +intend to boot the installation system from another machine, the +boot files will need to be placed in specific locations on that machine, +and the machine configured to support booting of your specific machine. + + + +You need to setup a TFTP server, and for many machines, a BOOTP server +, or RARP server +, or DHCP server. + + + +The Reverse Address Resolution Protocol (RARP) is +one way to tell your client what IP address to use for itself. Another +way is to use the BOOTP protocol. + +BOOTP is an IP protocol that +informs a computer of its IP address and where on the network to obtain +a boot image. + + Yet another alternative exists on VMEbus +systems: the IP address can be manually configured in boot ROM. + +The DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration +Protocol) is a more flexible, backwards-compatible extension of BOOTP. +Some systems can only be configured via DHCP. + + + +For PowerPC, if you have a NewWorld Power Macintosh machine, it is a +good idea to use DHCP instead of BOOTP. Some of the latest machines +are unable to boot using BOOTP. + + + +Unlike the Open Firmware found on Sparc and PowerPC machines, the SRM +console will not use RARP to obtain its IP +address, and therefore you must use BOOTP for net booting your +Alpha + + +Alpha systems can also be net-booted using the DECNet MOP (Maintenance +Operations Protocol), but this is not covered here. Presumably, your +local OpenVMS operator will be happy to assist you should you have +some burning need to use MOP to boot Linux on your Alpha. + + +. You can also enter the IP configuration for network +interfaces directly in the SRM console. + + + +Some older HPPA machines (e.g. 715/75) use RBOOTD rather than BOOTP. +There is an rbootd package available in Debian. + + + +The Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) is used to serve the boot +image to the client. Theoretically, any server, on any platform, +which implements these protocols, may be used. In the examples in +this section, we shall provide commands for SunOS 4.x, SunOS 5.x +(a.k.a. Solaris), and GNU/Linux. + + + +To use the Pre-boot Execution Environment (PXE) method of TFTP +booting, you will need a TFTP server with tsize +support. On a &debian; server, the atftpd and +tftpd-hpa packages qualify; we recommend +tftpd-hpa. + + + + + +&tftp-rarp.xml; +&tftp-bootp.xml; +&tftp-dhcp.xml; + + + Enabling the TFTP Server + + +To get the TFTP server ready to go, you should first make sure that +tftpd is enabled. This is usually enabled by having +something like the following line in /etc/inetd.conf: + + +tftp dgram udp wait nobody /usr/sbin/tcpd in.tftpd /tftpboot + + +Debian packages will in general set this up correctly by default when they +are installed. + + + +Look in that file and remember the directory which is used as the +argument of in.tftpd; you'll need that below. The +-l argument enables some versions of +in.tftpd to log all requests to the system logs; +this is useful for diagnosing boot errors. If you've had to change +/etc/inetd.conf, you'll have to notify the +running inetd process that the file has changed. +On a Debian machine, run /etc/init.d/inetd +reload; on other machines, +find out the process ID for inetd, and run +kill -HUP inetd-pid. + + + +If you intend to install Debian on an SGI machine and your TFTP server is a +GNU/Linux box running Linux 2.4, you'll need to set the following on your +server: + + +# echo 1 > /proc/sys/net/ipv4/ip_no_pmtu_disc + + +to turn off Path MTU discovery, otherwise the Indy's PROM can't +download the kernel. Furthermore, make sure TFTP packets are sent from +a source port no greater than 32767, or the download will stall after +the first packet. Again, it's Linux 2.4.X tripping this bug in the +PROM, and you can avoid it by setting + + +# echo "2048 32767" > /proc/sys/net/ipv4/ip_local_port_range + + +to adjust the range of source ports the Linux TFTP server uses. + + + + + + Move TFTP Images Into Place + + +Next, place the TFTP boot image you need, as found in +, in the tftpd +boot image directory. Generally, this directory will be +/tftpboot. You'll have to make a link from that +file to the file which tftpd will use for booting a +particular client. Unfortunately, the file name is determined by the +TFTP client, and there are no strong standards. + + + +On NewWorld Power Macintosh machines, you will need to set up the +yaboot boot loader as the TFTP boot image. +Yaboot will then retrieve the kernel and RAMdisk +images via TFTP itself. For net booting, use the +yaboot-netboot.conf. Just rename this to +yaboot.conf in the TFTP directory. + + + +For PXE booting, everything you should need is set up in the +netboot/netboot.tar.gz tarball. Simply extract this +tarball into the tftpd boot image directory. Make sure +your dhcp server is configured to pass /pxelinux.0 +to tftpd as the filename to boot. + + + +For PXE booting, everything you should need is set up in the +netboot/netboot.tar.gz tarball. Simply extract this +tarball into the tftpd boot image directory. Make sure +your dhcp server is configured to pass +/debian-installer/ia64/elilo.efi +to tftpd as the filename to boot. + + + + + DECstation TFTP Images + + +For DECstations, there are tftpimage files for each subarchitecture, +which contain both kernel and installer in one file. The naming +convention is subarchitecture/netboot-boot.img. +Copy the tftpimage file you would like to use to +/tftpboot/tftpboot.img if you work with the +example BOOTP/DHCP setups described above. + + + +The DECstation firmware boots by TFTP with the command boot +#/tftp, where +# is the number of the TurboChannel device +from which to boot. On most DECstations this is 3. If the +BOOTP/DHCP server does not supply the filename or you need to pass +additional parameters, they can optionally be appended with the +following syntax: + + + +boot #/tftp/filename param1=value1 param2=value2 ... + + + +Several DECstation firmware revisions show a problem with regard to +net booting: the transfer starts, but after some time it stops with +an a.out err. This can have several reasons: + + + + +The firmware does not respond to ARP requests during a TFTP +transfer. This leads to an ARP timeout and the transfer stops. The +solution is to add the MAC address of the Ethernet card in the +DECstation statically to the ARP table of the TFTP server. This is +done by running arp -s +IP-address +MAC-address as root on the +machine acting as TFTP server. The MAC-address of the DECstation can +be read out by entering cnfg at the DECstation +firmware prompt. + + + + +The firmware has a size limit on the files that can be booted +by TFTP. + + + + +There are also firmware revisions that cannot boot via TFTP at all. An +overview about the different firmware revisions can be found at the +NetBSD web pages: +. + + + + + + Alpha TFTP Booting + +On Alpha, you must specify the filename (as a relative path to the +boot image directory) using the -file argument +to the SRM boot command, or by setting the +BOOT_FILE environment variable. Alternatively, +the filename can be given via BOOTP (in ISC dhcpd, +use the filename directive). Unlike Open +Firmware, there is no default filename on SRM, so +you must specify a filename by either one of +these methods. + + + + + + SPARC TFTP Booting + + +SPARC architectures for instance use the subarchitecture names, such +as SUN4M or SUN4C; in some cases, the +architecture is left blank, so the file the client looks for is just +client-ip-in-hex. Thus, if your system +subarchitecture is a SUN4C, and its IP is 192.168.1.3, the filename +would be C0A80103.SUN4C. An easy way to determine +this is to enter the following command in a shell (assuming the +machine's intended IP is 10.0.0.4). + + +$ printf '%.2x%.2x%.2x%.2x\n' 10 0 0 4 + + +This will spit out the IP in hexadecimal; to get to the correct +filename, you will need to change all letters to uppercase and +if necessary append the subarchitecture name. + + + +You can also force some sparc systems to look for a specific file name +by adding it to the end of the OpenPROM boot command, such as +boot net my-sparc.image. This must still reside +in the directory that the TFTP server looks in. + + + + + + BVM/Motorola TFTP Booting + + +For BVM and Motorola VMEbus systems copy the files +&bvme6000-tftp-files; to /tftpboot/. + + + +Next, configure your boot ROMs or BOOTP server to initially load the +tftplilo.bvme or +tftplilo.mvme files from the TFTP server. Refer +to the tftplilo.txt file for your subarchitecture +for additional system-specific configuration information. + + + + + + SGI Indys TFTP Booting + + +On SGI Indys you can rely on the bootpd to supply +the name of the TFTP file. It is given either as the +bf= in /etc/bootptab or as +the filename= option in +/etc/dhcpd.conf. + + + + + + Broadcom BCM91250A TFTP Booting + + +You don't have to configure DHCP in a special way because you'll pass the +full path of the file to the loaded to CFE. + + + + + + + + diff --git a/en/install-methods/ipl-tape.xml b/en/install-methods/ipl-tape.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..383a302fc --- /dev/null +++ b/en/install-methods/ipl-tape.xml @@ -0,0 +1,24 @@ + + + + + Creating an IPL tape + + + +If you can't boot (IPL) from the CD-ROM and you are not using VM +you need to create an IPL tape first. This is described in section +3.4.3 in the + +Linux for IBM eServer zSeries and S/390: Distributions +Redbook. The files you +need to write to the tape are (in this order): +kernel.debian, +parmfile.debian and +initrd.debian. The files can be downloaded +from the tape sub-directory, see +, + + + + diff --git a/en/install-methods/official-cdrom.xml b/en/install-methods/official-cdrom.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3b8c44901 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/install-methods/official-cdrom.xml @@ -0,0 +1,69 @@ + + + + + Official &debian; CD-ROM Sets + + +By far the easiest way to install &debian; is from an Official +Debian CD-ROM Set. You can buy a set from a vendor (see the +CD vendors page). +You may also download the CD-ROM images from a Debian mirror and make +your own set, if you have a fast network connection and a CD burner +(see the Debian CD page for +detailed instructions). If you have a Debian CD set and CDs are +bootable on your machine, you can skip right to +; much effort has been expended to ensure +the files most people need are there on the CD. Although a full set of +binary packages requires several CDs, it is unlikely you will need +packages on the third CD and above. You may also consider using the +DVD version, which saves a lot of space on your shelf and you avoid +the CD shuffling marathon. + + + +If your machine doesn't support CD booting, but you do have a CD set, +you can use an alternative strategy such as + +floppy disk, + +tape, emulated tape, + +hard disk, + +usb stick, + +net boot, + +or manually loading the kernel from the CD to initially boot the +system installer. The files you need for booting by another means are +also on the CD; the Debian network archive and CD folder organization +are identical. So when archive file paths are given below for +particular files you need for booting, look for those files in the +same directories and subdirectories on your CD. + + + +Once the installer is booted, it will be able to obtain all the other +files it needs from the CD. + + + +If you don't have a CD set, then you will need to download the +installer system files and place them on the + +installation tape + +floppy disk or + +hard disk or + +usb stick or + +a connected computer + +so they can be used to boot the installer. + + + + diff --git a/en/install-methods/tftp/bootp.xml b/en/install-methods/tftp/bootp.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..110d2405d --- /dev/null +++ b/en/install-methods/tftp/bootp.xml @@ -0,0 +1,72 @@ + + + + + + Setting up BOOTP server + + +There are two BOOTP servers available for GNU/Linux, the CMU +bootpd and the other is actually a DHCP server, ISC +dhcpd, which are contained in the +bootp and dhcp packages +in &debian;. + + + +To use CMU bootpd, you must first uncomment (or +add) the relevant line in /etc/inetd.conf. On +&debian;, you can run update-inetd --enable +bootps, then /etc/init.d/inetd +reload to do so. Elsewhere, the line in question should +look like: + + +bootps dgram udp wait root /usr/sbin/bootpd bootpd -i -t 120 + + +Now, you must create an /etc/bootptab file. This +has the same sort of familiar and cryptic format as the good old BSD +printcap, termcap, and +disktab files. See the +bootptab manual page for more information. For +CMU bootpd, you will need to know the hardware +(MAC) address of the client. Here is an example +/etc/bootptab: + + +client:\ + hd=/tftpboot:\ + bf=tftpboot.img:\ + ip=192.168.1.90:\ + sm=255.255.255.0:\ + sa=192.168.1.1:\ + ha=0123456789AB: + + +You will need to change at least the ha option, which +specifies the hardware address of the client. The bf +option specifies the file a client should retrieve via TFTP; see + for more details. + + +On SGI Indys you can just enter the command monitor and type +printenv. The value of the +eaddr variable is the machine's MAC address. + + + + +By contrast, setting up BOOTP with ISC dhcpd is +really easy, because it treats BOOTP clients as a moderately special +case of DHCP clients. Some architectures require a complex +configuration for booting clients via BOOTP. If yours is one of +those, read the section . Otherwise, you +will probably be able to get away with simply adding the +allow bootp directive to the configuration +block for the subnet containing the client, and restart +dhcpd with /etc/init.d/dhcpd +restart. + + + diff --git a/en/install-methods/tftp/dhcp.xml b/en/install-methods/tftp/dhcp.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ee18f73e4 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/install-methods/tftp/dhcp.xml @@ -0,0 +1,97 @@ + + + + + Setting up a DHCP server + + +One free software DHCP server is ISC dhcpd. +In &debian;, this is available in the dhcp package. +Here is a sample configuration file for it (usually +/etc/dhcpd.conf): + + +option domain-name "example.com"; +option domain-name-servers ns1.example.com; +option subnet-mask 255.255.255.0; +default-lease-time 600; +max-lease-time 7200; +server-name "servername"; + +subnet 192.168.1.0 netmask 255.255.255.0 { + range 192.168.1.200 192.168.1.253; + option routers 192.168.1.1; +} + +host clientname { + filename "/tftpboot/tftpboot.img"; + server-name "servername"; + next-server servername; + hardware ethernet 01:23:45:67:89:AB; + fixed-address 192.168.1.90; +} + + +Note: the new (and preferred) dhcp3 package uses +/etc/dhcp3/dhcpd.conf. + + + +In this example, there is one server +servername which performs all of the work +of DHCP server, TFTP server, and network gateway. You will almost +certainly need to change the domain-name options, as well as the +server name and client hardware address. The +filename option should be the name of the +file which will be retrieved via TFTP. + + + +After you have edited the dhcpd configuration file, +restart it with /etc/init.d/dhcpd restart. + + + + + Enabling PXE Booting in the DHCP configuration + +Here is another example for a dhcp.conf using the +Pre-boot Execution Environment (PXE) method of TFTP. + + +option domain-name "example.com"; + +default-lease-time 600; +max-lease-time 7200; + +allow booting; +allow bootp; + +# The next paragraph needs to be modified to fit your case +subnet 192.168.1.0 netmask 255.255.255.0 { + range 192.168.1.200 192.168.1.253; + option broadcast-address 192.168.1.255; +# the gateway address which can be different +# (access to the internet for instance) + option routers 192.168.1.1; +# indicate the dns you want to use + option domain-name-servers 192.168.1.3; +} + +group { + next-server 192.168.1.3; + host tftpclient { +# tftp client hardware address + hardware ethernet 00:10:DC:27:6C:15; + filename "/tftpboot/pxelinux.0"; + } +} + + +Note that for PXE booting, the client filename pxelinux.0 +is a boot loader, not a kernel image (see +below). + + + + diff --git a/en/install-methods/tftp/rarp.xml b/en/install-methods/tftp/rarp.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e59b94587 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/install-methods/tftp/rarp.xml @@ -0,0 +1,64 @@ + + + + + + Setting up RARP server + + +To setup RARP, you need to know the Ethernet address (a.k.a. the MAC address) +of the client computers to be installed. +If you don't know this information, you can + + pick it off the initial OpenPROM boot messages, use the +OpenBoot .enet-addr command, or + +boot into Rescue mode (e.g., from the rescue floppy) and use the +command /sbin/ifconfig eth0. + + + +On a RARP server system using a Linux 2.2.x kernel, +you need to populate the kernel's RARP table. +To do this, run the following commands: + + +# /sbin/rarp -s +client-hostname +client-enet-addr + +# /usr/sbin/arp -s +client-ip +client-enet-addr + + +If you get + + +SIOCSRARP: Invalid argument + + +you probably need to load the RARP kernel module or else recompile the +kernel to support RARP. Try modprobe rarp and +then try the rarp command again. + + + +On a RARP server system using a Linux 2.4.x kernel, +there is no RARP module, and +you should instead use the rarpd program. The +procedure is similar to that used under SunOS in the following +paragraph. + + + +Under SunOS, you need to ensure that the Ethernet hardware address for +the client is listed in the ethers database (either in the +/etc/ethers file, or via NIS/NIS+) and in the +hosts database. Then you need to start the RARP daemon. +In SunOS 4, issue the command (as root): +/usr/etc/rarpd -a; in SunOS 5, use +/usr/sbin/rarpd -a. + + + diff --git a/en/install-methods/usb-setup/i386.xml b/en/install-methods/usb-setup/i386.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a1b89606f --- /dev/null +++ b/en/install-methods/usb-setup/i386.xml @@ -0,0 +1,101 @@ + + + + + USB stick partitioning on &arch-title; + + +We will show how to setup the memory stick to use the first partition, +instead of the entire device. + + + +Since most USB sticks come pre-configured with a single FAT16 +partition, you probably won't have to repartition or reformat the +stick. If you have to do that anyway, use cfdisk +or any other partitioning tool for creating a FAT16 partition and then +create the filesystem using: + + +# mkdosfs /dev/sda1 + + +Take care that you use the correct device name for your USB stick. The +mkdosfs command is contained in the +dosfstools Debian package. + + + +In order to start the kernel after booting from the USB stick, we will +put a boot loader on the stick. Although any boot loader +(e.g. LILO) should work, it's convenient to use +SYSLINUX, since it uses a FAT16 partition and can +be reconfigured by just editing a text file. Any operating system +which supports the FAT file system can be used to make changes to the +configuration of the boot loader. + + + +To put SYSLINUX on the FAT16 partition on your USB +stick, install the syslinux and +mtools packages on your system, and do: + + +# syslinux /dev/sda1 + + +Again, take care that you use the correct device name. The partition +must not be mounted when starting SYSLINUX. This +procedure writes a boot sector to the partition and creates the file +ldlinux.sys which contains the boot loader code. + + + +Mount the partition (mount /dev/sda1 /mnt) and +copy the following files from the Debian archives to the stick: + + + + +vmlinuz (kernel binary) + + + + +initrd.gz (initial ramdisk image) + + + + +syslinux.cfg (SYSLINUX configuration file) + + + + +Optional kernel modules + + + + +If you want to rename the files, please note that +SYSLINUX can only process DOS (8.3) file names. + + + +The syslinux.cfg configuration file should +contain the following two lines: + + +default vmlinuz +append initrd=initrd.gz ramdisk_size=12000 root=/dev/rd/0 init=/linuxrc rw + + +Please note that the ramdisk_size parameter +may need to be increased, depending on the image you are booting. + +If the boot fails, you can try adding devfs=mount,dall +to the append line. + + + + diff --git a/en/install-methods/usb-setup/powerpc.xml b/en/install-methods/usb-setup/powerpc.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..12e1284b9 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/install-methods/usb-setup/powerpc.xml @@ -0,0 +1,111 @@ + + + + + USB stick partitioning on &arch-title; + + +Most USB sticks do not come pre-configured in such a way that Open +Firmware can boot from them, so you will need to repartition the stick. +On Mac systems, run mac-fdisk /dev/sda, +initialise a new partition map using the i +command, and create a new partition of type Apple_Bootstrap using the +C command. (Note that the first "partition" will +always be the partition map itself.) Then type + + +$ hformat /dev/sda2 + + +Take care that you use the correct device name for your USB stick. The +hformat command is contained in the +hfsutils Debian package. + + + +In order to start the kernel after booting from the USB stick, we will +put a boot loader on the stick. The yaboot boot +loader can be installed on an HFS filesystem and can be reconfigured by +just editing a text file. Any operating system which supports the HFS +file system can be used to make changes to the configuration of the boot +loader. + + + +The normal ybin tool that comes with +yaboot does not yet understand USB storage devices, +so you will have to install yaboot by hand using the +hfsutils tools. Type + + +$ hmount /dev/sda2 +$ hcopy -r /usr/lib/yaboot/yaboot : +$ hattrib -c UNIX -t tbxi :yaboot +$ hattrib -b : +$ humount + + +Again, take care that you use the correct device name. The partition +must not be otherwise mounted during this procedure. This procedure +writes the boot loader to the partition, and uses the HFS utilities to +mark it in such a way that Open Firmware will boot it. Having done this, +the rest of the USB stick may be prepared using the normal Unix +utilities. + + + +Mount the partition (mount /dev/sda2 /mnt) and +copy the following files from the Debian archives to the stick: + + + + +vmlinux (kernel binary) + + + + +initrd.gz (initial ramdisk image) + + + + +yaboot.conf (yaboot configuration file) + + + + +boot.msg (optional boot message) + + + + +Optional kernel modules + + + + + + +The yaboot.conf configuration file should +contain the following lines: + + +default=install +root=/dev/ram + +message=/boot.msg + +image=/vmlinux + label=install + initrd=/initrd.gz + initrd-size=10000 + append="devfs=mount,dall --" + read-only + + +Please note that the initrd-size parameter +may need to be increased, depending on the image you are booting. + + + diff --git a/en/partitioning/device-names.xml b/en/partitioning/device-names.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3190bc8f7 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/partitioning/device-names.xml @@ -0,0 +1,161 @@ + + + + + + Device Names in Linux + + +Linux disks and partition names may be different from other operating +systems. You need to know the names that Linux uses when you create +and mount partitions. Here's the basic naming scheme: + + + + + +The first floppy drive is named /dev/fd0. + + + + +The second floppy drive is named /dev/fd1. + + + + +The first SCSI disk (SCSI ID address-wise) is named +/dev/sda. + + + + +The second SCSI disk (address-wise) is named +/dev/sdb, and so on. + + + + +The first SCSI CD-ROM is named /dev/scd0, also +known as /dev/sr0. + + + + +The master disk on IDE primary controller is named +/dev/hda. + + + + +The slave disk on IDE primary controller is named +/dev/hdb. + + + + +The master and slave disks of the secondary controller can be called +/dev/hdc and /dev/hdd, +respectively. Newer IDE controllers can actually have two channels, +effectively acting like two controllers. + + +The letters may differ from what shows in the mac program pdisk +(i.e. what shows up as /dev/hdc on pdisk may show +up as /dev/hda in Debian). + + + + + + +The first XT disk is named /dev/xda. + + + + +The second XT disk is named /dev/xdb. + + + + +The first ACSI device is named /dev/ada, the +second is named /dev/adb. + + + + + + + +The first DASD device is named +/dev/dasda. + + + + +The second DASD device is named +/dev/dasdb, and so on. + + + + + + +The partitions on each disk are represented by appending a decimal +number to the disk name: sda1 and +sda2 represent the first and +second partitions of the first SCSI disk drive in your system. + + + +Here is a real-life example. Let's assume you have a system with 2 +SCSI disks, one at SCSI address 2 and the other at SCSI address 4. +The first disk (at address 2) is then named sda, +and the second sdb. If the +sda drive has 3 partitions on it, these will be +named sda1, sda2, and +sda3. The same applies to the +sdb disk and its partitions. + + + +Note that if you have two SCSI host bus adapters (i.e., controllers), +the order of the drives can get confusing. The best solution in this +case is to watch the boot messages, assuming you know the drive models +and/or capacities. + + + +Linux represents the primary partitions as the drive name, plus the +numbers 1 through 4. For example, the first primary partition on the +first IDE drive is /dev/hda1. The logical partitions are +numbered starting at 5, so the first logical partition on that same +drive is /dev/hda5. Remember that the extended +partition, that is, the primary partition holding the logical +partitions, is not usable by itself. This applies to SCSI disks as +well as IDE disks. + + + +VMEbus systems using the TEAC FC-1 SCSI floppy drive will see it as normal +SCSI disk. To make identification of the drive simpler the installation +software will create a symbolic link to the appropriate device and name +it /dev/sfd0. + + + +Sun disk partitions allow for 8 separate partitions (or slices). The +third partition is usually (and is preferred to have) the Whole +Disk partition. This partition references all of the sectors of the +disk, and is used by the boot loader (either SILO, or Sun's). + + + +The partitions on each disk are represented by appending a decimal +number to the disk name: dasda1 and +dasda2 represent the first and +second partitions of the first DASD device in your system. + + + diff --git a/en/partitioning/partition-programs.xml b/en/partitioning/partition-programs.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..64bc8f5e5 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/partitioning/partition-programs.xml @@ -0,0 +1,169 @@ + + + + + Debian Partitioning Programs + + +Several varieties of partitioning programs have been adapted by Debian +developers to work on various types of hard disks and computer +architectures. Following is a list of the program(s) applicable for +your architecture. + + + + + + +partman + + +Recommended partitioning tool in Debian. This swiss army knife can +also resize partitions, create filesystems + (format in Windows speak) +and assign them to the mountpoints. + + + + + +fdisk + + +The original Linux disk partitioner, good for gurus. + + + +Be careful if you have existing FreeBSD partitions on your machine. +The installation kernels include support for these partitions, but the +way that fdisk represents them (or not) can make the +device names differ. See the +Linux+FreeBSD HOWTO + + + + + +cfdisk + + +A simple-to-use, full-screen disk partitioner for the rest of us. + + + +Note that cfdisk doesn't understand FreeBSD +partitions at all, and, again, device names may differ as a result. + + + + + +atari-fdisk + + +Atari-aware version of fdisk. + + + + + +amiga-fdisk + + +Amiga-aware version of fdisk. + + + + + +mac-fdisk + + +Mac-aware version of fdisk. + + + + + +pmac-fdisk + + +PowerMac-aware version of fdisk, also used by BVM +and Motorola VMEbus systems. + + + + + +fdasd + + +&arch-title; version of fdisk; Please read the +fdasd manual page or chapter 13 in + +Device Drivers and Installation Commands for details. + + + + + + + +One of these programs will be run by default when you select +Partition a Hard Disk. If the one which is run +by default isn't the one you want, quit the partitioner, go to the shell +(tty2) by pressing Alt +and F2 keys together, and manually type in the +name of the program you want to use (and arguments, if any). Then +skip the Partition a Hard Disk step in +debian-installer and continue to the next step. + + + +If you will be working with more than 20 partitions on your ide disk, +you will need to create devices for partitions 21 and beyond. The next +step of initializing the partition will fail unless a proper device is +present. As an example, here are commands you can use in +tty2 or under Execute A Shell to add a device +so the 21st partition can be initialized: + + +# cd /dev +# mknod hda21 b 3 21 +# chgrp disk hda21 +# chmod 660 hda21 + + +Booting into the new system will fail unless proper devices are present +on the target system. After installing the kernel and modules, execute: + + +# cd /target/dev +# mknod hda21 b 3 21 +# chgrp disk hda21 +# chmod 660 hda21 + + +Remember to mark your boot partition as +Bootable. + + + +One key point when partitioning for Mac type disks is that the +swap partition is identified by its name; it must be named swap. +All Mac linux partitions are the same partition type, +Apple_UNIX_SRV2. Please read the fine manual. We also suggest reading the +mac-fdisk Tutorial, which +includes steps you should take if you are sharing your disk with MacOS. + + + +&partition-alpha.xml; +&partition-hppa.xml; +&partition-i386.xml; +&partition-ia64.xml; +&partition-mips.xml; +&partition-powerpc.xml; +&partition-sparc.xml; + + diff --git a/en/partitioning/partition/alpha.xml b/en/partitioning/partition/alpha.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..54378128a --- /dev/null +++ b/en/partitioning/partition/alpha.xml @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ + + + + + Partitioning for &arch-title; + + +Booting Debian from the SRM console (the only disk boot method supported +by &releasename;) requires you to have a BSD disk label, not a DOS +partition table, on your boot disk. (Remember, the SRM boot block is +incompatible with MS-DOS partition tables — see +.) As a result, partman +creates BSD disk labels when running on &architecture;, but if your disk +has an existing DOS partition table the existing partitions will need to +be deleted before partman can convert it to use a disk label. + + + +If you have chosen to use fdisk to partition your +disk, and the disk that you have selected for partitioning does not +already contain a BSD disk label, you must use the b +command to enter disk label mode. + + + +Unless you wish to use the disk you are partitioning from Tru64 Unix +or one of the free 4.4BSD-Lite derived operating systems (FreeBSD, +OpenBSD, or NetBSD), it is suggested that you do +not make the third partition contain the whole +disk. This is not required by aboot, and in fact, +it may lead to confusion since the swriteboot +utility used to install aboot in the boot sector +will complain about a partition overlapping with the boot block. + + + +Also, because aboot is written to the first few +sectors of the disk (currently it occupies about 70 kilobytes, or 150 +sectors), you must leave enough empty space at +the beginning of the disk for it. In the past, it was suggested that +you make a small partition at the beginning of the disk, to be left +unformatted. For the same reason mentioned above, we now suggest that +you do not do this on disks that will only be used by GNU/Linux. When +using partman, a small partition will still be +created for aboot for convenience reasons. + + + +For ARC installations, you should make a small FAT partition at the +beginning of the disk to contain MILO and +linload.exe — 5 megabytes should be sufficient, see +. Unfortunately, making FAT +file systems from the menu is not yet supported, so you'll have to do +it manually from the shell using mkdosfs before +attempting to install the boot loader. + + + diff --git a/en/partitioning/partition/hppa.xml b/en/partitioning/partition/hppa.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b898dd5dd --- /dev/null +++ b/en/partitioning/partition/hppa.xml @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ + + + + + Partitioning for &arch-title; + + +PALO, the HPPA boot loader, requires a partition of type F0 somewhere +in the first 2GB. This is where the boot loader and an optional kernel +and RAMdisk will be stored, so make it big enough for that — at least +4Mb (I like 8–16MB). An additional requirement of the firmware is that +the Linux kernel must reside within the first 2GB of the disk. This +is typically achieved by making the root ext2 partition fit entirely +within the first 2GB of the disk. Alternatively you can create a small +ext2 partition near the start of the disk and mount that on +/boot, since that is the directory where the Linux +kernel(s) will be stored. /boot needs to be big enough +to hold whatever kernels you might wish load; 8–16MB is generally +sufficient. + + + diff --git a/en/partitioning/partition/i386.xml b/en/partitioning/partition/i386.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..74e8be4a2 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/partitioning/partition/i386.xml @@ -0,0 +1,94 @@ + + + + + Partitioning for &arch-title; + + +If you have an existing other operating system such as DOS or Windows and +you want to preseve that operating system while installing Debian, you may +need to resize its partition to free up space for the Debian installation. +The installer supports resizing of both FAT and NTFS filesystems; when you +get to the installer's partitioning step, select the option to partition +manually and then simply select an existing partition and change its size. + + + +The PC BIOS generally adds additional constraints for disk +partitioning. There is a limit to how many primary and +logical partitions a drive can contain. Additionally, with pre +1994–98 BIOSes, there are limits to where on the drive the BIOS can boot +from. More information can be found in the +Linux Partition HOWTO and the +Phoenix BIOS FAQ, but +this section will include a brief overview to help you plan most situations. + + + +Primary partitions are the original partitioning scheme for PC +disks. However, there can only be four of them. To get past this +limitation, extended and logical partitions were invented. By +setting one of your primary partitions as an extended partition, you +can subdivide all the space allocated to that partition into logical +partitions. You can create up to 60 logical partitions per extended +partition; however, you can only have one extended partition per +drive. + + + +Linux limits the partitions per drive to 15 partitions for SCSI disks +(3 usable primary partitions, 12 logical partitions), and 63 +partitions on an IDE drive (3 usable primary partitions, 60 logical +partitions). However the normal &debian; system provides +only 20 devices for partitions, so you may not install on partitions +higher than 20 unless you first manually create devices for those +partitions. + + + +If you have a large IDE disk, and are using neither LBA addressing, +nor overlay drivers (sometimes provided by hard disk manufacturers), +then the boot partition (the partition containing your kernel image) +must be placed within the first 1024 cylinders of your hard drive +(usually around 524 megabytes, without BIOS translation). + + + +This restriction doesn't apply if you have a BIOS newer than around +1995–98 (depending on the manufacturer) that supports the Enhanced +Disk Drive Support Specification. Both Lilo, the Linux loader, and +Debian's alternative mbr must use the BIOS to read the +kernel from the disk into RAM. If the BIOS int 0x13 large disk access +extensions are found to be present, they will be utilized. Otherwise, +the legacy disk access interface is used as a fall-back, and it cannot +be used to address any location on the disk higher than the 1023rd +cylinder. Once Linux is booted, no matter what BIOS your computer +has, these restrictions no longer apply, since Linux does not use the +BIOS for disk access. + + + +If you have a large disk, you might have to use cylinder translation +techniques, which you can set from your BIOS setup program, such as +LBA (Logical Block Addressing) or CHS translation mode (Large). +More information about issues with large disks can be found in the +Large Disk HOWTO. If you +are using a cylinder translation scheme, and the BIOS does not support +the large disk access extensions, then your boot partition has to fit +within the translated representation of the +1024th cylinder. + + + +The recommended way of accomplishing this is to create a small (5–10MB +should suffice) partition at the beginning of the disk to be used as +the boot partition, and then create whatever other partitions you wish +to have, in the remaining area. This boot partition +must be mounted on /boot, +since that is the directory where the Linux kernel(s) will be stored. +This configuration will work on any system, regardless of whether LBA +or large disk CHS translation is used, and regardless of whether your +BIOS supports the large disk access extensions. + + + diff --git a/en/partitioning/partition/ia64.xml b/en/partitioning/partition/ia64.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b7dc396ef --- /dev/null +++ b/en/partitioning/partition/ia64.xml @@ -0,0 +1,125 @@ + + + + + Partitioning for &arch-title; + + + +The partman disk partitioner is the default +partitioning tool for the installer. +It manages the set of partitions and their mount points to ensure +that the disks and filesystems is properly configured for a successful +installation. It actually uses the parted to +do the on-disk partitioning. + + + + + EFI Recognized Formats + + +The IA64 EFI firmware supports two partition table (or disk label) +formats, GPT and MS-DOS. MS-DOS, the format typically used on i386 +PCs, is no longer recommended for IA64 systems. Although +the installer also provides the cfdisk, +you should only use the +parted because only it can manage both GPT +and MS-DOS tables correctly. + + + + + +The automatic partitioning recipes for partman +allocate an EFI partition as the first partition on the disk. +You can also set up the partition under the Guided +partitioning from the main menu in a manner similar to +setting up a swap partition. + + + +The partman partitioner will handle most disk +layouts. +For those rare cases where it is necessary to manually set up a disk, +you can use the shell as described above and run the +parted utility directly using its command line interface. +Assuming that you want to erase your whole disk and create a GPT table +and some partitions, then something similar to the following command +sequence could be used: + + + mklabel gpt + mkpartfs primary fat 0 50 + mkpartfs primary linux-swap 51 1000 + mkpartfs primary ext2 1001 3000 + set 1 boot on + print + quit + + +This creates a new partition table, and three partitions to be used as +an EFI boot partition, swap space, and a root file system. Finally it +sets the boot flag on the EFI partition. Partitions are specified in +Megabytes, with start and end offsets from the beginning of the disk. +So, for example, above we created a 1999MB ext2 file system starting +at offset 1001MB from the start of the disk. Note that formatting swap +space with parted can take a few minutes to +complete, as it scans the partition for bad blocks. + + + + + Boot Loader Partition Requirements + + + +ELILO, the ia64 boot loader, requires a partition containing a FAT +file system with the boot flag set. +The partition must be big enough to hold the boot loader and any +kernels or RAMdisks you may wish to boot. A minimum size would be +about 20MB, but if you expect to run with multiple kernels, then +128MB might be a better size. + + + +The EFI Boot Manager and the EFI Shell fully support the GPT table +so the boot partition does not necessarily have to be the first +partition or even on the same disk. +This is convenient if you should forget to allocate the partition and +only find out after you have formatted the other partitions on your disk(s). +The partman partitioner checks for an EFI partition +at the same time it checks for a properly set up root +partition. +This gives you an opportunity to correct the disk layout before the +package install begins. +The easiest way to correct this omission is to shrink the last partition +of the disk to make enough free space for adding an EFI partition. + + + +It is strongly recommended that you allocate the EFI boot partition +on the same disk as the root filesystem. + + + + + + EFI Diagnostic Partitions + + + +The EFI firmware is significantly more sophisticated than the usual +BIOS seen on most x86 PCs. +Some system vendors take advantage of the ability of the EFI to +access files and run programs from a hard disk filesystem to store diagnostics +and EFI based system management utilities on the hard disk. +This is a separate FAT format filesystem on the system disk. +Consult the system documentation and accessories that come with the +system for details. +The easiest time to set up a diagnostics partition is at the same time you +set up the EFI boot partition. + + + + diff --git a/en/partitioning/partition/mips.xml b/en/partitioning/partition/mips.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d07499625 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/partitioning/partition/mips.xml @@ -0,0 +1,16 @@ + + + + + Partitioning for &arch-title; + + +SGI Indys require an SGI disk label in order to make the system bootable +from hard disk. It can be created in the fdisk expert menu. The thereby +created volume header(partition number 9) should be at least 3MB large. +If the volume header created is too small, you can simply delete +partition number 9 and re-add it with a different size. Note that the +volume header must start at sector 0. + + + diff --git a/en/partitioning/partition/powerpc.xml b/en/partitioning/partition/powerpc.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e0c2ee4aa --- /dev/null +++ b/en/partitioning/partition/powerpc.xml @@ -0,0 +1,57 @@ + + + + + Partitioning Newer PowerMacs + + +If you are installing onto a NewWorld PowerMac you must create a +special bootstrap partition to hold the boot loader. The size of this +partition must be 800KB and its partition type must be +Apple_Bootstrap. If the bootstrap partition is +not created with the Apple_Bootstrap type your +machine cannot be made bootable from the hard disk. This partition +can easily be created by creating a new partition in +partman and telling it to use it as a NewWorld +boot partition, or in mac-fdisk using the +b command. + + + +The special partition type Apple_Bootstrap is required to prevent +MacOS from mounting and damaging the bootstrap partition, as there are +special modifications made to it in order for OpenFirmware to boot it +automatically. + + + +Note that the bootstrap partition is only meant to hold 3 very small +files: the yaboot binary, its configuration +yaboot.conf, and a first stage OpenFirmware +loader ofboot.b. It need not and must not be +mounted on your file system nor have kernels or anything else copied +to it. The ybin and mkofboot +utilities are used to manipulate this partition. + + + +In order for OpenFirmware to automatically boot &debian; the bootstrap +partition should appear before other boot partitions on the disk, +especially MacOS boot partitions. The bootstrap partition should be +the first one you create. However, if you add a bootstrap partition +later, you can use mac-fdisk's +r command to reorder the partition map so the +bootstrap partition comes right after the map (which is always +partition 1). It's the logical map order, not the physical address +order, that counts. + + + +Apple disks normally have several small driver partitions. If you +intend to dual boot your machine with MacOSX, you should retain these +partitions and a small HFS partition (800k is the minimum size). That +is because MacOSX, on every boot, offers to initialize any disks which do +not have active MacOS partitions and driver partitions. + + + diff --git a/en/partitioning/partition/sparc.xml b/en/partitioning/partition/sparc.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8e861025e --- /dev/null +++ b/en/partitioning/partition/sparc.xml @@ -0,0 +1,33 @@ + + + + + Partitioning for &arch-title; + + +Make sure you create a Sun disk label on your boot disk. This is +the only kind of partition scheme that the OpenBoot PROM understands, +and so it's the only scheme from which you can boot. The +s key is used in fdisk to +create Sun disk labels. + + + +Furthermore, on &arch-title; disks, make sure your first partition on +your boot disk starts at cylinder 0. While this is required, it also +means that the first partition will contain the partition table and +the boot block, which are the first two sectors of the disk. You must +not put swap on the first partition of the boot +drive, since swap partitions do not preserve the first few sectors of +the partition. You can put Ext2 or UFS partitions there; these will +leave the partition table and the boot block alone. + + + +It is also advised that the third partition should be of type Whole +disk (type 5), and contain the entire disk (from the first cylinder +to the last). This is simply a convention of Sun disk labels, and +helps the SILO boot loader keep its bearings. + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/en/partitioning/partitioning.xml b/en/partitioning/partitioning.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..66136a451 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/partitioning/partitioning.xml @@ -0,0 +1,13 @@ + + + + +Partitioning for Debian + +&sizing.xml; +&tree.xml; +&schemes.xml; +&device-names.xml; +&partition-programs.xml; + + diff --git a/en/partitioning/schemes.xml b/en/partitioning/schemes.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6924cc3e7 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/partitioning/schemes.xml @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ + + + + + + Recommended Partitioning Scheme + + +For new users, personal Debian boxes, home systems, and other +single-user setups, a single / partition (plus +swap) is probably the easiest, simplest way to go. However, if your +partition is larger than around 6GB, choose ext3 as your partition +type. Ext2 partitions need periodic file system integrity checking, +and this can cause delays during booting when the partition is large. + + + +For multi-user systems or systems with lots of disk space, it's best +to put /usr, /var, +/tmp, and /home each on +their own partitions separate from the / +partition. + + + +You might need a separate /usr/local partition if +you plan to install many programs that are not part of the Debian +distribution. If your machine will be a mail server, you might need +to make /var/mail a separate partition. Often, +putting /tmp on its own partition, for instance +20 to 50MB, is a good idea. If you are setting up a server with lots +of user accounts, it's generally good to have a separate, large +/home partition. In general, the partitioning +situation varies from computer to computer depending on its uses. + + + +For very complex systems, you should see the + +Multi Disk HOWTO. This contains in-depth information, mostly +of interest to ISPs and people setting up servers. + + + +With respect to the issue of swap partition size, there are many +views. One rule of thumb which works well is to use as much swap as +you have system memory. It also shouldn't be smaller than 16MB, in +most cases. Of course, there are exceptions to these rules. If you +are trying to solve 10000 simultaneous equations on a machine with +256MB of memory, you may need a gigabyte (or more) of swap. + + + +On the other hand, Atari Falcons and Macs feel pain when swapping, so +instead of making a large swap partition, get as much RAM as possible. + + + +On 32-bit architectures (i386, m68k, 32-bit SPARC, and PowerPC), the +maximum size of a swap partition is 2GB. That should be enough for +nearly any installation. However, if your swap requirements are this +high, you should probably try to spread the swap across different +disks (also called spindles) and, if possible, different SCSI or +IDE channels. The kernel will balance swap usage between multiple +swap partitions, giving better performance. + + + +As an example, an older home machine might have 32MB of RAM and a +1.7GB IDE drive on /dev/hda. There might be a +500MB partition for another operating system on +/dev/hda1, a 32MB swap partition on +/dev/hda3 and about 1.2GB on +/dev/hda2 as the Linux partition. + + + +For an idea of the space taken by tasks +you might be interested in adding after your system installation is +complete, check . + + + + diff --git a/en/partitioning/sizing.xml b/en/partitioning/sizing.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..bc174c497 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/partitioning/sizing.xml @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ + + + + + + Deciding on Debian Partitions and Sizes + + +At a bare minimum, GNU/Linux needs one partition for itself. You can +have a single partition containing the entire operating system, +applications, and your personal files. Most people feel that a +separate swap partition is also a necessity, although it's not +strictly true. Swap is scratch space for an operating system, +which allows the system to use disk storage as virtual +memory. By putting swap on a separate partition, Linux can make much +more efficient use of it. It is possible to force Linux to use a +regular file as swap, but it is not recommended. + + + +Most people choose to give GNU/Linux more than the minimum number of +partitions, however. There are two reasons you might want to break up +the file system into a number of smaller partitions. The first is for +safety. If something happens to corrupt the file system, generally +only one partition is affected. Thus, you only have to replace (from +the backups you've been carefully keeping) a portion of your +system. At a bare minimum, you should consider creating what is +commonly called a root partition. This contains the most essential +components of the system. If any other partitions get corrupted, you +can still boot into GNU/Linux to fix the system. This can save you the +trouble of having to reinstall the system from scratch. + + + +The second reason is generally more important in a business setting, +but it really depends on your use of the machine. For example, a mail +server getting spammed with e-mail can easily fill a partition. If you +made /var/mail a separate partition on the mail +server, most of the system will remain working even if you get spammed. + + + +The only real drawback to using more partitions is that it is often +difficult to know in advance what your needs will be. If you make a +partition too small then you will either have to reinstall the system +or you will be constantly moving things around to make room in the +undersized partition. On the other hand, if you make the partition too +big, you will be wasting space that could be used elsewhere. Disk +space is cheap nowadays, but why throw your money away? + + + diff --git a/en/partitioning/tree.xml b/en/partitioning/tree.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2644a694f --- /dev/null +++ b/en/partitioning/tree.xml @@ -0,0 +1,150 @@ + + + + + + The Directory Tree + + +&debian; adheres to the +Filesystem Hierarchy Standard +for directory and file naming. This standard allows users and software +programs to predict the location of files and directories. The root +level directory is represented simply by the slash +/. At the root level, all Debian systems include +these directories: + + + + + + DirectoryContent + + + + + + bin + Essential command binaries + + boot + Static files of the boot loader + + dev + Device files + + etc + Host-specific system configuration + + home + User home directories + + lib + Essential shared libraries and kernel modules + + media + Contains mount points for replaceable media + + mnt + Mount point for mounting a file system temporarily + + proc + Virtual directory for system information (2.4 and 2.6 kernels) + + root + Home directory for the root user + + sbin + Essential system binaries + + sys + Virtual directory for system information (2.6 kernels) + + tmp + Temporary files + + usr + Secondary hierarchy + + var + Variable data + + opt + Add-on application software packages + + + + + + +The following is a list of important considerations regarding +directories and partitions. Note that disk usage varies widely given +system configuration and specific usage patterns. The recommendations +here are general guidelines and provide a starting point for +partitioning. + + + + + +The root partition / must always physically +contain /etc, /bin, +/sbin, /lib and +/dev, otherwise you won't be able to boot. +Typically 150–250 MB is needed for the root partition. + + + + +/usr: contains all user programs +(/usr/bin), libraries +(/usr/lib), documentation +(/usr/share/doc), etc. +This is the part of the file system that generally takes up most space. +You should provide at least 500 MB of disk space. This amount should +be increased depending on the number and type of packages you plan +to install. A generous workstation or server installation should allow +4-6 GB. + + + + +/var: variable data like news articles, e-mails, +web sites, databases, the packaging system cache, etc. will be placed +under this directory. The size of this directory depends greatly on +the usage of your system, but for most people will be dictated by +the package management tool's overhead. If you are going to do a full +installation of just about everything Debian has to offer, all in one +session, setting aside 2 or 3 gigabyte of space for +/var should be sufficient. If you are going to +install in pieces (that is to say, install services and utilities, +followed by text stuff, then X, ...), you can get away with 300–500 +MB. If hard drive space is at a premium and you don't plan on doing +major system updates, you can get by with as little as 30 or 40 MB. + + + + +/tmp: temporary data created by programs will +most likely go in this directory. 40–100 MB should usually +be enough. Some applications — including archive manipulators, +CD/DVD authoring tools, and multimedia software — may use +/tmp to temporarily store image files. If you +plan to use such applications, you should adjust the space available +in /tmp accordingly. + + + + +/home: every user will put his personal data +into a subdirectory of this directory. Its size depends on how many +users will be using the system and what files are to be stored in +their directories. Depending on your planned usage you should reserve +about 100 MB for each user, but adapt this value to your needs. Reserve +a lot more space if you plan to save a lot of multimedia files (MP3, movies) +in your home directory. + + + + + diff --git a/en/post-install/further-reading.xml b/en/post-install/further-reading.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9f52631b0 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/post-install/further-reading.xml @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ + + + + Further Reading and Information + + +If you need information about a particular program, you should first +try man program, or +info program. + + + +There is lots of useful documentation in +/usr/share/doc as well. In particular, +/usr/share/doc/HOWTO and +/usr/share/doc/FAQ contain lots of interesting +information. To submit bugs, look at +/usr/share/doc/debian/bug*. To read about +Debian-specific issues for particular programs, look at +/usr/share/doc/(package name)/README.Debian. + + + +The +Debian web site +contains a large quantity of documentation about Debian. In +particular, see the +Debian GNU/Linux FAQ and the +Debian +Reference. +An index of more Debian documentation is available from the +Debian Documentation Project. +The Debian community is self-supporting; to subscribe to +one or more of the Debian mailing lists, see the + +Mail List Subscription page. +Last, but not least, the Debian Mailing +List Archives contain a wealth of information on Debian. + + + +A general source of information on GNU/Linux is the +Linux Documentation Project. +There you will find the HOWTOs and pointers to other very valuable +information on parts of a GNU/Linux system. + + + + diff --git a/en/post-install/kernel-baking.xml b/en/post-install/kernel-baking.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9d02ce08a --- /dev/null +++ b/en/post-install/kernel-baking.xml @@ -0,0 +1,182 @@ + + + + Compiling a New Kernel + + +Why would someone want to compile a new kernel? It is often not +necessary since the default kernel shipped with Debian handles most +configurations. However, it is useful to compile a new kernel in order +to: + + + + +handle special hardware needs, or hardware conflicts with the pre-supplied +kernels + + + + +handle hardware or options not included in the stock kernel, such as +APM or SMP + + + + +optimize the kernel by removing useless drivers to speed up boot +time + + + + +use options of the kernel which are not supported by the default +kernel (such as high memory support) + + + + +run an updated or development kernel + + + + +impress your friends, try new things + + + + + + + Kernel Image Management + + +Don't be afraid to try compiling the kernel. It's fun and profitable. + + + +To compile a kernel the Debian way, you need some packages: +kernel-package, +kernel-source-&kernelversion; (the most recent version +at the time of this writing), fakeroot and a +few others which are probably already installed (see +/usr/share/doc/kernel-package/README.gz for the +complete list). + + + +This method will make a .deb of your kernel source, and, if you have +non-standard modules, make a synchronized dependent .deb of those +too. It's a better way to manage kernel images; +/boot will hold the kernel, the System.map, and a +log of the active config file for the build. + + + +Note that you don't have to compile your kernel +the Debian way; but we find that using the packaging system +to manage your kernel is actually safer and easier. In fact, you can get +your kernel sources right from Linus instead of +kernel-source-&kernelversion;, yet still use the +kernel-package compilation method. + + + +Note that you'll find complete documentation on using +kernel-package under +/usr/share/doc/kernel-package. This section just +contains a brief tutorial. + + + +Hereafter, we'll assume you have free rein over your machine and will +extract your kernel source to somewhere in your home directory + + + +There are other locations where you can extract kernel sources and build +your custom kernel, but this is easiest as it does not require special +permissions. + + + +. We'll also assume that your kernel version is +&kernelversion;. Make sure you are in the directory to where you want to +unpack the kernel sources, extract them using tar xjf +/usr/src/kernel-source-&kernelversion;.tar.bz2 and change +to the directory kernel-source-&kernelversion; +that will have been created. + + + +Now, you can configure your kernel. Run make +xconfig if X11 is installed, configured and being run; run +make menuconfig otherwise (you'll need +libncurses5-dev installed). Take the time to read +the online help and choose carefully. When in doubt, it is typically +better to include the device driver (the software which manages +hardware peripherals, such as Ethernet cards, SCSI controllers, and so +on) you are unsure about. Be careful: other options, not related to a +specific hardware, should be left at the default value if you do not +understand them. Do not forget to select Kernel module loader +in Loadable module support (it is not selected by default). +If not included, your Debian installation will experience problems. + + + +Clean the source tree and reset the kernel-package +parameters. To do that, do make-kpkg clean. + + + +Now, compile the kernel: +fakeroot make-kpkg --revision=custom.1.0 kernel_image. +The version number of 1.0 can be changed at will; this is just +a version number that you will use to track your kernel builds. +Likewise, you can put any word you like in place of custom +(e.g., a host name). Kernel compilation may take quite a while, depending on +the power of your machine. + + + +If you require PCMCIA support, you'll also need to install the +pcmcia-source package. Unpack the gzipped tar file +as root in the directory /usr/src (it's important that +modules are found where they are expected to be found, namely, +/usr/src/modules). Then, as root, do make-kpkg +modules_image. + + + +Once the compilation is complete, you can install your custom kernel +like any package. As root, do dpkg -i +../kernel-image-&kernelversion;-subarchitecture_custom.1.0_&architecture;.deb. +The subarchitecture part is an optional +sub-architecture, + such as i586, +depending on what kernel options you set. +dpkg -i kernel-image... will install the +kernel, along with some other nice supporting files. For instance, +the System.map will be properly installed +(helpful for debugging kernel problems), and +/boot/config-&kernelversion; will be installed, +containing your current configuration set. Your new +kernel-image-&kernelversion; package is also clever +enough to automatically use your platform's boot-loader to run an +update on the booting, allowing you to boot without re-running the +boot loader. If you have created a modules package, e.g., if you have +PCMCIA, you'll need to install that package as well. + + + +It is time to reboot the system: read carefully any warning that the +above step may have produced, then shutdown -r now. + + + +For more information on kernel-package, read +the fine documentation in /usr/share/doc/kernel-package. + + + + diff --git a/en/post-install/new-to-unix.xml b/en/post-install/new-to-unix.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..50284c380 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/post-install/new-to-unix.xml @@ -0,0 +1,29 @@ + + + + + + If You Are New to Unix + + +If you are new to Unix, you probably should go out and buy some books +and do some reading. A lot of valuable information can also be found +in the Debian Reference. +This list of Unix FAQs contains a +number of UseNet documents which provide a nice historical reference. + + + +Linux is an implementation of Unix. The +Linux Documentation Project (LDP) +collects a number of HOWTOs and online books +relating to Linux. Most of these documents can be installed locally; +just install the doc-linux-html package (HTML +versions) or the doc-linux-text package (ASCII +versions), then look in /usr/share/doc/HOWTO. +International versions of the LDP HOWTOs are also available as Debian +packages. + + + + diff --git a/en/post-install/orientation.xml b/en/post-install/orientation.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..680979342 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/post-install/orientation.xml @@ -0,0 +1,109 @@ + + + + + Orienting Yourself to Debian + + +Debian is a little different from other distributions. Even if you're +familiar with Linux in other distributions, there are things you +should know about Debian to help you to keep your system in a good, +clean state. This chapter contains material to help you get oriented; +it is not intended to be a tutorial for how to use Debian, but just a +very brief glimpse of the system for the very rushed. + + + + Debian Packaging System + + +The most important concept to grasp is the Debian packaging system. +In essence, large parts of your system should be considered under the +control of the packaging system. These include: + + + + +/usr (excluding /usr/local) + + + + +/var (you could make +/var/local and be safe in there) + + + + +/bin + + + + +/sbin + + + + +/lib + + + + +For instance, if you replace /usr/bin/perl, that +will work, but then if you upgrade your perl +package, the file you put there will be replaced. Experts can get +around this by putting packages on hold in +aptitude. + + + +One of the best installation methods is apt. You can use the command +line version apt-get or full-screen text version +aptitude. Note apt will also let you merge +main, contrib, and non-free so you can have export-restricted packages +as well as standard versions. + + + + + Application Version Management + + + +Alternative versions of applications are managed by update-alternatives. If +you are maintaining multiple versions of your applications, read the +update-alternatives man page. + + + + + Cron Job Management + + +Any jobs under the purview of the system administrator should be in +/etc, since they are configuration files. If you +have a root cron job for daily, weekly, or monthly runs, put them in +/etc/cron.{daily,weekly,monthly}. These are +invoked from /etc/crontab, and will run in +alphabetic order, which serializes them. + + + +On the other hand, if you have a cron job that (a) needs to run as a +special user, or (b) needs to run at a special time or frequency, you +can use either /etc/crontab, or, better yet, +/etc/cron.d/whatever. These particular files +also have an extra field that allows you to stipulate the user under +which the cron job runs. + + + +In either case, you just edit the files and cron will notice them +automatically. There is no need to run a special command. For more +information see cron(8), crontab(5), and +/usr/share/doc/cron/README.Debian. + + + + diff --git a/en/post-install/post-install.xml b/en/post-install/post-install.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..fae552701 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/post-install/post-install.xml @@ -0,0 +1,14 @@ + + + + + Next Steps and Where to Go From Here + +&new-to-unix.xml; +&orientation.xml; +&reactivating-win.xml; +&further-reading.xml; +&kernel-baking.xml; +&rescue.xml; + + diff --git a/en/post-install/reactivating-win.xml b/en/post-install/reactivating-win.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..728585b9b --- /dev/null +++ b/en/post-install/reactivating-win.xml @@ -0,0 +1,72 @@ + + + + + + Reactivating DOS and Windows + + +After installing the base system and writing to the Master Boot +Record, you will be able to boot Linux, but probably nothing else. +This depends what you have chosen during the installation. This chapter +will describe how you can reactivate your old systems so that you can also +boot your DOS or Windows again. + + + +LILO is a boot manager with which you can also boot +other operating systems than Linux, which complies to PC +conventions. The boot manager is configured via +/etc/lilo.conf file. Whenever you edited this +file you have to run lilo afterwards. The reason +for this is that the changes will take place only when you call the +program. + + + +Important parts of the lilo.conf file are the +lines containing the image and +other keywords, as well as the lines following +those. They can be used to describe a system which can be booted by +LILO. Such a system can include a kernel +(image), a root partition, additional kernel +parameters, etc. as well as a configuration to boot another, non-Linux +(other) operating system. These keywords can +also be used more than once. The ordering of these systems within the +configuration file is important because it determines which system +will be booted automatically after, for instance, a timeout +(delay) presuming LILO +wasn't stopped by pressing the shift key. + + + +After a fresh install of Debian, just the current system is configured +for booting with LILO. If you want to boot another +Linux kernel, you have to edit the configuration file +/etc/lilo.conf to add the following lines: + + +&additional-lilo-image; + + +For a basic setup just the first two lines are necessary. If you want +to know more about the other two options please have a look at the +LILO documentation. This can be found in +/usr/share/doc/lilo/. The file which should be +read is Manual.txt. To have a quicker start into +the world of booting a system you can also look at the +LILO man pages lilo.conf for +an overview of configuration keywords and lilo +for description of the installation of the new configuration into the +boot sector. + + + +Notice that there are other boot loaders available in &debian;, such as +GRUB (in grub package), +CHOS (in chos package), +Extended-IPL (in extipl package), +loadlin (in loadlin package) etc. + + + diff --git a/en/post-install/rescue.xml b/en/post-install/rescue.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f920f6078 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/post-install/rescue.xml @@ -0,0 +1,71 @@ + + + + + Recovering a Broken System + + +Sometimes, things go wrong, and the system you've carefully installed is no +longer bootable. Perhaps the boot loader configuration broke while trying +out a change, or perhaps a new kernel you installed won't boot, or perhaps +cosmic rays hit your disk and flipped a bit in +/sbin/init. Regardless of the cause, you'll need to +have a system to work from while you fix it, and rescue mode can be useful +for this. + + + + + +To access rescue mode, type rescue at the +boot: prompt, or boot with the +rescue/enable=true boot parameter. You'll be shown +the first few screens of the installer, with a note in the corner of the +display to indicate that this is rescue mode, not a full installation. Don't +worry, your system is not about to be overwritten! Rescue mode simply takes +advantage of the hardware detection facilities available in the installer to +ensure that your disks, network devices, and so on are available to you +while repairing your system. + + + +Instead of the partitioning tool, you should now be presented with a list of +the partitions on your system, and asked to select one of them. Normally, +you should select the partition containing the root file system that you +need to repair. You may select partitions on RAID and LVM devices as well as +those created directly on disks. + + + +If possible, the installer will now present you with a shell prompt in the +file system you selected, which you can use to perform any necessary +repairs. + + +For example, if you need to reinstall the GRUB boot loader into the master +boot record of the first hard disk, you could enter the command +grub-install '(hd0)' to do so. + + + + +If the installer cannot run a usable shell in the root file system you +selected, perhaps because the file system is corrupt, then it will issue a +warning and offer to give you a shell in the installer environment instead. +You may not have as many tools available in this environment, but they will +often be enough to repair your system anyway. The root file system you +selected will be mounted on the /target directory. + + + +In either case, after you exit the shell, the system will reboot. + + + +Finally, note that repairing broken systems can be difficult, and this +manual does not attempt to go into all the things that might have gone wrong +or how to fix them. If you have problems, consult an expert. + + + diff --git a/en/post-install/shutdown.xml b/en/post-install/shutdown.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d838a38c2 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/post-install/shutdown.xml @@ -0,0 +1,25 @@ + + + + + + Shutting Down the System + + + +To shut down a running Linux system, you must not reboot with the +reset switch on the front or back of your computer, or just turn off +the computer. Linux must be shut down in a controlled manner, +otherwise files may be lost and disk damage incurred. You can press +the key combination Ctrl +Alt Del + or Control +Shift Power on Macintosh +systems. You may also log in as +root and type shutdown -h now, +reboot, or halt if +either of the key combinations do not work or you prefer to type +commands. + + + diff --git a/en/preface.xml b/en/preface.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b5ffe44b3 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/preface.xml @@ -0,0 +1,32 @@ + + + + + Installing &debian; &release; For &architecture; + + +We are delighted that you have decided to try Debian, and are +sure that you will find that Debian's GNU/Linux distribution is +unique. &debian; brings together high-quality free software +from around the world, integrating it into a coherent whole. We +believe that you will find that the result is truly more than the sum +of the parts. + + + +We understand that many of you want to install Debian without reading this +manual, and the Debian installer is designed to make this possible. If you +don't have time to read the whole Installation Guide right now, we recommend +that you read the Installation Howto, which will walk you through the basic +installation process, and links to the manual for more advanced topics or +for when things go wrong. The Installation Howto can be found in +. + + + +With that said, we hope that you have the time to read most of this manual, +and doing so will lead to a more informed and likely more successful +installation experience. + + + diff --git a/en/preparing/backup.xml b/en/preparing/backup.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b9355d822 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/preparing/backup.xml @@ -0,0 +1,41 @@ + + + + + Back Up Your Existing Data! + + +Before you start, make sure to back up every file that is now on your +system. If this is the first time a non-native operating system has +been installed on your computer, it's quite likely you will need to +re-partition your disk to make room for &debian;. Anytime you +partition your disk, you should count on losing everything on the +disk, no matter what program you use to do it. The programs used in +installation are quite reliable and most have seen years of use; but +they are also quite powerful and a false move can cost you. Even after +backing up be careful and think about your answers and actions. Two +minutes of thinking can save hours of unnecessary work. + + + +If you are creating a multi-boot system, make sure that you have the +distribution media of any other present operating systems on hand. +Especially if you repartition your boot drive, you might find that you +have to reinstall your operating system's boot loader, or in many +cases the whole operating system itself and all files on the affected +partitions. + + + + + +With the exception of the BVM and Motorola VMEbus computers, the only +supported installation method for m68k systems is booting from a local +disk or floppy using an AmigaOS/TOS/MacOS-based bootstrap, for these +machines you will need the original operating system in order to boot +Linux. In order to boot Linux on the BVM and Motorola VMEbus machines +you will need the BVMBug or 16xBug boot ROMs. + + + + diff --git a/en/preparing/bios-setup/i386.xml b/en/preparing/bios-setup/i386.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ed548ce9f --- /dev/null +++ b/en/preparing/bios-setup/i386.xml @@ -0,0 +1,332 @@ + + + + + Invoking the BIOS Set-Up Menu + + + +BIOS provides the basic functions needed to boot your machine to allow +your operating system to access your hardware. Your system probably +provides a BIOS set-up menu, which is used to configure the BIOS. +Before installing, you must ensure that your BIOS +is setup correctly; not doing so can lead to intermittent crashes or +an inability to install Debian. + + + +The rest of this section is lifted from the +, answering the question, How do I +enter the CMOS configuration menu?. How you access the BIOS (or +CMOS) configuration menu depends on who wrote your BIOS +software: + + + + + + + + AMI BIOS + + +Delete key during the POST (power on self test) + + + + + + Award BIOS + + + + CtrlAltEsc +, or Delete key during the POST + + + + +DTK BIOS + + +Esc key during the POST + + + + +IBM PS/2 BIOS + + + + CtrlAltInsert + +after + + CtrlAltDelete + + + + + + + Phoenix BIOS + + + + CtrlAltEsc + +or + + CtrlAltS + +or +F1 + + + + + + + +Information on invoking other BIOS routines can be found in +. + + + +Some &arch-title; machines don't have a CMOS configuration menu in the +BIOS. They require a software CMOS setup program. If you don't have +the Installation and/or Diagnostics diskette for your machine, you can +try using a shareware/freeware program. Try looking in +. + + + + + Boot Device Selection + + + +Many BIOS set-up menus allow you to select the devices that will be +used to bootstrap the system. Set this to look for a bootable +operating system on A: (the first floppy disk), +then optionally the first CD-ROM device (possibly appearing as +D: or E:), and then from +C: (the first hard disk). This setting enables +you to boot from either a floppy disk or a CD-ROM, which are the two +most common boot devices used to install Debian. + + + +If you have a newer SCSI controller and you have a CD-ROM device +attached to it, you are usually able to boot from the CD-ROM. All you +have to do is enable booting from a CD-ROM in the SCSI-BIOS of your +controller. + + + +Other popular option is to boot from a USB storage (also called USB +memory stick or USB key). Some BIOSes can boot USB storage directly, +and some cannot. You may need to configure your BIOS to boot from +a Removable drive or even a USB-ZIP to +get it to boot from the USB device. + + + +Here are some details about how to set the boot order. Remember to +reset the boot order after Linux is installed, so that you restart +your machine from the hard drive. + + + + + Changing the Boot Order on IDE Computers + + + + +As your computer starts, press the keys to enter the BIOS +utility. Often, it is the Delete key. However, +consult the hardware documentation for the exact keystrokes. + + + + +Find the boot sequence in the setup utility. Its location depends on +your BIOS, but you are looking for a field that lists drives. + + + + +Common entries on IDE machines are C, A, cdrom or A, C, cdrom. + + + + +C is the hard drive, and A is the floppy drive. + + + + +Change the boot sequence setting so that the CD-ROM or the +floppy is first. Usually, the Page Up or +Page Down keys cycle +through the possible choices. + + + + +Save your changes. Instructions on the screen tell you how to +save the changes on your computer. + + + + + + + Changing the Boot Order on SCSI Computers + + + + + +As your computer starts, press the keys to enter the SCSI setup +utility. + + + +You can start the SCSI setup utility after the memory check and +the message about how to start the BIOS utility displays when you +start your computer. + + + +The keystrokes you need depend on the utility. Often, it is +CtrlF2. +However, consult your hardware documentation for the +exact keystrokes. + + + + +Find the utility for changing the boot order. + + + + +Set the utility so that the SCSI ID of the CD drive is first on +the list. + + + + +Save your changes. Instructions on the screen tell you how to +save the changes on your computer. Often, you must press +F10. + + + + + + + + + + Miscellaneous BIOS Settings + + CD-ROM Settings + + +Some BIOS systems (such as Award BIOS) allow you to automatically set +the CD speed. You should avoid that, and instead set it to, say, the +lowest speed. If you get seek failed error +messages, this may be your problem. + + + + + Extended vs. Expanded Memory + + +If your system provides both extended and +expanded memory, set it so that there is as much +extended and as little expanded memory as possible. Linux requires +extended memory and cannot use expanded memory. + + + + + Virus Protection + + +Disable any virus-warning features your BIOS may provide. If you have +a virus-protection board or other special hardware, make sure it is +disabled or physically removed while running GNU/Linux. These aren't +compatible with GNU/Linux; moreover, due to the file system +permissions and protected memory of the Linux kernel, viruses are +almost unheard of + + +After installation you can enable Boot Sector protection if you +want. This offers no additional security in Linux but if you also run +Windows it may prevent a catastrophe. There is no need to tamper with +the Master Boot Record (MBR) after the boot manager has been set up. + + +. + + + + + Shadow RAM + + +Your motherboard may provide shadow RAM or BIOS +caching. You may see settings for Video BIOS Shadow, +C800-CBFF Shadow, etc. Disable +all shadow RAM. Shadow +RAM is used to accelerate access to the ROMs on your motherboard and +on some of the controller cards. Linux does not use these ROMs once it +has booted because it provides its own faster 32-bit software in place +of the 16-bit programs in the ROMs. Disabling the shadow RAM may make +some of it available for programs to use as normal memory. Leaving +the shadow RAM enabled may interfere with Linux access to hardware +devices. + + + + + Memory Hole + + +If your BIOS offers something like 15–16 MB Memory +Hole, please disable that. Linux expects to find memory there if +you have that much RAM. + + + +We have a report of an Intel Endeavor motherboard on which there is an +option called LFB or Linear Frame Buffer. +This had two settings: Disabled and 1 +Megabyte. Set it to 1 Megabyte. +When disabled, the installation floppy was not read correctly, and the +system eventually crashed. At this writing we don't understand what's +going on with this particular device — it just worked with that +setting and not without it. + + + + + + + Advanced Power Management + + +If your motherboard provides Advanced Power Management (APM), +configure it so that power management is controlled by APM. Disable +the doze, standby, suspend, nap, and sleep modes, and disable the hard +disk's power-down timer. Linux can take over control of these modes, +and can do a better job of power-management than the BIOS. + + + + diff --git a/en/preparing/bios-setup/m68k.xml b/en/preparing/bios-setup/m68k.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..4c7d4b178 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/preparing/bios-setup/m68k.xml @@ -0,0 +1,23 @@ + + + + + + Firmware Revisions and Existing OS Setup + + + +&arch-title; machines are generally self-configuring and do not require +firmware configuration. However, you should make sure that you have +the appropriate ROM and system patches. On the Macintosh, MacOS +version >= 7.1 is recommended because version 7.0.1 contains a bug in +the video drivers preventing the boot loader from deactivating the +video interrupts, resulting in a boot hang. On the BVM VMEbus systems +you should make sure you are using BVMBug revision G or higher boot ROMs. +The BVMBug boot ROMs do not come as standard on the BVM systems but are +available from BVM on request free of charge. + + + + + diff --git a/en/preparing/bios-setup/powerpc.xml b/en/preparing/bios-setup/powerpc.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b676a03bd --- /dev/null +++ b/en/preparing/bios-setup/powerpc.xml @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ + + + + + + Invoking OpenFirmware + + +There is normally no need to set up the BIOS (called OpenFirmware) on +&arch-title; systems. PReP and CHRP are equipped with OpenFirmware, +but unfortunately, the means you use to invoke it vary from +manufacturer to manufacturer. You'll have to consult the hardware +documentation which came with your machine. + + + +On &arch-title; Macintoshes, you invoke OpenFirmware with +Command option +O F while booting. Generally it +will check for these keystrokes after the chime, but the exact timing +varies from model to model. See + for more hints. + + + +The OpenFirmware prompt looks like this: + + +ok +0 > + + +Note that on older model &arch-title; Macs, the default and sometimes +hardwired I/O for OpenFirmware user interaction is through the serial +(modem) port. If you invoke OpenFirmware on one of these machines, you +will just see a black screen. In that case, a terminal program running +on another computer, connected to the modem port, is needed to +interact with OpenFirmware. + + + +The OpenFirmware on OldWorld Beige G3 machines, OF versions 2.0f1 +and 2.4, is broken. These machines will most likely not be able to +boot from the hard drive unless the firmware is patched. A firmware +patch is included in the System Disk 2.3.1 +utility, available from Apple at +. +After unpacking the utility in MacOS, and launching it, select the +Save button to have the firmware patches installed to nvram. + + + diff --git a/en/preparing/bios-setup/s390.xml b/en/preparing/bios-setup/s390.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7da892259 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/preparing/bios-setup/s390.xml @@ -0,0 +1,106 @@ + + + + + BIOS Setup + + +In order to install &debian; on a &arch-title; or zSeries +machine you have first boot a kernel into the system. The boot +mechanism of this platform is inherently different to other ones, +especially from PC-like systems: there are no floppy devices available +at all. You will notice another big difference while you work with +this platform: most (if not all) of the time you will work remote, +with the help of some client session software like telnet, or a +browser. This is due to that special system architecture where the +3215/3270 console is line-based instead of character-based. + + + +Linux on this platform runs either natively on the bare machine, in a +so-called LPAR (Logical Partition) or in a virtual machine supplied by +the VM system. You can use a boot tape on all of those systems; you +may use some other boot media, too, but those may not be generally +available. For example, you can use the virtual card reader of a +virtual machine, or boot from the HMC (Hardware Management Console) of +an LPAR if the HMC and this option is available for you. + + + +Before you actually perform an installation, you have to go over some +design and preparation steps. IBM has made documentation available +about the whole process, e.g. how to prepare an installation medium +and how actually boot from that medium. Duplicating that information +here is neither possible nor necessary. However, we will describe +here which kind of Debian-specific data is needed and where do you +find them. Based on both sources of information you have to prepare +your machine and the installation medium and to perform a boot from +it. When you see the welcome message in your client session join this +document again for the Debian-specific installation steps. + + + + + + Native and LPAR installations + + +Please refer to chapter 5 of the + +Linux for &arch-title; +Redbook and chapter 3.2 of the + +Linux for IBM eServer zSeries and &arch-title;: Distributions +Redbook on how to set up an LPAR for Linux. + + + + + + Installation as a VM guest + + + +Please refer to chapter 6 of the + +Linux for &arch-title; +Redbook and chapter 3.1 of the + +Linux for IBM eServer zSeries and &arch-title;: Distributions +Redbook on how to set up a VM guest for running Linux. + + + +You need to copy all the files from the generic +sub-directory to your CMS disk. Be sure to transfer +kernel.debian and +initrd.debian in binary mode with a fixed record +length of 80 characters. + + + + + + Setting up an installation server + + + +If you don't have a connection to the Internet (either directly or via +a web proxy) you need to create a local installation server that can +be accessed from your S/390. This server keeps all the packages +you want to install and must make them available using NFS, HTTP or +FTP. + + + +The installation server needs to copy the exact directory structure +from any &debian; mirror but of only the s390 and +architecture-independent files are required. You can also copy the +contents of all installation CDs into such a directory tree. + + + +FIXME: more information needed — from a Redbook? + + + diff --git a/en/preparing/bios-setup/sparc.xml b/en/preparing/bios-setup/sparc.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6b222a142 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/preparing/bios-setup/sparc.xml @@ -0,0 +1,103 @@ + + + + + Invoking OpenBoot + + + +OpenBoot provides the basic functions needed to boot the &arch-title; +architecture. This is rather similar in function to the BIOS in the +x86 architecture, although much nicer. The Sun boot PROMs have a +built-in forth interpreter which lets you do quite a number of things +with your machine, such as diagnostics, simple scripts, etc. + + + +To get to the boot prompt you need to hold down the +Stop key (on older type 4 keyboards, use the +L1 key, if you have a PC keyboard adapter, use +the Break key) and press the +A key. The boot PROM will give you a prompt, +either ok or >. It is +preferred to have the ok prompt. So if you get +the old style prompt, hit the n key to get the new +style prompt. + + + +If you are using a serial console, send a break to the machine. With Minicom, +use Ctrl-A F, with cu, hit Enter, then type +%~break. Consult the documentation of your terminal +emulator if you are using a different program. + + + + + + Boot Device Selection + + + +You can use OpenBoot to boot from specific devices, and also to change +your default boot device. However, you need to know some details +about how OpenBoot names devices; it's much different from Linux +device naming, described in . +Also, the command will vary a bit, depending on what version of +OpenBoot you have. More information about OpenBoot can be found in +the Sun OpenBoot Reference. + + + +Typically, with newer revisions, you can use OpenBoot device such as +floppy, cdrom, net, +disk, or disk2. These have the obvious +meanings; the net device is for booting from the network. +Additionally, the device name can specify a particular partition of a disk, +such as disk2:a to boot disk2, first partition. Full +OpenBoot device names have the form + + + +driver-name@ +unit-address: +device-arguments +. + +In older revisions of OpenBoot, device naming is a bit different: the +floppy device is called /fd, and SCSI disk devices are of +the form sd(controller, +disk-target-id, +disk-lun). The command +show-devs in newer OpenBoot revisions is useful +for viewing the currently configured devices. For full information, +whatever your revision, see the +Sun OpenBoot Reference. + + + +To boot from a specific device, use the command boot +device. You can set this +behavior as the default using the setenv +command. However, the name of the variable to set changed between +OpenBoot revisions. In OpenBoot 1.x, use the command +setenv boot-from +device. In later revisions of +OpenBoot, use the command setenv boot-device +device. Note, this is also +configurable using the eeprom command on Solaris, +or modifying the appropriate files in +/proc/openprom/options/, for example under Linux: + + +# echo disk1:1 > /proc/openprom/options/boot-device + + +and under Solaris: + + +eeprom boot-device=disk1:1 + + + + diff --git a/en/preparing/install-overview.xml b/en/preparing/install-overview.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7e2bab762 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/preparing/install-overview.xml @@ -0,0 +1,185 @@ + + + + + Overview of the Installation Process + + +First, just a note about re-installations. With Debian, a +circumstance that will require a complete re-installation of your +system is very rare; perhaps mechanical failure of the hard disk would +be the most common case. + + + +Many common operating systems may require a complete installation to +be performed when critical failures take place or for upgrades to new +OS versions. Even if a completely new installation isn't required, +often the programs you use must be re-installed to operate properly in +the new OS. + + + +Under &debian;, it is much more likely that your OS can be repaired +rather than replaced if things go wrong. Upgrades never require a +wholesale installation; you can always upgrade in-place. And the +programs are almost always compatible with successive OS releases. If +a new program version requires newer supporting software, the Debian +packaging system ensures that all the necessary software is +automatically identified and installed. The point is, much effort has +been put into avoiding the need for re-installation, so think of it as +your very last option. The installer is not +designed to re-install over an existing system. + + + +Here's a road map for the steps you will take during the installation +process. + + + + + + +Back up any existing data or documents on the hard disk where you +plan to install. + + + + +Gather information about your computer and any needed documentation, +before starting the installation. + + + + +Create partition-able space for Debian on your hard disk. + + + + +Locate and/or download the installer software and any specialized +driver files your machine requires (except Debian CD users). + + + + +Set up boot tapes/floppies/USB sticks, or place boot files (most Debian +CD users can boot from one of the CDs). + + + + +Boot the installation system. + + + + +Select installation language. + + + + +Activate the ethernet network connection, if available. + + + + + +Configure one network interface. + + + + +Open a ssh connection to the new system. + + + + +Attach one or more DASDs (Direct Access Storage Device). + + + + + +Create and mount the partitions on which Debian will be installed. + + + + +Watch the automatic download/install/setup of the +base system. + + + + +Install a boot loader +which can start up &debian; and/or your existing system. + + + + +Load the newly installed system for the first time, and make some +initial system settings. + + + + +Open a ssh connection to the new system. + + + + +Install additional software (tasks +and/or packages), at your discretion. + + + + + + +If you have problems during the installation, it helps to know which +packages are involved in which steps. Introducing the leading software +actors in this installation drama: + + + +The installer software, debian-installer, is +the primary concern of this manual. It detects hardware and loads +appropriate drivers, uses dhcp-client to set up the +network connection, and runs debootstrap to install +the base system packages. Many more actors play smaller parts in this process, +but debian-installer has completed its task when +you load the new system for the first time. + + + +Upon loading the new base system, base-config +supervises adding users, setting a time zone (via +tzsetup), and setting up the +package installation system (using apt-setup). It then +launches tasksel which can be used to select large +groups of related programs, and in turn can run aptitude +which allows you to choose individual software packages. + + + +When debian-installer finishes, before the +first system load, you have only a very basic command line driven +system. The graphical interface which displays windows on your monitor +will not be installed unless you select it during the final steps, +with either tasksel or +aptitude. It's optional because many &debian; +systems are servers which don't really have any need for a graphical +user interface to do their job. + + + +Just be aware that the X system is completely separate from +debian-installer, and in fact is much more +complicated. Installation and trouble shooting of the X window +installation is not within the scope of this manual. + + + + diff --git a/en/preparing/minimum-hardware-reqts.xml b/en/preparing/minimum-hardware-reqts.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3dffd6e91 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/preparing/minimum-hardware-reqts.xml @@ -0,0 +1,135 @@ + + + + +Meeting Minimum Hardware Requirements + + +Once you have gathered information about your computer's hardware, +check that your hardware will let you do the type of installation +that you want to do. + + + +Depending on your needs, you might manage with less than some of the +recommended hardware listed in the table below. However, most users +risk being frustrated if they ignore these suggestions. + + + +A Pentium 100 is the minimum recommended for desktop +systems, and a Pentium II-300 for a Server. + + + +A 68030 or better processor is recommended for m68k +installs. You may get by with a little less drive space than shown. + + + +Any OldWorld or NewWorld PowerPC can serve well +as a Desktop System. For servers, a minimum 132-Mhz machine is +recommended. + + + + +Recommended Minimum System Requirements + + + + Install TypeRAMHard Drive + + + + + + No desktop + 24 megabytes + 450 megabytes + + With Desktop + 64 megabytes + 1 gigabyte + + Server + 128 megabytes + 4 gigabytes + + +
+ + + +Here is a sampling of some common Debian system configurations. +You can also get an idea of the disk space used by related groups +of programs by referring to . + + + + + + Standard Server + + +This is a small server profile, useful for a stripped down server +which does not have a lot of niceties for shell users. It includes an +FTP server, a web server, DNS, NIS, and POP. For these 100MB of disk +space would suffice, and then you would need to add space +for any data you serve up. + + + + + + Desktop + + +A standard desktop box, including the X window system, full desktop +environments, sound, editors, etc. You'll need about 2GB using the +standard desktop task, though it can be done in far less. + + + + + + Work Console + + +A more stripped-down user machine, without the X window system or X +applications. Possibly suitable for a laptop or mobile computer. The +size is around 140MB. + + + + + + Developer + + +A desktop setup with all the development packages, such as Perl, C, +C++, etc. Size is around 475MB. Assuming you are adding X11 and some +additional packages for other uses, you should plan around 800MB for +this type of machine. + + + + + + +Remember that these sizes don't include all the other materials which +are usually to be found, such as user files, mail, and data. It is +always best to be generous when considering the space for your own +files and data. Notably, the /var partition contains +a lot of state information specific to Debian in addition to its regular +contents like logfiles. The +dpkg files (with information on all installed +packages) can easily consume 20MB. Also, +apt-get puts downloaded packages here before they are +installed. You should +usually allocate at least 100MB for /var. + + + + + diff --git a/en/preparing/needed-info.xml b/en/preparing/needed-info.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7474a9107 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/preparing/needed-info.xml @@ -0,0 +1,416 @@ + + + + + Information You Will Need + + + Documentation + + + Installation Manual + + + +This document you are now reading, in plain ASCII, HTML or PDF format. + + + + + +&list-install-manual-files; + + + + + +The document you are now reading, which is the official version of the +Installation Guide for the &releasename; release of Debian; available +in various formats and +translations. + + + + + +The document you are now reading, which is a development version of the +Installation Guide for the next release of Debian; available in +various formats and +translations. + + + + + + + Hardware documentation + + +Often contains useful information on configuring or using your hardware. + + + + + + + +Linux Hardware Compatibility HOWTO + + + + + +Linux/m68k FAQ + + + + + +Linux/Alpha FAQ + + + + + +Linux for SPARC Processors FAQ + + + + + +Linux/Mips website + + + + + + + + + &arch-title; Hardware References + + + +Installation instructions and device drivers (DASD, XPRAM, Console, + tape, z90 crypto, chandev, network) for Linux on &arch-title; using + kernel 2.4 + + + + + + +Device Drivers and Installation Commands + + + + + + +IBM Redbook describing how Linux can be combined with z/VM on +zSeries and &arch-title; hardware. + + + + + + + +Linux for &arch-title; + + + + + + +IBM Redbook describing the Linux distributions available for the +mainframe. It has no chapter about Debian but the basic installation +concepts are the same across all &arch-title; distributions. + + + + + + + +Linux for IBM eServer zSeries and &arch-title;: Distributions + + + + + + + + + Finding Sources of Hardware Information + + +In many cases, the installer will be able to automatically detect your +hardware. But to be prepared, we do recommend familiarizing +yourself with your hardware before the install. + + + +Hardware information can be gathered from: + + + + + + +The manuals that come with each piece of hardware. + + + + +The BIOS setup screens of your computer. You can view these screens +when you start your computer by pressing a combination of keys. Check +your manual for the combination. Often, it is the Delete key. + + + + +The cases and boxes for each piece of hardware. + + + + + +The System window in the Windows Control Panel. + + + + + +System commands or tools in another operating system, including file +manager displays. This source is especially useful for information +about RAM and hard drive memory. + + + + +Your system administrator or Internet Service Provider. These +sources can tell you the settings you need to set up your +networking and e-mail. + + + + + + + +Hardware Information Needed for an Install + + + + HardwareInformation You Might Need + + + + + + Hard Drives + How many you have. + +Their order on the system. + + Whether IDE or SCSI (most computers are IDE). + +Available free space. +Partitions. + + Partitions where other operating systems are installed. + + + + Monitor + Model and manufacturer. + +Resolutions supported. +Horizontal refresh rate. +Vertical refresh rate. + + Color depth (number of colors) supported. + +Screen size. + + + Mouse + Type: serial, PS/2, or USB. + +Port. +Manufacturer. +Number of buttons. + + + Network + Model and manufacturer. + +Type of adapter. + + + Printer + Model and manufacturer. + +Printing resolutions supported. + + + Video Card + Model and manufacturer. + +Video RAM available. + + Resolutions and color depths supported (these should be + checked against your monitor's capabilities). + + + + DASD + Device number(s). + +Available free space. + + + Network + Type of adapter. + +Device numbers. +Relative adapter number for OSA cards. + +
+ + + + + + Hardware Compatibility + + + +Many brand name products work without trouble on Linux. Moreover, +hardware for Linux is improving daily. However, Linux still does not +run as many different types of hardware as some operating systems. + + + +In particular, Linux usually cannot run hardware that requires a +running version of Windows to work. + + + +Although some Windows-specific hardware can be made to run on Linux, +doing so usually requires extra effort. In addition, Linux drivers +for Windows-specific hardware are usually specific to one Linux +kernel. Therefore, they can quickly become obsolete. + + + +So called win-modems are the most common type of this hardware. +However, printers and other equipment may also be Windows-specific. + + + +You can check hardware compatibility by: + + + + +Checking manufacturers' web sites for new drivers. + + + + +Looking at web sites or manuals for information about emulation. +Lesser known brands can sometimes use the drivers or settings for +better-known ones. + + + + +Checking hardware compatibility lists for Linux on web sites +dedicated to your architecture. + + + + +Searching the Internet for other users' experiences. + + + + + + + + + Network Settings + + + +If your computer is connected to a network 24 hours a day (i.e., an +Ethernet or equivalent connection — not a PPP connection), you +should ask your network's system administrator for this information. + + + + +Your host name (you may be able to decide this on your own). + + + + +Your domain name. + + + + +Your computer's IP address. + + + + +The netmask to use with your network. + + + + +The IP address of the default gateway system you should route to, if +your network has a gateway. + + + + +The system on your network that you should use as a DNS (Domain Name +Service) server. + + + + + + +On the other hand, if your administrator tells you that a DHCP server +is available and is recommended, then you don't need this information +because the DHCP server will provide it directly to your computer +during the installation process. + + + +If you use a wireless network, you should also find out: + + + + +ESSID of your wireless network. + + + + +WEP security key (if applicable). + + + + + + + + diff --git a/en/preparing/non-debian-partitioning.xml b/en/preparing/non-debian-partitioning.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6e444855a --- /dev/null +++ b/en/preparing/non-debian-partitioning.xml @@ -0,0 +1,198 @@ + + + + + Pre-Partitioning for Multi-Boot Systems + + +Partitioning your disk simply refers to the act of breaking up your +disk into sections. Each section is then independent of the others. +It's roughly equivalent to putting up walls inside a house; if you add +furniture to one room it doesn't affect any other room. + + + +Whenever this section talks about disks you should translate +this into a DASD or VM minidisk in the &arch-title; world. Also a machine +means an LPAR or VM guest in this case. + + + +If you already have an operating system on your system + + +(Windows 9x, Windows NT/2000/XP, OS/2, MacOS, Solaris, FreeBSD, …) + + + +(Tru64 (Digital UNIX), OpenVMS, Windows NT, FreeBSD, …) + + + +(VM, z/OS, OS/390, …) + + + +(Amiga OS, Atari TOS, Mac OS, …) + + +and want to stick Linux on the same disk, you will need to repartition +the disk. Debian requires its own hard disk partitions. It cannot be +installed on Windows or MacOS partitions. It may be able to share some +partitions with other Linux systems, but that's not covered here. At +the very least you will need a dedicated partition for the Debian +root. + + + +You can find information about your current partition setup by using +a partitioning tool for your current operating system, such as fdisk or PartitionMagic, such as Drive Setup, HD Toolkit, or MacTools, such as HD SC Setup, HDToolBox, or SCSITool, such as the VM diskmap. Partitioning tools always +provide a way to show existing partitions without making changes. + + + +In general, changing a partition with a file system already on +it will destroy any information there. Thus you should always make +backups before doing any repartitioning. Using the analogy of the +house, you would probably want to move all the furniture out of the +way before moving a wall or you risk destroying it. + + + +FIXME: write about HP-UX disks? + + + +If your computer has more than one hard disk, you may want to dedicate +one of the hard disks completely to Debian. If so, you don't need to +partition that disk before booting the installation system; the +installer's included partitioning program can handle the job nicely. + + + +If your machine has only one hard disk, and you would like to +completely replace the current operating system with &debian;, +you also can wait to partition as part of the installation process +(), after you have booted the +installation system. However this only works if you plan to boot the +installer system from tapes, CD-ROM or files on a connected machine. +Consider: if you boot from files placed on the hard disk, and then +partition that same hard disk within the installation system, thus +erasing the boot files, you'd better hope the installation is +successful the first time around. At the least in this case, you +should have some alternate means of reviving your machine like the +original system's installation tapes or CDs. + + + +If your machine already has multiple partitions, and enough space can +be provided by deleting and replacing one or more of them, then you +too can wait and use the Debian installer's partitioning program. You +should still read through the material below, because there may be +special circumstances like the order of the existing partitions within +the partition map, that force you to partition before installing +anyway. + + + +If your machine has a FAT or NTFS filesystem, as used by DOS and Windows, +you can wait and use Debian installer's partitioning program to +resize the filesystem. + + + +If none of the above apply, you'll need to partition your hard disk before +starting the installation to create partition-able space for +Debian. If some of the partitions will be owned by other operating +systems, you should create those partitions using native operating +system partitioning programs. We recommend that you do +not attempt to create partitions for &debian; +using another operating system's tools. Instead, you should just +create the native operating system's partitions you will want to +retain. + + + +If you are going to install more than one operating system on the same +machine, you should install all other system(s) before proceeding with +Linux installation. Windows and other OS installations may destroy +your ability to start Linux, or encourage you to reformat non-native +partitions. + + + +You can recover from these actions or avoid them, but installing +the native system first saves you trouble. + + + +In order for OpenFirmware to automatically boot &debian; the Linux +partitions should appear before all other partitions on the disk, +especially MacOS boot partitions. This should be kept in mind when +pre-partitioning; you should create a Linux placeholder partition to +come before the other bootable partitions on the +disk. (The small partitions dedicated to Apple disk drivers are not +bootable.) You can delete the placeholder with the Linux partition +tools later during the actual install, and replace it with Linux +partitions. + + + +If you currently have one hard disk with one partition (a common setup +for desktop computers), and you want to multi-boot the native +operating system and Debian, you will need to: + + + + +Back up everything on the computer. + + + + +Boot from the native operating system installer media such as CD-ROM +or tapes. + +When booting from a MacOS CD, hold the +c key while +booting to force the CD to become the active MacOS system. + + + + +Use the native partitioning tools to create native system +partition(s). Leave either a place holder partition or free space for +&debian;. + + + + +Install the native operating system on its new partition. + + + + +Boot back into the native system to verify everything's OK, + and to download the Debian installer boot files. + + + + +Boot the Debian installer to continue installing Debian. + + + + + + +&nondeb-part-alpha.xml; +&nondeb-part-i386.xml; +&nondeb-part-m68k.xml; +&nondeb-part-sparc.xml; +&nondeb-part-powerpc.xml; + + diff --git a/en/preparing/nondeb-part/alpha.xml b/en/preparing/nondeb-part/alpha.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..39b6f876d --- /dev/null +++ b/en/preparing/nondeb-part/alpha.xml @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ + + + + + Partitioning in Tru64 UNIX + + +Tru64 UNIX, formerly known as Digital UNIX, which is in turn formerly +known as OSF/1, uses the partitioning scheme similar to the BSD disk +label, which allows for up to eight partitions per disk drive. The +partitions are numbered 1 through to 8 in +Linux and lettered a through to +h in UNIX. Linux kernels 2.2 and higher always correspond +1 to a, 2 to b +and so on. For example, rz0e in Tru64 UNIX would most +likely be called sda5 in Linux. + + + +Partitions in a Tru64 disk label may overlap. Moreover, if this disk +will be used from Tru64, the c partition is required to span +the entire disk (thus overlapping all other non-empty partitions). Under +Linux this makes sda3 identical to +sda (sdb3 to +sdb, if present, and so on). However, the partman +partitioning tool used by &d-i; cannot handle overlapping partitions at +present. As a result, it is currently not recommended to share disks +between Tru64 and Debian. Partitions on Tru64 disks can be mounted +under Debian after installation has been completed. + + + +Another conventional requirement is for the a partition to +start from the beginning of the disk, so that it always includes the boot +block with the disk label. If you intend to boot Debian from that disk, you +need to size it at least 2MB to fit aboot and perhaps a kernel. +Note that this partition is only required for compatibility; you must +not put a file system onto it, or you'll destroy data. + + + +It is possible, and indeed quite reasonable, to share a swap partition +between UNIX and Linux. In this case it will be needed to do a +mkswap on that partition every time the system is rebooted +from UNIX into Linux, as UNIX will damage the swap signature. You may +want to run mkswap from the Linux start-up scripts before +adding swap space with swapon -a. + + + +If you want to mount UNIX partitions under Linux, note that Digital UNIX +can use two different file system types, UFS and AdvFS, of which Linux +only understands the former. + + + + + Partitioning in Windows NT + + + +Windows NT uses the PC-style partition table. If you are manipulating +existing FAT or NTFS partitions, it is recommended that you use the +native Windows NT tools (or, more conveniently, you can also +repartition your disk from the AlphaBIOS setup menu). Otherwise, it +is not really necessary to partition from Windows; the Linux +partitioning tools will generally do a better job. Note that when you +run NT, the Disk Administrator may offer you to write a harmless +signature on non-Windows disks if you have any. +Never let it do that, as this signature will destroy +the partition information. + + + +If you plan to boot Linux from an ARC/AlphaBIOS/ARCSBIOS console, you +will need a (small) FAT partition for MILO. 5 MB is quite +sufficient. If Windows NT is installed, its 6 MB bootstrap partition +can be employed for this purpose. Debian &releasename; does not support +installing MILO. If you already have MILO installed on your system, or +install MILO from other media, Debian can still be booted from ARC. + + + diff --git a/en/preparing/nondeb-part/i386.xml b/en/preparing/nondeb-part/i386.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5509b3d27 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/preparing/nondeb-part/i386.xml @@ -0,0 +1,120 @@ + + + + + Partitioning From DOS or Windows + + +If you are manipulating existing FAT or NTFS partitions, it is +recommended that you either use the scheme below or native Windows or +DOS tools. Otherwise, it is not really necessary to partition from DOS +or Windows; the Linux partitioning tools will generally do a better +job. + + + +But if you have a large IDE disk, and are using neither LBA addressing, +overlay drivers (sometimes provided by hard disk manufacturers), nor a +new (post 1998) BIOS that supports large disk access extensions, then +you must locate your Debian boot partition carefully. In this case, +you will have to put the boot partition into the first 1024 cylinders +of your hard drive (usually around 524 megabytes, without BIOS +translation). This may require that you move an existing FAT or NTFS +partition. + + + + + Lossless Repartitioning When Starting From DOS, Win-32 or OS/2 + + + + +One of the most common installations is onto a system that already +contains DOS (including Windows 3.1), Win32 (such as Windows 95, 98, Me, +NT, 2000, XP), or OS/2, and it is desired to put Debian onto the same disk +without destroying the previous system. Note that the installer supports +resizing of FAT and NTFS filesystems as used by DOS and Windows. Simply +start the installer, select the option to Manually +edit partition table , select the partition to +resize, and specify its new size. +So in most cases you should not need to use the method described below. + + + +Before going any further, you should have decided how you will be +dividing up the disk. The method in this section will only split a +partition into two pieces. One will contain the original OS and the +other will be used for Debian. During the installation of Debian, you +will be given the opportunity to use the Debian portion of the disk as you +see fit, i.e., as swap or as a file system. + + + +The idea is to move all the data on the partition to the beginning, +before changing the partition information, so that nothing will be +lost. It is important that you do as little as possible between the +data movement and repartitioning to minimize the chance of a file +being written near the end of the partition as this will decrease the +amount of space you can take from the partition. + + + +The first thing needed is a copy of fips which is +available in the tools/ directory on your nearest Debian +mirror. Unzip the archive and copy the files +RESTORRB.EXE, FIPS.EXE and +ERRORS.TXT to a bootable floppy. A bootable floppy can +be created using the command sys a: under DOS. +fips comes with very good documentation which you may +want to read. You will definitely need to read the documentation if +you use a disk compression driver or a disk manager. Create the disk +and read the documentation before you defragment the disk. + + + +The next thing needed is to move all the data to the beginning of the +partition. defrag, which comes standard with DOS 6.0 and +later, can easily do the job. See the fips documentation +for a list of other software that may do the trick. Note that if you +have Windows 9x, you must run defrag from there, since +DOS doesn't understand VFAT, which is used to support for long +filenames, used in Windows 95 and higher. + + + +After running the defragmenter (which can take a while on a large +disk), reboot with the fips disk you created in the +floppy drive. Simply type a:\fips and follow the directions. + + + +Note that there are many other partition managers out there, in +case fips doesn't do the trick for you. + + + + + Partitioning for DOS + + + +If you are partitioning for DOS drives, or changing the size of DOS +partitions, using Linux tools, many people experience problems working +with the resulting FAT partitions. For instance, some have reported +slow performance, consistent problems with scandisk, or +other weird errors in DOS or Windows. + + + +Apparently, whenever you create or resize a partition for DOS use, +it's a good idea to fill the first few sectors with zeros. Do this +prior to running DOS's format command, from Linux: + + +# dd if=/dev/zero of=/dev/hdXX bs=512 count=4 + + + + + diff --git a/en/preparing/nondeb-part/m68k.xml b/en/preparing/nondeb-part/m68k.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..09f677851 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/preparing/nondeb-part/m68k.xml @@ -0,0 +1,127 @@ + + + + + Partitioning in AmigaOS + + +If you are running AmigaOS, you can use the HDToolBox +program to adjust your native partitions prior to installation. + + + + + Partitioning in Atari TOS + + +Atari partition IDs are three ASCII characters, use LNX for +data and SWP for swap partitions. If using the low memory +installation method, a small Minix partition is also needed (about 2 MB), +for which the partition ID is MNX. Failure to set the +appropriate partition IDs not only prevents the Debian installation process +from recognizing the partitions, but also results in TOS attempting to use +the Linux partitions, which confuses the hard disk driver and renders the +whole disk inaccessible. + + + +There are a multitude of third party partitioning tools available (the +Atari harddisk utility doesn't permit changing the +partition ID); this manual cannot give detailed descriptions for all +of them. The following description covers SCSITool (from +Hard+Soft GmBH). + + + + +Start SCSITool and select the disk you want to partition +(Disk menu, item select). + + + + +From the Partition menu, select either +New to add new partitions or change the +existing partition sizes, or Change to +change one specific partition. Unless you have already created +partitions with the right sizes and only want to change the partition +ID, New is probably the best choice. + + + + +For the New choice, select +existing in the dialog box +prompting the initial settings. The next window shows a list of +existing partitions which you can adjust using the scroll buttons, or +by clicking in the bar graphs. The first column in the partition list +is the partition type; just click on the text field to edit it. When +you are finished changing partition settings, save the changes by +leaving the window with the OK button. + + + + +For the Change option, select the partition +to change in the selection list, and select other +systems in the dialog box. The +next window lists detailed information about the location of this +partition, and lets you change the partition ID. Save changes by +leaving the window with the OK button. + + + + +Write down the Linux names for each of the partitions you created or +changed for use with Linux — see . + + + + +Quit SCSITool using the +Quit item from the File +menu. The computer will reboot to make sure the changed partition +table is used by TOS. If you changed any TOS/GEM partitions, they will +be invalidated and have to be reinitialized (we told you to back up +everything on the disk, didn't we?). + + + + + + +There is a partitioning tool for Linux/m68k called +atari-fdisk in the installation system, but for now we +recommend you partition your disk using a TOS partition editor or some +disk tool. If your partition editor doesn't have an option to edit the +partition type, you can do this crucial step at a later stage (from +the booted temporary install RAMdisk). SCSITool is only +one of the partition editors we know of which supports selection of +arbitrary partition types. There may be others; select the tool that +suits your needs. + + + + + Partitioning in MacOS + + +Partitioning tools for Macintosh tested include pdisk, +HD SC Setup 7.3.5 (Apple), HDT 1.8 (FWB), +SilverLining (LaCie), and DiskTool (Tim +Endres, GPL). Full versions are required for HDT and +SilverLining. The Apple tool requires a patch in order +to recognize third-party disks (a description on how to patch HD +SC Setup using ResEdit can be found at +). + + + +For IDE based Macs, you need to use Apple Drive Setup to create +empty space for the Linux partitions, and complete the partitioning under +Linux, or use the MacOS version of pdisk available from the MkLinux FTP +server. + + + + diff --git a/en/preparing/nondeb-part/powerpc.xml b/en/preparing/nondeb-part/powerpc.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..948995d9e --- /dev/null +++ b/en/preparing/nondeb-part/powerpc.xml @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ + + + + + MacOS/OSX Partitioning + + + +The Apple Drive Setup application can be found in the +Utilities folder on the MacOS CD. It will not adjust existing +partitions; it is limited to partitioning the entire disk at once. The +disk driver partitions don't show up in Drive Setup. + + + +Remember to create a placeholder partition for GNU/Linux, preferably +positioned first in the disk layout. it doesn't matter what type it +is, it will be deleted and replaced later inside the &debian; installer. + + + +If you are planning to install both MacOS 9 and OS X, it is best to +create separate partitions for OS 9 and OS X. If they are installed on +the same partition, Startup Disk (and reboot) must be used to select +between the two; the choice between the two systems can't be made at +boot time. With separate partitions, separate options for OS 9 and OS +X will appear when holding the option key at boot time, and separate +options can be installed in the yaboot boot menu as well. Also, +Startup Disk will de-bless all other mountable partitions, which can +affect GNU/Linux booting. Both OS 9 and OS X partitions will be +accessible from either OS 9 or OS X. + + + +GNU/Linux is unable to access information on UFS partitions, but does +support HFS+ (aka MacOS Extended) partitions. OS X requires one of these +two types for its boot partition. MacOS 9 can be installed on either HFS +(aka MacOS Standard) or HFS+. To share information between the MacOS and +GNU/Linux systems, an exchange partition is handy. HFS, HFS+ and MS-DOS FAT +partitions are supported by both MacOS and Linux. + + + diff --git a/en/preparing/nondeb-part/sparc.xml b/en/preparing/nondeb-part/sparc.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2784f6a2b --- /dev/null +++ b/en/preparing/nondeb-part/sparc.xml @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ + + + + + Partitioning from SunOS + + + +It's perfectly fine to partition from SunOS; in fact, if you intend to +run both SunOS and Debian on the same machine, it is recommended that +you partition using SunOS prior to installing Debian. The Linux +kernel understands Sun disk labels, so there are no problems there. +Just make sure you leave room for the Debian root partition within the +first 1GB area of the boot disk. You can also place the kernel image on a +UFS partition if that is easier than putting the root partition there. +SILO supports booting Linux and SunOS from either EXT2 (Linux), UFS +(SunOS), romfs and iso9660 (CDROM) partitions. + + + + + Partitioning from Linux or another OS + + + +Whatever system you are using to partition, make sure you create a +Sun disk label on your boot disk. This is the only kind of +partition scheme that the OpenBoot PROM understands, and so it's the +only scheme from which you can boot. In fdisk, the +s key is used to create Sun disk labels. You only need to do this +on drives that do not already have a Sun disk label. If you are using a +drive that was previously formatted using a PC (or other architecture) you +must create a new disk label, or problems with the disk geometry will most +likely occur. + + + +You will probably be using SILO as your boot loader (the +small program which runs the operating system kernel). +SILO has certain requirements for partition sizes and +location; see . + + + diff --git a/en/preparing/pre-install-bios-setup.xml b/en/preparing/pre-install-bios-setup.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6e992c0d7 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/preparing/pre-install-bios-setup.xml @@ -0,0 +1,151 @@ + + + + + Pre-Installation Hardware and Operating System Setup + + +This section will walk you through pre-installation hardware setup, if +any, that you will need to do prior to installing Debian. Generally, +this involves checking and possibly changing firmware settings for +your system. The firmware is the core software used by the +hardware; it is most critically invoked during the bootstrap process +(after power-up). Known hardware issues affecting the reliability of +&debian; on your system are also highlighted. + + + +&bios-setup-i386.xml; +&bios-setup-m68k.xml; +&bios-setup-powerpc.xml; +&bios-setup-sparc.xml; +&bios-setup-s390.xml; + + Hardware Issues to Watch Out For + + +Many people have tried operating their 90 MHz CPU at 100 MHz, etc. It +sometimes works, but is sensitive to temperature and other factors and +can actually damage your system. One of the authors of this document +over-clocked his own system for a year, and then the system started +aborting the gcc program with an unexpected signal +while it was compiling the operating system kernel. Turning the CPU +speed back down to its rated value solved the problem. + + + +The gcc compiler is often the first thing to die +from bad memory modules (or other hardware problems that change data +unpredictably) because it builds huge data structures that it +traverses repeatedly. An error in these data structures will cause it +to execute an illegal instruction or access a non-existent +address. The symptom of this will be gcc dying from +an unexpected signal. + + + +Atari TT RAM boards are notorious for RAM problems under Linux; if you +encounter any strange problems, try running at least the kernel in +ST-RAM. Amiga users may need to exclude RAM using a booter memfile. + + + +FIXME: more description of this needed. + + + + + +The very best motherboards support parity RAM and will actually tell +you if your system has a single-bit error in RAM. Unfortunately, they +don't have a way to fix the error, thus they generally crash +immediately after they tell you about the bad RAM. Still, it's better +to be told you have bad memory than to have it silently insert errors +in your data. Thus, the best systems have motherboards that support +parity and true-parity memory modules; see +. + + + +If you do have true-parity RAM and your motherboard can handle it, be +sure to enable any BIOS settings that cause the motherboard to +interrupt on memory parity errors. + + + + The Turbo Switch + + +Many systems have a turbo switch that controls +the speed of the CPU. Select the high-speed setting. If your BIOS +allows you to disable software control of the turbo switch (or +software control of CPU speed), do so and lock the system in +high-speed mode. We have one report that on a particular system, while +Linux is auto-probing (looking for hardware devices) it can +accidentally touch the software control for the turbo switch. + + + + + Cyrix CPUs and Floppy Disk Errors + + +Many users of Cyrix CPUs have had to disable the cache in their +systems during installation, because the floppy disk has errors if +they do not. If you have to do this, be sure to re-enable your cache +when you are finished with installation, as the system runs +much slower with the cache disabled. + + + +We don't think this is necessarily the fault of the Cyrix CPU. It may +be something that Linux can work around. We'll continue to look into +the problem. For the technically curious, we suspect a problem with +the cache being invalid after a switch from 16-bit to 32-bit code. + + + + + Peripheral Hardware Settings + + +You may have to change some settings or jumpers on your computer's +peripheral cards. Some cards have setup menus, while others rely on +jumpers. This document cannot hope to provide complete information on +every hardware device; what it hopes to provide is useful tips. + + + +If any cards provide mapped memory, the memory should be +mapped somewhere between 0xA0000 and 0xFFFFF (from 640K to just below 1 +megabyte) or at an address at least 1 megabyte greater than the total +amount of RAM in your system. + + + + + + USB BIOS support and keyboards + + +If you have no AT-style keyboard and only a USB model, you may need +to enable legacy AT keyboard emulation in your BIOS setup. Only do this if +the installation system fails to use your keyboard in USB mode. Conversely, +for some systems (especially laptops) you may need to disable legacy USB +support if your keyboard does not respond. +Consult your main board manual and look in the BIOS for Legacy +keyboard emulation or USB keyboard support options. + + + + + More than 64 MB RAM + + +The Linux Kernel cannot always detect what amount of RAM you have. If +this is the case please look at . + + + + + diff --git a/en/preparing/preparing.xml b/en/preparing/preparing.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..cdedadffc --- /dev/null +++ b/en/preparing/preparing.xml @@ -0,0 +1,21 @@ + + + + + Before Installing &debian; + + +This chapter deals with the preparation for installing Debian before you even +boot the installer. This includes backing up your data, gathering information +about your hardware, and locating any necessary information. + + + +&install-overview.xml; +&backup.xml; +&needed-info.xml; +&minimum-hardware-reqts.xml; +&non-debian-partitioning.xml; +&pre-install-bios-setup.xml; + + diff --git a/en/using-d-i/components.xml b/en/using-d-i/components.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b53f88ef5 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/using-d-i/components.xml @@ -0,0 +1,160 @@ + + + + + Using Individual Components + + +In this section we will describe each installer component in +detail. The components have been grouped into stages that should +be recognizable for users. They are presented in the order they +appear during the install. Note that not all modules will be used +for every installation; which modules are actually used depends on +the installation method you use and on your hardware. + + + + + Setting up Debian Installer and Hardware Configuration + + +Let's assume the Debian Installer has booted and you are facing its +first screen. At this time, the capabilities of &d-i; are still quite +limited. It doesn't know much about your hardware, preferred language, +or even the task it should perform. Don't worry. Because &d-i; is quite +clever, it can automatically probe your hardware, locate the rest +of its components and upgrade itself to a capable installation system. + +However, you still need to help &d-i; with some information it can't +determine automatically (like selecting your preferred language, keyboard +layout or desired network mirror). + + + +You will notice that &d-i; performs hardware detection +several times during this stage. The first time is targeted specifically +at the hardware needed to load installer components (e.g. your CD-ROM or +network card). As not all drivers may be available during this first run, +hardware detection needs to be repeated later in the process. + + + +&module-lowmem.xml; +&module-languagechooser.xml; +&module-countrychooser.xml; +&module-localechooser.xml; +&module-kbd-chooser.xml; +&module-s390-netdevice.xml; +&module-ddetect.xml; +&module-cdrom-detect.xml; +&module-iso-scan.xml; +&module-anna.xml; +&module-netcfg.xml; +&module-choose-mirror.xml; + + + + + Partitioning and Mount Point Selection + + +At this time, after hardware detection has been executed a final time, +&d-i; should be at its full strength, customized for the user's needs +and ready to do some real work. + +As the title of this section indicates, the main task of the next few +components lies in partitioning your disks, creating filesystems, +assigning mountpoints and optionally configuring closely related issues +like LVM or RAID devices. + + + +&module-s390-dasd.xml; +&module-partman.xml; +&module-autopartkit.xml; +&module-partitioner.xml; +&module-partconf.xml; +&module-lvmcfg.xml; +&module-mdcfg.xml; + + + + Installing the Base System + + +Although this stage is the least problematic, it consumes most time of +the install because it downloads, verifies and unpacks the whole base +system. If you have a slow computer or network connection, this could +take some time. + + + +&module-base-installer.xml; + + + + Making Your System Bootable + + + +If you are installing a diskless workstation, obviously, booting off +the local disk isn't a meaningful option, and this step will be +skipped. You may wish to set the OpenBoot to boot +from the network by default; see . + + + +Note that multiple operating systems booting on a single machine is +still something of a black art. This document does not even attempt +to document the various boot managers, which vary by architecture and +even by subarchitecture. You should see your boot manager's +documentation for more information. + + + +&module-os-prober.xml; +&module-alpha-aboot-installer.xml; +&module-hppa-palo-installer.xml; +&module-i386-grub-installer.xml; +&module-i386-lilo-installer.xml; +&module-ia64-elilo-installer.xml; +&module-mips-arcboot-installer.xml; +&module-mipsel-colo-installer.xml; +&module-mipsel-delo-installer.xml; +&module-powerpc-yaboot-installer.xml; +&module-powerpc-quik-installer.xml; +&module-s390-zipl-installer.xml; +&module-sparc-silo-installer.xml; +&module-nobootloader.xml; + + + + Finishing the First Stage + + +These are the last bits to do before rebooting to your new Debian. It +mostly consists of tidying up after the &d-i;. + + + +&module-prebaseconfig.xml; + + + + Miscellaneous + + +The components listed in this section are usually not involved in the +installation process, but are waiting in the background to help the +user in case something goes wrong. + + + +&module-save-logs.xml; +&module-cdrom-checker.xml; +&module-shell.xml; +&module-network-console.xml; +&module-baseconfig.xml; + + diff --git a/en/using-d-i/modules/alpha/aboot-installer.xml b/en/using-d-i/modules/alpha/aboot-installer.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7deaebb5a --- /dev/null +++ b/en/using-d-i/modules/alpha/aboot-installer.xml @@ -0,0 +1,19 @@ + + + + + Install <command>aboot</command> on a Hard Disk + + +If you have booted from SRM, if you select this option, the installer +will write aboot to the first sector of the disk on +which you installed Debian. Be very careful — it +is not possible to boot multiple operating +systems (e.g. GNU/Linux, Free/Open/NetBSD, OSF/1 a.k.a. Digital Unix +a.k.a. Tru64 Unix, or OpenVMS) from the same disk. If you also have a +different operating system installed on the disk where you have +installed Debian, you will have to boot GNU/Linux from a floppy +instead. + + + diff --git a/en/using-d-i/modules/anna.xml b/en/using-d-i/modules/anna.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..67c575a36 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/using-d-i/modules/anna.xml @@ -0,0 +1,2 @@ + + diff --git a/en/using-d-i/modules/autopartkit.xml b/en/using-d-i/modules/autopartkit.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..67c575a36 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/using-d-i/modules/autopartkit.xml @@ -0,0 +1,2 @@ + + diff --git a/en/using-d-i/modules/base-installer.xml b/en/using-d-i/modules/base-installer.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..741e7df5f --- /dev/null +++ b/en/using-d-i/modules/base-installer.xml @@ -0,0 +1,31 @@ + + + + + Base System Installation + + + +During the Base installation, package unpacking and setup messages are +redirected to tty3. You can access this +terminal by pressing +Left AltF3; +get back to the main installer process with +Left AltF1. + + + + +The unpack/setup messages generated by the base installation are saved in +/var/log/messages when the installation is +performed over a serial console. + + + +As part of the installation, a Linux kernel will be installed. At the default +priority, the installer will choose one for you that best matches your +hardware. In lower priority modes, you will be able to choose from a list +of available kernels. + + + diff --git a/en/using-d-i/modules/baseconfig.xml b/en/using-d-i/modules/baseconfig.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9a6acbeeb --- /dev/null +++ b/en/using-d-i/modules/baseconfig.xml @@ -0,0 +1,17 @@ + + + + + Running <command>base-config</command> From Within &d-i; + + + +It is possible to configure the base system within the first stage +installer (before rebooting from the hard drive), by running +base-config in a chroot +environment. This is mainly useful for testing the installer and +should normally be avoided. + + + + diff --git a/en/using-d-i/modules/cdrom-checker.xml b/en/using-d-i/modules/cdrom-checker.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..67c575a36 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/using-d-i/modules/cdrom-checker.xml @@ -0,0 +1,2 @@ + + diff --git a/en/using-d-i/modules/cdrom-detect.xml b/en/using-d-i/modules/cdrom-detect.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..67c575a36 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/using-d-i/modules/cdrom-detect.xml @@ -0,0 +1,2 @@ + + diff --git a/en/using-d-i/modules/choose-mirror.xml b/en/using-d-i/modules/choose-mirror.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b9e3ba30f --- /dev/null +++ b/en/using-d-i/modules/choose-mirror.xml @@ -0,0 +1,17 @@ + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/en/using-d-i/modules/countrychooser.xml b/en/using-d-i/modules/countrychooser.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..dd767b701 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/using-d-i/modules/countrychooser.xml @@ -0,0 +1,25 @@ + + + + + + Country selection + + + +If you selected a language in which has +more than one country associated with it (true for Chinese, English, +French, and many other languages), you can specify the country here. +If you choose Other at the bottom of the list, +you will be presented with a list of all countries, grouped by continent. + + + +This selection will be used later in the installation process to pick the +default timezone and a Debian mirror appropriate for your geographic +location. If the defaults proposed by the installer are not suitable, you +can make a different choice. The selected country, together with the selected +language, may also affect locale settings for your new Debian system. + + + diff --git a/en/using-d-i/modules/ddetect.xml b/en/using-d-i/modules/ddetect.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..67c575a36 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/using-d-i/modules/ddetect.xml @@ -0,0 +1,2 @@ + + diff --git a/en/using-d-i/modules/hppa/palo-installer.xml b/en/using-d-i/modules/hppa/palo-installer.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..eb5398812 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/using-d-i/modules/hppa/palo-installer.xml @@ -0,0 +1,20 @@ + + + + + <command>palo</command>-installer + + +The bootloader on PA-RISC is palo. +PALO is similar in configuration and usage to +LILO, with a few exceptions. First of all, +PALO allows you to boot any kernel image on your +boot partition. This is because PALO can actually +read Linux partitions. + + + +hppa FIXME ( need more info ) + + + diff --git a/en/using-d-i/modules/i386/grub-installer.xml b/en/using-d-i/modules/i386/grub-installer.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..77cdd9a45 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/using-d-i/modules/i386/grub-installer.xml @@ -0,0 +1,26 @@ + + + + + Install the <command>Grub</command> Boot Loader + on a Hard Disk + + +The main &architecture; boot loader is called grub. +Grub is a flexible and robust boot loader and a good default choice for +newbies and old hands alike. + + + +By default, grub will be installed into the Master Boot Record (MBR), where +it will take over complete control of the boot process. If you prefer, you +can install it elsewhere. See the grub manual for complete information. + + + +If you do not want to install grub at all, use the Back button to get to +the main menu, and from there select whatever bootloader you would like to +use. + + + diff --git a/en/using-d-i/modules/i386/lilo-installer.xml b/en/using-d-i/modules/i386/lilo-installer.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ef517fc1d --- /dev/null +++ b/en/using-d-i/modules/i386/lilo-installer.xml @@ -0,0 +1,70 @@ + + + + + Install the <command>LILO</command> Boot Loader + on a Hard Disk + + +The second &architecture; boot loader is called LILO. +It is an old complex program which offers lots of functionality, +including DOS, Windows, and OS/2 boot management. Please carefully +read the instructions in the directory +/usr/share/doc/lilo/ if you have special needs; +also see the LILO mini-HOWTO. + + + + +Currently the LILO installation will only create menu entries for other +operating systems if these can be chainloaded. +This means you may have to manually add a menu entry for operating +systems like GNU/Linux and GNU/Hurd after the installation. + + + + +&d-i; presents you three choices where to install the +LILO boot loader: + + + +Master Boot Record (MBR) + +This way the LILO will take complete control of the +boot process. + + + +new Debian partition + +Choose this if you want to use another boot +manager. LILO will install itself at the beginning +of the new Debian partition and it will serve as a secondary boot +loader. + + + +Other choice + +Useful for advanced users who want to install LILO +somewhere else. In this case you will be asked for desired +location. You can use devfs style names, such as those that start with +/dev/ide, /dev/scsi, and +/dev/discs, as well as traditional names, such as +/dev/hda or /dev/sda. + + + + + + +If you can no longer boot into Windows 9x (or DOS) after this step, +you'll need to use a Windows 9x (MS-DOS) boot disk and use the +fdisk /mbr command to reinstall the MS-DOS +master boot record — however, this means that you'll need to use +some other way to get back into Debian! For more information on this +please read . + + + diff --git a/en/using-d-i/modules/ia64/elilo-installer.xml b/en/using-d-i/modules/ia64/elilo-installer.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6ec6bc26d --- /dev/null +++ b/en/using-d-i/modules/ia64/elilo-installer.xml @@ -0,0 +1,135 @@ + + + + + Install the <command>ELILO</command> Boot Loader + on a Hard Disk + + +The &architecture; boot loader is called elilo. +It is modeled on the lilo boot loader for the +x86 architecture and uses a similar configuration file. +However, instead of writing an MBR or partition boot record to +the disk, it copies the necessary files to a separate FAT formatted +disk partition and modifies the EFI Boot Manager +menu in the firmware to point to the files in the EFI partition. +The elilo boot loader is really in two parts. +The /usr/sbin/elilo command manages the partition and +copies file into it. +The elilo.efi program is copied into the EFI +partition and then run by the EFI Boot Manager to actually +do the work of loading and starting the Linux kernel. + + + +The elilo configuration and installation is done as the +last step of installing the packages of the base installation. +&d-i; will present you with a list of potential disk partitions that it +has found suitable for an EFI partition. +Select the partition you set up earlier in the installation, typically +a partition on the same disk that contains your +root filesystem. + + + + Choose the correct partition! + + + +The criteria for selecting a partition is that it is FAT format +filesystem with its boot flag set. +&d-i; may show multiple choices depending on what it finds from scanning +all of the disks of the system including EFI partitions of other system +disks and EFI diagnostic partitions. +Remember, the elilo may format the partition during +the installation, erasing any previous contents! + + + + + + + EFI Partition Contents + + + +The EFI partition is a FAT filesystem format partition on one of the +hard disks of the system, usually the same disk that contains the +root filesystem. +It is normally not mounted on a running system as it is only needed +by the EFI Boot Manager to load the system and the +installer part of the elilo writes to the filesystem +directly. +The /usr/sbin/elilo utility writes the following files +into the efi/debian directory of the EFI +partition during the installation. +Note that the EFI Boot Manager would find these files +using the path fsn:\efi\debian. +There may be other files in this filesystem as well over time as +the system is updated or re-configured. + + + + + + +elilo.conf + + +This is the configuration file read by the boot loader when it starts. +It is a copy of the /etc/elilo.conf with +the filenames re-written to refer to files in the EFI partition. + + + + +elilo.efi + + +This is the boot loader program that the EFI Boot Manager +runs to boot the system. +It is the program behind the Debian GNU/Linux +menu item of the EFI Boot Manager command menu. + + + + +initrd.img + + +This is the initial root filesystem used to boot the kernel. +It is a copy of the file referenced in the +/etc/elilo.conf. +In a standard Debian installation it would be the file in +/boot pointed to by the symbolic link +/initrd.img. + + + + +readme.txt + + +This is a small text file warning you that the contents of the +directory are managed by the elilo and that +any local changes would be lost at the next time +/usr/sbin/elilo is run. + + + + +vmlinuz + + +This is the compressed kernel itself. +It is a copy of the file referenced in the +/etc/elilo.conf. +In a standard Debian installation it would be the file in +/boot pointed to by the symbolic link +/vmlinuz. + + + + + + diff --git a/en/using-d-i/modules/iso-scan.xml b/en/using-d-i/modules/iso-scan.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..aaf56d89d --- /dev/null +++ b/en/using-d-i/modules/iso-scan.xml @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ + + + + + Looking for the Debian Installer ISO Image + + +When installing via the hd-media method, there +will be a moment where you need to find and mount the Debian Installer +iso image in order to get the rest of the installation files. The +component iso-scan does exactly this. + + + +At first, iso-scan automatically mounts all block +devices (e.g. partitions) which have some known filesystem on them and +sequentially searches for filenames ending with +.iso (or .ISO for that +matter). Beware that the first attempt scans only files in the root +directory and in the first level of subdirectories (i.e. it finds +/whatever.iso, +/data/whatever.iso, +but not +/data/tmp/whatever.iso). +After an iso image has been found, iso-scan checks +its content to determine if the image is a valid Debian iso image or +not. In the former case we are done, in the latter +iso-scan seeks for another image. + + + +In case the previous attempt to find an installer iso image fails, +iso-scan will ask you whether you would like to +perform a more thorough search. This pass doesn't just look into the +topmost directories, but really traverses whole filesystem. + + + +If iso-scan does not discover your installer iso +image, reboot back to your original operating system and check if the +image is named correctly (ending in .iso), if it is +placed on a filesystem recognizable by &d-i;, and if it is not +corrupted (verify the checksum). Experienced Unix users could do this +without rebooting on the second console. + + + diff --git a/en/using-d-i/modules/kbd-chooser.xml b/en/using-d-i/modules/kbd-chooser.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..31459f284 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/using-d-i/modules/kbd-chooser.xml @@ -0,0 +1,73 @@ + + + + + Choosing a Keyboard + + + +Keyboards are often tailored to the characters used in a language. +Select a layout that conforms to the keyboard you are using, or +select something close if the keyboard layout you want +isn't represented. Once the system installation is complete, you'll be +able to select a keyboard layout from a wider range of choices (run +kbdconfig as root after you have completed the +installation). + + + +Move the highlight to the keyboard selection you desire and press +&enterkey;. Use the arrow keys to move the highlight — they are +in the same place in all national language keyboard layouts, so they +are independent of the keyboard configuration. An 'extended' keyboard +is one with F1 through F10 keys +along the top row. + + + +On DECstations there is currently no loadable keymap available, +so you have to skip the keyboard selection and keep the default +kernel keymap (LK201 US). This may change in the future as it +depends on further Linux/MIPS kernel development. + + + +There are two keyboard layouts for US keyboards; the qwerty/mac-usb-us +(Apple USB) layout will place the Alt function on the +Command/Apple key (in the keyboard position next to +the space key similar to Alt on +PC keyboards), while the qwerty/us (Standard) layout will place the +Alt function on the Option key (engraved with 'alt' +on most Mac keyboards). In other respects the two layouts are similar. + + + + + +If you are installing on a system that has a Sun USB keyboard and have +booted the installer with the default 2.4 kernel, the keyboard will not +be identified correctly by the installation system. The installer will show +you a list of Sun type keymaps to choose from, but selecting one of these +will result in a non-working keyboard. If you are installing with the 2.6 +kernel, there is no problem. + + + +To get a working keyboard, you should boot the installer with parameter +debconf/priority=medium. When you get to keyboard +selection + + +If you are installing at default priority you should use the Go +Back button to return to the installer menu when you are shown +the list of Sun type keymaps. + + +, choose No keyboard to configure if you have a +keyboard with an American (US) layout, or choose USB keyboard +if you have a keyboard with a localized layout. Selecting No keyboard +to configure will leave the kernel keymap in place, which is correct +for US keyboards. + + + diff --git a/en/using-d-i/modules/languagechooser.xml b/en/using-d-i/modules/languagechooser.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c0cc95c39 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/using-d-i/modules/languagechooser.xml @@ -0,0 +1,25 @@ + + + + + + Language selection + + + +As the first step of the installation, select the language in which +you want the installation process to proceed. The language names +are listed in both English (left side) and in the language itself +(right side); the names on the right side are also shown in the proper +script for the language. The list is sorted on the English names. + + + +The language you choose will be used for the rest of the installation +process, provided a translation of the different dialogs is available. +If no valid translation is available for the selected language, the +installer will default to English. The selected language will also be +used to help select a suitable keyboard layout. + + + diff --git a/en/using-d-i/modules/localechooser.xml b/en/using-d-i/modules/localechooser.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d17dd4dcb --- /dev/null +++ b/en/using-d-i/modules/localechooser.xml @@ -0,0 +1,67 @@ + + + + + + Selecting Localization Options + + + +In most cases the first questions you will be asked concern the selection +of localization options to be used both for the installation and for the +installed system. The localization options consist of language, country +and locales. + + + +The language you choose will be used for the rest of the installation +process, provided a translation of the different dialogs is available. +If no valid translation is available for the selected language, the +installer will default to English. + + + +The selected country will be used later in the installation process to +pick the default timezone and a Debian mirror appropriate for your +geographic location. Language and country together will be used to set +the default locale for your system and to help select your keyboard. + + + +You will first be asked to select your preferred language. The language +names are listed in both English (left side) and in the language itself +(right side); the names on the right side are also shown in the proper +script for the language. The list is sorted on the English names. +At the top of the list is an extra option that allows you to select the +C locale instead of a language. Choosing the C +locale will result in the installation proceding in English; the installed +system will have no localization support as the locales +package will not be installed. + + + +If you selected a language that is recognized as an official language for +more than one country + + + +In technical terms: where multiple locales exist for that language with +differing country codes. + + + +, you will next be asked to select a country. +If you choose Other at the bottom of the list, +you will be presented with a list of all countries, grouped by continent. +If the language has only one country associated with it, that country +will be selected automatically. + + + +A default locale will be selected based on the selected language and country. +If you are installing at medium or low priority, you will have the option +of selecting a different default locale and of selecting additional locales to +be generated for the installed system. + + + diff --git a/en/using-d-i/modules/lowmem.xml b/en/using-d-i/modules/lowmem.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..013379199 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/using-d-i/modules/lowmem.xml @@ -0,0 +1,21 @@ + + + + + Check available memory + + + +One of the first things &d-i; does, is to check available memory. +If the available memory is limited, this component will make some +changes in the installation process which hopefully will allow +you to install &debian; on your system. + + + +During a low memory install, not all components will be available. +One of the limitations is that you won't be able to choose a +language for the installation. + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/en/using-d-i/modules/lvmcfg.xml b/en/using-d-i/modules/lvmcfg.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..19b77f53c --- /dev/null +++ b/en/using-d-i/modules/lvmcfg.xml @@ -0,0 +1,95 @@ + + + + + Configuring Logical Volume Manager (LVM) + + +If you are working with computers at the level of system administrator +or advanced user, you have surely seen the situation +where some disk partition (usually the most important one) was short on +space, while some other partition was grossly underused and you had to +manage this situation with moving stuff around, symlinking, etc. + + + +To avoid the described situation you can use Logical Volume Manager +(LVM). Simply said, with LVM you can combine your partitions +(physical volumes in LVM lingo) to form +a virtual disc (so called volume group), which +can then be divided into virtual partitions (logical +volumes). The point is that logical volumes (and of course +underlying volume groups) can span across several physical discs. + + + +Now when you realize you need more space for your old 160GB +/home partition, you can simply add a new 300GB +disc to the computer, join it with your existing volume group and then +resize the logical volume which holds your /home +filesystem and voila — your users have some room again on their +renewed 460GB partition. This example is of course a bit +oversimplified. If you haven't read it yet, you should consult the +LVM HOWTO. + + + +LVM setup in &d-i; is quite simple. At first, you have to mark your +partitions to be used as physical volumes for LVM. (This is done in +partman in the Partition +settings menu where you should select +Use as: physical volume for +LVM .) Then start the +lvmcfg module (either directly from +partman or from the &d-i;'s main menu) and combine +physical volumes to volume group(s) under the Modify +volume groups (VG) menu. After that, you should create +logical volumes on the top of volume groups from the menu +Modify logical volumes (LV). + + + +There is no widely accepted standard to identify partitions containing +LVM data on Apple Power Macintosh hardware. On this particular +hardware, the above procedure for creating physical volumes and volume +groups will not work. There is a good workaround for this limitation, +provided you are familiar with the underlying LVM tools. + + + +To install using logical volumes on Power Macintosh hardware you +should create all the disk partitions for your logical volumes as +usual. In the Partition settings menu you should +choose Use as: Do Not +Use for these partitions (you will not be +offered the option to use the partition as a physical volume). When +you are done with creating all your partitions, you should start the +logical volume manager as usual. However, since no physical volumes +have been created you must now access the command shell available on +the second virtual terminal (see ) and create +them manually. + + + +Use the pvcreate command at the shell command prompt +to create a physical volume on each of your chosen partitions. Then use +the vgcreate command to create each volume group +you want. You can safely ignore any errors about incorrect metadata +area header checksums and fsync failures while doing this. When you +have finished creating all your volume groups, you should go back to +the first virtual terminal and skip directly to the +lvmcfg menu items for logical volume +management. You will see your volume groups and you can create the +logical volumes you need as usual. + + + + + +After returning from lvmcfg back to +partman, you will see any created logical volumes +in the same way as ordinary partitions (and you should treat them like +that). + + + diff --git a/en/using-d-i/modules/mdcfg.xml b/en/using-d-i/modules/mdcfg.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6365a3fa1 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/using-d-i/modules/mdcfg.xml @@ -0,0 +1,230 @@ + + + + + Configuring Multidisk Device (Software RAID) + + +If you have more than one harddrive + +To be honest, you can construct MD device even from partitions +residing on single physical drive, but that won't bring you anything +useful. + + in your computer, you can use +mdcfg to setup your drives for increased +performance and/or better reliability of your data. The result is +called Multidisk Device (or after its most +famous variant software RAID). + + + +MD is basically a bunch of partitions located on different disks and +combined together to form a logical device. This +device can then be used like an ordinary partition (i.e. in +partman you can format it, assign a mountpoint, +etc.). + + + +The benefit you gain depends on a type of a MD device you are +creating. Currently supported are: + + + + +RAID0 + +Is mainly aimed at performance. RAID0 splits all incoming data into +stripes and distributes them equally over each +disk in the array. This can increase the speed of read/write +operations, but when one of the disks fails, you will loose +everything (part of the information is still on +the healthy disk(s), the other part was on the +failed disk). + + + +The typical use for RAID0 is a partition for video editing. + + + + + +RAID1 + +Is suitable for setups where reliability is the first concern. It +consists of several (usually two) equally sized partitions where every +partition contains exactly the same data. This essentially means three +things. First, if one of your disks fails, you still have the data +mirrored on the remaining disks. Second, you can use only a fraction +of the available capacity (more precisely, it is the size of the +smallest partition in the RAID). Third, file reads are load balanced among +the disks, which can improve performance on a server, such as a file +server, that tends to be loaded with more disk reads than writes. + + + +Optionally you can have a spare disk in the array which will take the +place of the failed disk in the case of failure. + + + + + +RAID5 + +Is a good compromise between speed, reliability and data redundancy. +RAID5 splits all incomming data into stripes and distributes them +equally on all but one disks (similar to RAID0). Unlike RAID0, RAID5 +also computes parity information, which gets +written on the remaining disk. The parity disk is not static (that +would be called RAID4), but is changing periodically, so the parity +information is distributed equally on all disks. When one of the +disks fails, the missing part of information can be computed from +remaining data and its parity. RAID5 must consist of at least three +active partitions. Optionally you can have a spare disk in the array +which will take the place of the failed disk in the case of failure. + + + +As you can see, RAID5 has similar degree of reliability like RAID1 +while achieving less redundancy. On the other hand it might be a bit +slower on write operation than RAID0 due to computation of parity +information. + + + + + +To sum it up: + + + + + + Type + Minimum Devices + Spare Device + Survives disk failure? + Available Space + + + + + + RAID0 + 2 + no + no + Size of the smallest partition multiplied by number of devices in RAID + + + + RAID1 + 2 + optional + yes + Size of the smallest partition in RAID + + + + RAID5 + 3 + optional + yes + + Size of the smallest partition multiplied by (number of devices in + RAID minus one) + + + + + + + +If you want to know the whole truth about Software RAID, have a look +at Software RAID HOWTO. + + + +There is no widely accepted standard to identify partitions containing +RAID data on Apple Power Macintosh hardware. This means that &d-i; +currently does not support setting up RAID on this platform. + + + + + +To create a MD device, you need to have the desired partitions it +should consist of marked for use in a RAID. (This is done in +partman in the Partition +settings menu where you should select +Use as: physical volume for +RAID .) + + + +Support for MD is a relatively new addition to the installer. +You may experience problems for some RAID levels and in combination +with some bootloaders if you try to use MD for the root +(/) filesystem. For experienced users, it may be +possible to work around some of these problems by executing some +configuration or installation steps manually from a shell. + + + +Next, you should choose Configure software +RAID from the main partman menu. +On the first screen of mdcfg simply select +Create MD device. You will be presented with +a list of supported types of MD devices, from which you should choose +one (e.g. RAID1). What follows depends on the type of MD you selected. + + + + + +RAID0 is simple — you will be issued with the list of available +RAID partitions and your only task is to select the partitions which +will form the MD. + + + + +RAID1 is a bit more tricky. First, you will be asked to enter the +number of active devices and the number of spare devices which will +form the MD. Next, you need to select from the list of available RAID +partitions those that will be active and then those that will be +spare. The count of selected partitions must be equal to the number +provided few seconds ago. Don't worry. If you make a mistake and +select different number of partitions, the &d-i; won't let you +continue until you correct the issue. + + + + +RAID5 has similar setup procedure as RAID1 with the exception that you +need to use at least three active partitions. + + + + + + +It is perfectly possible to have several types of MD at once. For +example if you have three 200 GB hard drives dedicated to MD, each +containing two 100 GB partitions, you can combine first partitions on +all three disk into the RAID0 (fast 300 GB video editing partition) +and use the other three partitions (2 active and 1 spare) for RAID1 +(quite reliable 100 GB partition for /home). + + + +After you setup MD devices to your liking, you can +Finish mdcfg to return +back to the partman to create filesystems on your +new MD devices and assign them the usual attributes like mountpoints. + + + diff --git a/en/using-d-i/modules/mips/arcboot-installer.xml b/en/using-d-i/modules/mips/arcboot-installer.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..aba21a7e5 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/using-d-i/modules/mips/arcboot-installer.xml @@ -0,0 +1,69 @@ + + + + + <command>arcboot</command>-installer + + +The boot loader on SGI Indys is arcboot. +It has to be installed on the same hard disk as the kernel (this is done +automatically by the installer). Arcboot supports different configurations +which are set up in /etc/arcboot.conf. Each +configuration has a unique name, +the default setup as created by the installer is linux. +After arcboot has been installed, the system can be booted from hard disk +by setting some firmware environment variables entering + + + setenv SystemPartition scsi(scsi)disk(disk)rdisk(0)partition(0) + setenv OSLoadPartition scsi(scsi)disk(disk)rdisk(0)partition(partnr) + setenv OSLoader arcboot + setenv OSLoadFilename config + setenv AutoLoad yes + + +on the firmware prompt, and then typing boot. + + + + + + scsi + + +is the SCSI bus to be booted from, this is 0 +for the onboard controllers + + + + + disk + + +is the SCSI ID of the hard disk on which arcboot is +installed + + + + + partnr + + +is the number of the partition on which +/etc/arcboot.conf resides + + + + + config + + +is the name of the configuration entry in +/etc/arcboot.conf, which is linux by +default. + + + + + + diff --git a/en/using-d-i/modules/mipsel/colo-installer.xml b/en/using-d-i/modules/mipsel/colo-installer.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..67c575a36 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/using-d-i/modules/mipsel/colo-installer.xml @@ -0,0 +1,2 @@ + + diff --git a/en/using-d-i/modules/mipsel/delo-installer.xml b/en/using-d-i/modules/mipsel/delo-installer.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..70efb3e77 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/using-d-i/modules/mipsel/delo-installer.xml @@ -0,0 +1,76 @@ + + + + + <command>delo</command>-installer + + +The boot loader on DECstations is DELO. +It has to be installed on the same hard disk as the kernel (this is done +automatically by the installer). DELO supports different configurations +which are set up in /etc/delo.conf. Each +configuration has a unique name, +the default setup as created by the installer is linux. +After DELO has been installed, the system can be booted from hard disk +by entering + + +boot #/rzid partnr/name + + +on the firmware prompt. + + + + + + # + + +is the TurboChannel device to be booted from, on most DECstations this +is 3 for the onboard controllers + + + + + id + + +is the SCSI ID of the hard disk on which DELO is +installed + + + + + partnr + + +is the number of the partition on which +/etc/delo.conf resides + + + + + name + + +is the name of the configuration entry in +/etc/delo.conf, which is linux by +default. + + + + + + + +In case /etc/delo.conf is on the first partition +on the disk and the default configuration shall be booted, it is +sufficient to use + + +boot #/rzid + + + + diff --git a/en/using-d-i/modules/netcfg.xml b/en/using-d-i/modules/netcfg.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ffeae3792 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/using-d-i/modules/netcfg.xml @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ + + + + + Configuring Network + + + +As you enter this step, if the system detects that you have more than +one network device, you'll be asked to choose which device will be +your primary network interface, i.e. the one +which you want to use for installation. The other interfaces won't be +configured at this time. You may configure additional interfaces after +installation is complete; see the +interfaces 5 + man page. + + + +By default, &d-i; tries to configure your computer's network +automatically via DHCP. If the DHCP probe succeeds, you are done. If the +probe fails, it may be caused by many factors ranging from unplugged +network cable, to a misconfigured DHCP setup. Or maybe you don't have +a DHCP server in your local network at all. For further explanation +check the error messages on the third console. In any case, you will +be asked if you want to retry, or if you want to perform manual +setup. DHCP servers are sometimes really slow in their responses, so +if you are sure everything is in place, try again. + + + +The manual network setup in turn asks you a number of questions about +your network, notably +IP address, +Netmask, +Gateway, +Name server addresses, and a +Hostname. +Moreover, if you have a wireless network interface, you will be asked +to provide your Wireless ESSID and +a WEP key. Fill in the answers from +. + + + +Some technical details you might, or might not, find handy: the +program assumes the network IP address is the bitwise-AND of your +system's IP address and your netmask. It will guess the broadcast +address is the bitwise OR of your system's IP address with the bitwise +negation of the netmask. It will also guess your gateway. If you +can't find any of these answers, use the system's guesses — you +can change them once the system has been installed, if necessary, by +editing /etc/network/interfaces. Alternatively, +you can install etherconf, which will step you +through your network setup. + + + diff --git a/en/using-d-i/modules/network-console.xml b/en/using-d-i/modules/network-console.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9d0bff67c --- /dev/null +++ b/en/using-d-i/modules/network-console.xml @@ -0,0 +1,107 @@ + + + + + Installation Over the Network + + + +One of the more interesting components is +network-console. It allows you to do a large +part of the installation over the network via SSH. The use of the +network implies you will have to perform the first steps of the +installation from the console, at least to the point of setting up +the networking. (Although you can automate that part with +.) + + + +This component is not loaded into the main installation menu by default, +so you have to explicitly ask for it. + +If you are installing from CD, you need to boot with medium priority or +otherwise invoke the main installation menu and choose Load +installer components from CD and from the list of +additional components select network-console: Continue +installation remotely using SSH. Successful load is +indicated by a new menu entry called Continue +installation remotely using SSH. + + + +For installations on &arch-title;, this is the default method after +setting up the network. + + + +After selecting this new entry, you +You will be asked for a new password +to be used for connecting to the installation system and for its +confirmation. That's all. Now you should see a screen which instructs +you to login remotely as the user installer with +the password you just provided. Another important detail to notice on +this screen is the fingerprint of this system. You need to transfer +the fingerprint securely to the person who will continue the +installation remotely. + + + +Should you decide to continue with the installation locally, you +can always press &enterkey;, which will bring you back to +the main menu, where you can select another component. + + + +Now let's switch to the other side of the wire. As a prerequisite, you +need to configure your terminal for UTF-8 encoding, because that is +what the installation system uses. If you do not, remote installation +will be still possible, but you may encounter strange display +artefacts like destroyed dialog borders or unreadable non-ascii +characters. Establishing a connection with the installation system +is as simple as typing: + + +$ ssh -l installer install_host + + +Where install_host is either the name +or IP address of the computer being installed. Before the actual +login the fingerprint of the remote system will be displayed and +you will have to confirm that it is correct. + + + +If you install several computers in turn and they happen to have the +same IP address or hostname, ssh will refuse to connect +to such host. The reason is that it will have different fingerprint, which +is usually a sign of a spoofing attack. If you are sure this is not the +case, you will need to delete the relevant line from +~/.ssh/known_hosts and try again. + + + +After the login you will be presented with an initial screen where you +have two possibilities called Start menu and +Start shell. The former brings you to the +main installer menu, where you can continue with the installation as +usual. The latter starts a shell from which you can examine and possibly +fix the remote system. You should only start one SSH session for the +installation menu, but may start multiple sessions for shells. + + + +After you have started the installation remotely over SSH, you should +not go back to the installation session running on the local console. +Doing so may corrupt the database that holds the configuration of +the new system. This in turn may result in a failed installation or +problems with the installed system. + + + +Also, if you are running the SSH session from an X terminal, you should +not resize the window as that will result in the connection being +terminated. + + + + diff --git a/en/using-d-i/modules/nobootloader.xml b/en/using-d-i/modules/nobootloader.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..df251b1a5 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/using-d-i/modules/nobootloader.xml @@ -0,0 +1,28 @@ + + + + + Continue Without Boot Loader + + + +This option can be used to complete the installation even when no boot +loader is to be installed, either because the arch/subarch doesn't +provide one, or because none is desired (e.g. you will use existing +boot loader). This option is especially useful for +Macintosh, Atari, and Amiga systems, where the original operating system +must be maintained on the box and used to boot GNU/Linux. + + + +If you plan to manually configure your bootloader, you should check the +name of the installed kernel in /target/boot. +You should also check that directory for the presence of an +initrd; if one is present, you will probably have +to instruct your bootloader to use it. Other information you will need +are the disk and partition you selected for your / +filesystem and, if you chose to install /boot on a +separate partition, also your /boot filesystem. + + + diff --git a/en/using-d-i/modules/os-prober.xml b/en/using-d-i/modules/os-prober.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..03aa06176 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/using-d-i/modules/os-prober.xml @@ -0,0 +1,37 @@ + + + + + Detecting other operating systems + + + +Before a boot loader is installed, the installer will attempt to probe for +other operating systems which are installed on the machine. If it finds a +supported operating system, you will be informed of this during the boot +loader installation step, and the computer will be configured to boot this +other operating system in addition to Debian. + + + +Note that multiple operating systems booting on a single machine is still +something of a black art. The automatic support for detecting and setting +up boot loaders to boot other operating systems varies by architecture and +even by subarchitecture. If it does not work you should consult your +boot manager's documentation for more information. + + + + + + + +The installer may fail to detect other operating systems if the partitions on +which they reside are mounted when the detection takes place. This may occur if +you select a mountpoint (e.g. /win) for a partition containing another operating +system in partman, or if you have mounted partitions manually +from a console. + + + + diff --git a/en/using-d-i/modules/partconf.xml b/en/using-d-i/modules/partconf.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..67c575a36 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/using-d-i/modules/partconf.xml @@ -0,0 +1,2 @@ + + diff --git a/en/using-d-i/modules/partitioner.xml b/en/using-d-i/modules/partitioner.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..53394db87 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/using-d-i/modules/partitioner.xml @@ -0,0 +1,3 @@ + + + diff --git a/en/using-d-i/modules/partman.xml b/en/using-d-i/modules/partman.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1a5bc2e6e --- /dev/null +++ b/en/using-d-i/modules/partman.xml @@ -0,0 +1,199 @@ + + + + + Partitioning Your Disks + + + +Now it is time to partition your disks. If you are uncomfortable with +partitioning, or just want to know more details, see . + + + +First you will be given the opportunity to automatically partition +either an entire drive, or free space on a drive. This is also called +guided partitioning. If you do not want to +autopartition, choose Manually edit partition +table from the menu. + + + +If you choose guided partitioning, you will be able to choose from the +schemes listed in the table below. All schemes have their pros and cons, +some of which are discussed in . If you are +unsure, choose the first one. Bear in mind, that guided partitioning +needs certain minimal amount of free space to operate with. If you don't +give it at least about 1GB of space (depends on chosen scheme), guided +partitioning will fail. + + + + + + + + Partitioning scheme + Minimum space + Created partitions + + + + + + All files in one partition + 600MB + /, swap + + Desktop machine + 500MB + + /, /home, swap + + + Multi-user workstation + 1GB + + /, /home, + /usr, /var, + /tmp, swap + + + + + + + +If you chose an automatic partitioning for your IA64 system, there +will be an additional partition, formatted as a FAT16 bootable filesystem, +for the EFI boot loader. +There is also an additional menu item in the formatting menu to manually +set up a partition as an EFI boot partition. + + + +If you chose an automatic partitioning for your Alpha system, an +additional, unformatted partition will be allocated at the beginning of +your disk to reserve this space for the aboot boot loader. + + + +After selecting a scheme, the next screen will show your new partition +table, including information on whether and how partitions will be +formatted and where they will be mounted. + + + +The list of partitions might look like this: + + + + IDE1 master (hda) - 6.4 GB WDC AC36400L + #1 primary 16.4 MB ext2 /boot + #2 primary 551.0 MB swap swap + #3 primary 5.8 GB ntfs + pri/log 8.2 MB FREE SPACE + + IDE1 slave (hdb) - 80.0 GB ST380021A + #1 primary 15.9 MB ext3 + #2 primary 996.0 MB fat16 + #3 primary 3.9 GB xfs /home + #5 logical 6.0 GB ext3 / + #6 logical 1.0 GB ext3 /var + #7 logical 498.8 MB ext3 + #8 logical 551.5 MB swap swap + #9 logical 65.8 GB ext2 + + +This example shows two IDE harddrives divided into several partitions; +the first disk has some free space. Each partition line consists of the +partition number, its type, size, optional flags, file system, and +mountpoint (if any). + + + +This concludes the guided partitioning. If you are satisfied with the +generated partition table, you can choose Finish +partitioning and write changes to disk from the menu to +implement the new partition table (as described at the end of this +section). If you are not happy, you can choose to Undo +changes to partitions, to run guided partitioning again +or modify the proposed changes as described below for manual partitioning. + + + +A similar screen to the one shown just above will be displayed if you +choose manual partitioning except that your existing partition table will +be shown and without the mount points. How to manually setup your partition +table and the usage of partitions by your new Debian system will be covered +in the remainder of this section. + + + +If you select a pristine disk which doesn't have neither partitions +nor free space on it, you will be offered to create a new partition +table (this is needed so you can create new partitions). After this +a new line entitled FREE SPACE should appear under the +selected disk. + + + +If you select some free space, you will be offered to create new +partition. You will have to answer a quick series of questions about +its size, type (primary or logical), and location (beginning or end of +the free space). After this, you will be presented with detailed +overview of your new partition. There are options like mountpoint, +mount options, bootable flag, or way of usage. If you don't like the +preselected defaults, feel free to change them to your liking. E.g. by +selecting the option Use as:, you can +choose different filesystem for this partition including the +possibility to use the partition for swap, software RAID, LVM, or not +use it at all. Other nice feature is the possibility to copy data from +existing partition onto this one. +When you are satisfied with your new partition, select +Done setting up the partition and you will be +thrown back to the partman's main screen. + + + +If you decide you want to change something about your partition, +simply select the partition, which will bring you to the partition +configuration menu. Because this is the same screen like when creating +a new partition, you can change the same set of options. One thing +which might not be very obvious at a first glance is that you can +resize the partition by selecting the item displaying the size of the +partition. Filesystems known to work are at least fat16, fat32, ext2, +ext3 and swap. This menu also allows you to delete a partition. + + + +Be sure to create at least two partitions: one for the +root filesystem (which must be mounted as +/) and one for swap. If you +forget to mount the root filesystem, partman won't +let you continue until you correct this issue. + + + +If you forget to select and format an EFI boot partition +partman will detect this and will not let you continue +until you allocate one. + + + +Capabilities of partman can be extended with installer +modules, but are dependent on your system's architecture. So if you can't +see all promised goodies, check if you have loaded all required modules +(e.g. partman-ext3, partman-xfs, +or partman-lvm). + + + +After you are satisfied with partitioning, select Finish +partitioning and write changes to disk from the partitioning +menu. You will be presented with a summary of changes made to the disks +and asked to confirm that the filesystems should be created as requested. + + + diff --git a/en/using-d-i/modules/powerpc/quik-installer.xml b/en/using-d-i/modules/powerpc/quik-installer.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..07ba1e66b --- /dev/null +++ b/en/using-d-i/modules/powerpc/quik-installer.xml @@ -0,0 +1,15 @@ + + + + + Install <command>Quik</command> on a Hard Disk + + +The boot loader for OldWorld Power Macintosh machines is +quik. You can also use it on CHRP. The installer +will attempt to set up quik automatically. The +setup has been known to work on 7200, 7300, and 7600 Powermacs, and on +some Power Computing clones. + + + diff --git a/en/using-d-i/modules/powerpc/yaboot-installer.xml b/en/using-d-i/modules/powerpc/yaboot-installer.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b3ad198b6 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/using-d-i/modules/powerpc/yaboot-installer.xml @@ -0,0 +1,17 @@ + + + + + Install <command>Yaboot</command> on a Hard Disk + + +Newer (mid 1998 and on) PowerMacs use yaboot as +their boot loader. The installer will set up yaboot +automatically, so all you need is a small 820k partition named +bootstrap with type +Apple_Bootstrap created back in the partitioning +component. If this step completes successfully then your disk should +now be bootable and OpenFirmware will be set to boot &debian;. + + + diff --git a/en/using-d-i/modules/prebaseconfig.xml b/en/using-d-i/modules/prebaseconfig.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..df4b0772e --- /dev/null +++ b/en/using-d-i/modules/prebaseconfig.xml @@ -0,0 +1,23 @@ + + + + + Finish the Installation and Reboot + + + +This is the last step in the initial Debian installation process. You will +be prompted to remove the boot media (CD, floppy, etc) that you used to +boot the installer. The installer will do any last minute tasks, and then +reboot into your new Debian system. + + + +Select the Finish the installation +menu item which will halt the system +because rebooting is not supported on &arch-title; in this case. You +then need to IPL GNU/Linux from the DASD which you selected for the +root filesystem during the first steps of the installation. + + + diff --git a/en/using-d-i/modules/s390/dasd.xml b/en/using-d-i/modules/s390/dasd.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..67c575a36 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/using-d-i/modules/s390/dasd.xml @@ -0,0 +1,2 @@ + + diff --git a/en/using-d-i/modules/s390/netdevice.xml b/en/using-d-i/modules/s390/netdevice.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..67c575a36 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/using-d-i/modules/s390/netdevice.xml @@ -0,0 +1,2 @@ + + diff --git a/en/using-d-i/modules/s390/zipl-installer.xml b/en/using-d-i/modules/s390/zipl-installer.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b460b33fa --- /dev/null +++ b/en/using-d-i/modules/s390/zipl-installer.xml @@ -0,0 +1,16 @@ + + + + + <command>zipl</command>-installer + + +The boot loader on &arch-title; is zipl. +ZIPL is similar in configuration and usage to +LILO, with a few exceptions. Please take a look at +LINUX for &arch-title; Device Drivers and Installation +Commands from IBM's developerWorks web site if you want to +know more about ZIPL. + + + diff --git a/en/using-d-i/modules/save-logs.xml b/en/using-d-i/modules/save-logs.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..788b90935 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/using-d-i/modules/save-logs.xml @@ -0,0 +1,24 @@ + + + + + Saving the installation logs + + + +If the installation is successful, the logfiles created during +the installation process will be automatically saved to +/var/log/debian-installer/ on your new +Debian system. + + + +Choosing Save debug logs from the main +menu allows you to save the log files to a floppy +disk, network, hard disk, or other +media. This can be useful if you encounter fatal problems +during the installation and wish to study the logs on another system +or attach them to an installation report. + + + diff --git a/en/using-d-i/modules/shell.xml b/en/using-d-i/modules/shell.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..57081c7a2 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/using-d-i/modules/shell.xml @@ -0,0 +1,41 @@ + + + + + Using the Shell and Viewing the Logs + + + + +There is an Execute a Shell item on the +menu. If the menu is not available when you need to use the shell, +press Left Alt F2 +(on a Mac keyboard, Option F2 +) to switch to the second virtual +console. That's the Alt key on the +left-hand side of the space bar, and the +F2 function key, at the same time. This is a separate +window running a Bourne shell clone called ash. + + + +At this point you are booted from the RAM disk, and there is a limited +set of Unix utilities available for your use. You can see what +programs are available with the command ls /bin /sbin /usr/bin +/usr/sbin and by typing help. The +text editor is nano. The shell has some nice features +like autocompletion and history. + + + +Use the menus to perform any task that they are able to do — the +shell and commands are only there in case something goes wrong. In +particular, you should always use the menus, not the shell, to +activate your swap partition, because the menu software can't detect +that you've done this from the shell. Press Left +Alt F1 to get back to menus, or +type exit if you used a menu item to open the +shell. + + + diff --git a/en/using-d-i/modules/sparc/silo-installer.xml b/en/using-d-i/modules/sparc/silo-installer.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..fe6d0f607 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/using-d-i/modules/sparc/silo-installer.xml @@ -0,0 +1,25 @@ + + + + + Install the <command>SILO</command> Boot Loader + on a Hard Disk + + +The standard &architecture; boot loader is called silo. +It is documented in +/usr/share/doc/silo/. SILO is +similar in configuration and usage to LILO, with +a few exceptions. First of all, SILO allows you to +boot any kernel image on your drive, even if it is not listed in +/etc/silo.conf. This is because +SILO can actually read Linux partitions. Also, +/etc/silo.conf is read at boot time, so there is +no need to rerun silo after installing a new kernel +like you would with LILO. SILO +can also read UFS partitions, which means it can boot SunOS/Solaris +partitions as well. This is useful if you want to install GNU/Linux +alongside an existing SunOS/Solaris install. + + + diff --git a/en/using-d-i/using-d-i.xml b/en/using-d-i/using-d-i.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..95fa6b10f --- /dev/null +++ b/en/using-d-i/using-d-i.xml @@ -0,0 +1,378 @@ + + + + + Using the Debian Installer + + How the Installer Works + + +The Debian Installer consists of a number of special-purpose +components to perform each installation task. Each component performs +its task, asking the user questions as necessary to do its job. +The questions themselves are given priorities, and the priority +of questions to be asked is set when the installer is started. + + + +When a default installation is performed, only essential (high priority) +questions will be asked. This results in a highly automated installation +process with little user interaction. Components are automatically run +in sequence; which components are run depends mainly on the installation +method you use and on your hardware. The installer will use default values +for questions that are not asked. + + + +If there is a problem, the user will see an error screen, and the +installer menu may be shown in order to select some alternative +action. If there are no problems, the user will never see the +installer menu, but will simply answer questions for each component +in turn. Serious error notifications are set to priority +critical so the user will always be notified. + + + +Some of the defaults that the installer uses can be influenced by passing +boot arguments when &d-i; is started. If, for example, you wish to +force static network configuration (DHCP is used by default if available), +you could add the boot parameter netcfg/disable_dhcp=true. +See for available options. + + + +Power users may be more comfortable with a menu-driven interface, +where each step is controlled by the user rather than the installer +performing each step automatically in sequence. To use the installer +in a manual, menu-driven way, add the boot argument +debconf/priority=medium. + + + +If your hardware requires you to pass options to kernel modules as +they are installed, you will need to start the installer in +expert mode. This can be done by either using the +expert command to start the installer or by adding +the boot argument debconf/priority=low. +Expert mode gives you full control over &d-i;. + + + +The normal installer display is character-based (as opposed to the now +more familiar graphical interface). The mouse is not operational in +this environment. Here are the keys you can use to navigate within the +various dialogs. The Tab or right +arrow keys move forward, and the Shift +Tab or left arrow keys +move backward between displayed buttons and selections. +The up and down arrow select +different items within a scrollable list, and also scroll the list +itself. In addition, in long lists, you can type a letter to cause the +list to scroll directly to the section with items starting with the +letter you typed and use Pg-Up and +Pg-Down to scroll the list in sections. The +space bar selects an item such as a checkbox. Use +&enterkey; to activate choices. + + + +S/390 does not support virtual consoles. You may open a second and third +ssh session to view the logs described below. + + + +Error messages are redirected to the third console. +You can access this console by +pressing Left AltF3 +(hold the left Alt key while pressing the +F3 function key); get back to +the main installer process with +Left AltF1. + + + +These messages can also be found in +/var/log/messages. After installation, this log +is copied to /var/log/debian-installer/messages on your +new system. Other installation messages may be found in +/var/log/ during the +installation, and /var/log/debian-installer/ +after the computer has been booted into the installed system. + + + + + + Components Introduction + + +Here is a list of installer components with a brief description +of each component's purpose. Details you might need to know about +using a particular component are in . + + + + + + +main-menu + +Shows the list of components to the user during installer operation, +and starts a component when it is selected. Main-menu's +questions are set to priority medium, so if your priority is set to +high or critical (high is the default), you will not see the menu. On +the other hand, if there is an error which requires your intervention, +the question priority may be downgraded temporarily to allow you +to resolve the problem, and in that case the menu may appear. + + + +You can get to the main menu by selecting the Back button +repeatedly to back all the way out of the currently running component. + + + + + +languagechooser + +Shows a list of languages and language variants. The installer will +display messages in the chosen language, unless the translation for +that language is not complete. When a translation is not complete, +English messages are shown. + + + + + +countrychooser + +Shows a list of countries. The user may choose the country he lives +in. + + + + + +localechooser + +Allows the user to select localization options for the installation and +the installed system: language, country and locales. The installer will +display messages in the selected language, unless the translation for +that language is not complete in which case some messages may be shown +in English. + + + + + +kbd-chooser + +Shows a list of keyboards, from which the user chooses the model which +matches his own. + + + + + +hw-detect + +Automatically detects most of the system's hardware, including network +cards, disk drives, and PCMCIA. + + + + + +cdrom-detect + +Looks for and mounts a Debian installation CD. + + + + + +netcfg + +Configures the computer's network connections so it can communicate +over the internet. + + + + + +iso-scan + +Looks for ISO file systems, which may be on a CD-ROM or on the +hard drive. + + + + + +choose-mirror + +Presents a list of Debian archive mirrors. The user may choose +the source of his installation packages. + + + + + +cdrom-checker + +Checks integrity of a CD-ROM. This way the user may assure him/herself +that the installation CD-ROM was not corrupted. + + + + + +lowmem + +Lowmem tries to detect systems with low memory and then does various +tricks to remove unnecessary parts of &d-i; from the memory (at the +cost of some features). + + + + + +anna + +Anna's Not Nearly APT. Installs packages which have been retrieved +from the chosen mirror or CD. + + + + + +partman + +Allows the user to partition disks attached to the system, create file +systems on the selected partitions, and attach them to the +mountpoints. Included are also interesting features like a fully +automatic mode or LVM support. This is the preferred partitioning tool +in Debian. + + + + + +autopartkit + +Automatically partitions an entire disk according to preset +user preferences. + + + + + +partitioner + +Allows the user to partition disks attached to the system. A +partitioning program appropriate to your computer's architecture +is chosen. + + + + + +partconf + +Displays a list of partitions, and creates file systems on +the selected partitions according to user instructions. + + + + + +lvmcfg + +Helps the user with the configuration of the +LVM (Logical Volume Manager). + + + + + +mdcfg + +Allows the user to setup Software RAID +(Redundant Array of Inexpensive Disks). This Software RAID is usually +superior to the cheap IDE (pseudo hardware) RAID controllers found on +newer motherboards. + + + + + +base-installer + +Installs the most basic set of packages which would allow +the computer to operate under Linux when rebooted. + + + + + +os-prober + +Detects currently installed operating systems on the computer and +passes this information to the bootloader-installer, which may offer +you an ability to add discovered operating systems to the bootloader's +start menu. This way the user could easily choose at the boot time +which operating system to start. + + + + + +bootloader-installer + +Installs a boot loader program on the hard disk, which is necessary +for the computer to start up using Linux without using a floppy or +CD-ROM. Many boot loaders allow the user to choose an alternate +operating system each time the computer boots. + + + + + +base-config + +Provides dialogs for setting up the base system packages according +to user preferences. This is normally done after rebooting the +computer; it is the first run of the new Debian system. + + + + + +shell + +Allows the user to execute a shell from the menu, or in the second +console. + + + + + +bugreportersave-logs + +Provides a way for the user to record information on a floppy +disk, network, hard disk, or other media +when trouble is encountered, in order to accurately report installer +software problems to Debian developers later. + + + + + + + + +&using-d-i-components.xml; + + + diff --git a/en/welcome/about-copyright.xml b/en/welcome/about-copyright.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8b456f828 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/welcome/about-copyright.xml @@ -0,0 +1,92 @@ + + + + +About Copyrights and Software Licenses + + + + +We're sure that you've read some of the licenses that come with most +commercial software — they usually say that you can only use one +copy of the software on a single computer. This system's license +isn't like that at all. We encourage you to put a copy of on every +computer in your school or place of business. Lend your installation +media to your friends and help them install it on their computers! +You can even make thousands of copies and sell +them — albeit with a few restrictions. Your freedom to install +and use the system comes directly from Debian being based on +free software. + + + +Calling software free doesn't mean that the software isn't +copyrighted, and it doesn't mean that CDs containing that software +must be distributed at no charge. Free software, in part, means that +the licenses of individual programs do not require you to pay for the +privilege of distributing or using those programs. Free software also +means that not only may anyone extend, adapt, and modify the software, +but that they may distribute the results of their work as +well. + + + +The Debian project, as a pragmatic concession to its users, +does make some packages available that do not meet our criteria for +being free. These packages are not part of the official distribution, +however, and are only available from the +contrib or non-free +areas of Debian mirrors or on third-party CD-ROMs; see the +Debian FAQ, under +The Debian FTP archives, for more information about the +layout and contents of the archives. + + + + + +Many of the programs in the system are licensed under the +GNU General Public License, +often simply referred to as the GPL. The GPL requires you to make +the source code of the programs available +whenever you distribute a binary copy of the program; that provision +of the license ensures that any user will be able to modify the +software. Because of this provision, the source code + + +For information on how to locate, unpack, and build +binaries from Debian source packages, see the +Debian FAQ, +under Basics of the Debian Package Management System. + + + for all such programs is available in the Debian system. + + + +There are several other forms of copyright statements and software +licenses used on the programs in Debian. You can find the copyrights +and licenses for every package installed on your system by looking in +the file +/usr/share/doc/package-name/copyright + +once you've installed a package on your system. + + + +For more information about licenses and how Debian determines whether +software is free enough to be included in the main distribution, see the +Debian Free Software Guidelines. + + + +The most important legal notice is that this software comes with +no warranties. The programmers who have created this +software have done so for the benefit of the community. No guarantee +is made as to the suitability of the software for any given purpose. +However, since the software is free, you are empowered to modify that +software to suit your needs — and to enjoy the benefits of the +changes made by others who have extended the software in this way. + + + diff --git a/en/welcome/doc-organization.xml b/en/welcome/doc-organization.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1fcbc8d0b --- /dev/null +++ b/en/welcome/doc-organization.xml @@ -0,0 +1,120 @@ + + + + + Organization of This Document + + + +This document is meant to serve as a manual for first-time Debian +users. It tries to make as few assumptions as possible about your +level of expertise. However, we do assume that you have a general +understanding of how the hardware in your computer works. + + + +Expert users may also find interesting reference information in this +document, including minimum installation sizes, details about the +hardware supported by the Debian installation system, and so on. We +encourage expert users to jump around in the document. + + + +In general, this manual is arranged in a linear fashion, walking you +through the installation process from start to finish. Here are the +steps in installing &debian;, and the sections of this document which +correlate with each step: + + + + +Determine whether your hardware meets the requirements for using the +installation system, in . + + + + +Backup your system, perform any necessary planning and hardware +configuration prior to installing Debian, in . If +you are preparing a multi-boot system, you may need to create +partition-able space on your hard disk for Debian to use. + + + + +In , you will obtain the necessary +installation files for your method of installation. + + + + + describes booting into the +installation system. This chapter also discusses troubleshooting +procedures in case you have problems with this step. + + + + +Perform the actual installation according to +. This involves choosing your language, +configuring peripheral driver modules, configuring your network +connection, so that remaining installation files can be obtained +directly from a Debian server (if you are not installing from a CD), +partitioning your hard drives and installation of minimal working +system. +(Some background about setting up the partitions for your Debian +system is explained in .) + + + + +Boot into your newly installed base system and run through some +additional configuration tasks, from . + + + + +Install additional software in . + + + + + + +Once you've got your system installed, you can read +. That chapter explains where to +look to find more information about Unix and Debian, and how to +replace your kernel. + + + + + +Finally, information about this document and how to contribute to it +may be found in . + + + + + + + Your Documentation Help is Welcome + + + +Any help, suggestions, and especially, patches, are greatly +appreciated. Working versions of this document can be found at +. There you will find a list of all the different +architectures and languages for which this document is available. + + + +Source is also available publicly; look in +for more information concerning how to contribute. +We welcome suggestions, comments, patches, and bug reports (use the +package &d-i-manual; for bugs, but check first to see if the problem is +already reported). + + + diff --git a/en/welcome/getting-newest-doc.xml b/en/welcome/getting-newest-doc.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..859ac23a3 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/welcome/getting-newest-doc.xml @@ -0,0 +1,18 @@ + + + + + Getting the Newest Version of This Document + + + +This document is constantly being revised. Be sure to check the + +Debian &release; pages for any last-minute information about +the &release; release of the &debian; system. Updated versions of +this installation manual are also available from the +official Install Manual pages. + + + + diff --git a/en/welcome/getting-newest-inst.xml b/en/welcome/getting-newest-inst.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..191abdd2f --- /dev/null +++ b/en/welcome/getting-newest-inst.xml @@ -0,0 +1,24 @@ + + + + + Getting Debian + + + +For information on how to download &debian; from the Internet +or from whom official Debian CDs can be purchased, see the +distribution web page. +The list of Debian mirrors +contains a full set of official Debian +mirrors, so you can easily find the nearest one. + + + +Debian can be upgraded after installation very easily. The +installation procedure will help set up the system so that you can +make those upgrades once installation is complete, if need be. + + + + diff --git a/en/welcome/welcome.xml b/en/welcome/welcome.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ee3a90c8c --- /dev/null +++ b/en/welcome/welcome.xml @@ -0,0 +1,23 @@ + + + +Welcome to Debian + + +This chapter provides an overview of the Debian Project and +&debian;. If you already know about the Debian Project's +history and the &debian; distribution, feel free to skip to +the next chapter. + + + +&what-is-debian.xml; +&what-is-linux.xml; +&what-is-debian-linux.xml; +&what-is-debian-hurd.xml; +&getting-newest-inst.xml; +&getting-newest-doc.xml; +&doc-organization.xml; +&about-copyright.xml; + + diff --git a/en/welcome/what-is-debian-hurd.xml b/en/welcome/what-is-debian-hurd.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..37f64d0ff --- /dev/null +++ b/en/welcome/what-is-debian-hurd.xml @@ -0,0 +1,29 @@ + + + + + + What is Debian GNU/Hurd? + + + +Debian GNU/Hurd is a Debian GNU system that replaces the Linux +monolithic kernel with the GNU Hurd — a set of servers running on +top of the GNU Mach microkernel. The Hurd is still unfinished, and is +unsuitable for day-to-day use, but work is continuing. The Hurd is +currently only being developed for the i386 architecture, although +ports to other architectures will be made once the system becomes more +stable. + + + +For more information, see the + +Debian GNU/Hurd ports page +and the debian-hurd@lists.debian.org +mailing list. + + + + diff --git a/en/welcome/what-is-debian-linux.xml b/en/welcome/what-is-debian-linux.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..db2cd2306 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/welcome/what-is-debian-linux.xml @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + What is &debian;? + + +The combination of Debian's philosophy and methodology and the GNU +tools, the Linux kernel, and other important free software, form a +unique software distribution called &debian;. This +distribution is made up of a large number of software +packages. Each package in the distribution +contains executables, scripts, documentation, and configuration +information, and has a maintainer who is +primarily responsible for keeping the package up-to-date, tracking bug +reports, and communicating with the upstream author(s) of the packaged +software. Our extremely large user base, combined with our bug +tracking system ensures that problems are found and fixed quickly. + + + +Debian's attention to detail allows us to produce a high-quality, +stable, and scalable distribution. Installations can be easily +configured to serve many roles, from stripped-down firewalls to +desktop scientific workstations to high-end network servers. + + + +Debian is especially popular among advanced users because of its +technical excellence and its deep commitment to the needs and +expectations of the Linux community. Debian also introduced many +features to Linux that are now commonplace. + + + +For example, Debian was the first Linux distribution to include a +package management system for easy installation and removal of +software. It was also the first Linux distribution that could be +upgraded without requiring reinstallation. + + + +Debian continues to be a leader in Linux development. Its development +process is an example of just how well the Open Source development +model can work — even for very complex tasks such as building and +maintaining a complete operating system. + + + +The feature that most distinguishes Debian from other Linux +distributions is its package management system. These tools give the +administrator of a Debian system complete control over the packages +installed on that system, including the ability to install a single +package or automatically update the entire operating system. +Individual packages can also be protected from being updated. You can +even tell the package management system about software you have +compiled yourself and what dependencies it fulfills. + + + +To protect your system against Trojan horses and other malevolent +software, Debian's servers verify that uploaded packages come from +their registered Debian maintainers. Debian packagers also take great +care to configure their packages in a secure manner. When security +problems in shipped packages do appear, fixes are usually available +very quickly. With Debian's simple update options, security fixes can +be downloaded and installed automatically across the Internet. + + + +The primary, and best, method of getting support for your &debian; +system and communicating with Debian Developers is through +the many mailing lists maintained by the Debian Project (there are +more than &num-of-debian-maillists; at this writing). The easiest +way to subscribe to one or more of these lists is visit + +Debian's mailing list subscription page and fill out the form +you'll find there. + + + + diff --git a/en/welcome/what-is-debian.xml b/en/welcome/what-is-debian.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..dcd384c65 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/welcome/what-is-debian.xml @@ -0,0 +1,112 @@ + + + + + What is Debian? + + +Debian is an all-volunteer organization dedicated to developing free +software and promoting the ideals of the Free Software Foundation. +The Debian Project began in 1993, when Ian Murdock issued an open +invitation to software developers to contribute to a complete and +coherent software distribution based on the relatively new Linux +kernel. That relatively small band of dedicated enthusiasts, +originally funded by the +Free Software Foundation +and influenced by the +GNU +philosophy, has grown over the years into an organization of around +&num-of-debian-developers; Debian Developers. + + + +Debian Developers are involved in a variety of activities, including +Web +and FTP +site administration, graphic design, legal analysis of +software licenses, writing documentation, and, of course, maintaining +software packages. + + + +In the interest of communicating our philosophy and attracting +developers who believe in the principles that Debian stands for, the +Debian Project has published a number of documents that outline our +values and serve as guides to what it means to be a Debian Developer: + + + + +The +Debian Social Contract is +a statement of Debian's commitments to the Free Software Community. +Anyone who agrees to abide to the Social Contract may become a +maintainer. +Any maintainer can introduce new software into Debian — provided +that the software meets our criteria for being free, and the package +follows our quality standards. + + + + +The +Debian Free Software Guidelines are a +clear and concise statement of Debian's criteria for free software. +The DFSG is a very influential document in the Free Software Movement, +and was the foundation of the +The Open Source Definition. + + + + +The +Debian Policy Manual is an +extensive specification of the Debian Project's standards of quality. + + + + + +Debian developers are also involved in a number of other projects; +some specific to Debian, others involving some or all of the Linux +community. Some examples include: + + + + +The +Linux Standard Base +(LSB) is a project aimed at standardizing the basic GNU/Linux system, +which will enable third-party software and hardware developers to +easily design programs and device drivers for Linux-in-general, rather +than for a specific GNU/Linux distribution. + + + + +The +Filesystem Hierarchy Standard +(FHS) is an effort to standardize the layout of the Linux +file system. The FHS will allow software developers to concentrate +their efforts on designing programs, without having to worry about how +the package will be installed in different GNU/Linux distributions. + + + + +Debian Jr. +is an internal project, aimed at making sure Debian has something to +offer to our youngest users. + + + + + + +For more general information about Debian, see the +Debian FAQ. + + + + + diff --git a/en/welcome/what-is-linux.xml b/en/welcome/what-is-linux.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e1608c090 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/welcome/what-is-linux.xml @@ -0,0 +1,96 @@ + + + + + What is GNU/Linux? + + +Linux is an operating system: a series of programs that let you +interact with your computer and run other programs. + + + +An operating system consists of various fundamental programs which are +needed by your computer so that it can communicate and receive +instructions from users; read and write data to hard disks, tapes, and +printers; control the use of memory; and run other software. The most +important part of an operating system is the kernel. In a GNU/Linux +system, Linux is the kernel component. The rest of the system +consists of other programs, many of which were written by or for the +GNU Project. Because the Linux kernel alone does not form a working +operating system, we prefer to use the term GNU/Linux +to refer to systems that many people casually refer to as +Linux. + + + +Linux is modelled on the Unix operating system. From the start, Linux +was designed to be a multi-tasking, multi-user system. These facts are +enough to make Linux different from other well-known operating +systems. However, Linux is even more different than you might +imagine. In contrast to other operating systems, nobody owns +Linux. Much of its development is done by unpaid volunteers. + + + +Development of what later became GNU/Linux began in 1984, when the +Free Software Foundation +began development of a free Unix-like operating system called GNU. + + + +The GNU Project has developed a comprehensive set of free software +tools for use with Unix™ and Unix-like operating systems such as +Linux. These tools enable users to perform tasks ranging from the +mundane (such as copying or removing files from the system) to the +arcane (such as writing and compiling programs or doing sophisticated +editing in a variety of document formats). + + + +While many groups and individuals have contributed to Linux, the +largest single contributor is still the Free Software Foundation, +which created not only most of the tools used in Linux, but also the +philosophy and the community that made Linux possible. + + + +The Linux kernel first +appeared in 1991, when a Finnish computing science student named Linus +Torvalds announced an early version of a replacement kernel for Minix +to the Usenet newsgroup comp.os.minix. See +Linux International's +Linux History Page. + + + +Linus Torvalds continues to coordinate the work of several hundred +developers with the help of a few trusty deputies. An excellent +weekly summary of discussions on the +linux-kernel mailing list is +Kernel Traffic. +More information about the linux-kernel mailing +list can be found on the +linux-kernel mailing list FAQ. + + + +Linux users have immense freedom of choice in their software. For +example, Linux users can choose from a dozen different command line +shells and several graphical desktops. This selection is often +bewildering to users of other operating systems, who are not used to +thinking of the command line or desktop as something that they can +change. + + + +Linux is also less likely to crash, better able to run more than one +program at the same time, and more secure than many operating +systems. With these advantages, Linux is the fastest growing operating +system in the server market. More recently, Linux has begun to be +popular among home and business users as well. + + + + + -- cgit v1.2.3